MiCOM P139 TechnicalManual1

MiCOM P139
Feeder Management and Bay Control
P139/EN M/Ana
Version P139 -307 -411/412/413 -614

P139 -308 -414/415/416 -630
P139 -308 -414/415/416 -615
P139 -308 -414/415/416 -616
P139 -309 -414/415/416 -631
P139 -308 -414/415/416 -617
P139 -309 -414/415/416 -632
P139 -308 -414/415/416 -618
P139 -309 -414/415/416 -633
Technical Manual
Content P139/EN M/Ea8 (-614)

P139/EN AD/Bk9 (-630)
P139/EN AD/Ab9 (-615)
P139/EN AD/Ac9 (-616)
P139/EN AD/Bka (-631)
P139/EN AD/Ad9 (-617)
P139/EN AD/Ama (-632)
P139/EN AD/Ae9 (-618)
P139/EN AD/Ana (-633)
Volume 1 of 2
MiCOM P139
Feeder Management and Bay Control
P139/EN M/Ea8
(AFSV.12.10172 D)
Version P139 -307 -411/412/413 -614
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment.
Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment
and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used,
insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be employed.
The signals 'M a i n : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y ' and 'S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) ' (permanently assigned to the LEDs
labeled 'OUT OF SERVICE' and 'ALARM') can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the
device. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made
without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/G11 or later version), with the
warnings in Chapters 5, 9, 10 and 11 and with the content of Chapter 13, before working on the equipment. If
the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.
Installation of the DHMI:
A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be connected to the DHMI protective
conductor terminal to link the DHMI and the main relay case; these must be located within the same
substation.
To avoid the risk of electric shock the DHMI communication cable must not be in contact with hazardous live
parts.
The DHMI communication cable must not be routed or placed alongside high-voltage cables or connections.
Currents can be induced in the cable which may result in electromagnetic interference.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;
are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-
energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning and operation. However, the manual cannot
cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do
not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate Schneider Electric technical sales office and request the
necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider Electric, including settlement of
warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
3
Changes after going to press
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-3
2.3.1 Type Tests 2-3
2.3.2 Routine Tests 2-6
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-6
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-6
2.6 Interfaces 2-9
2.7 Information Output 2-11
2.8 Settings 2-11
2.9 Deviations 2-12
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-12
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-13
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-14
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition 2-15
2.11 Recording Functions 2-16
2.12 Power supply 2-17
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications 2-18
2.14 Connecting NCITs to Inputs on the CT/VT-Board with NCIT 2-21
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured (LOC)* 3-4
Value Panels; Selection of the Control Point
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-12
3.4.1 PC interface (PC) 3-12
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (COMM1) 3-14
3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (COMM2) 3-23
3.4.4 Communication interface 3 (COMM3) 3-26
3.4.5 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (IEC, 3-31
GOOSE,
GSSE)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (IRIGB) 3-39
3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary (INP) 3-40
Inputs
3.7 Measured Data Input (MEASI) 3-42
3.7.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y 3-44
3.7.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer 3-49
to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the Analog (I/O)
Module Y
3.7.3 Connecting Temperature Sensors to the 3-50
Temperature P/C Board (the RTD Module)
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of (OUTP) 3-54
the Output Relays
3.9 Measured Data Output (MEASO) 3-57
3.9.1 BCD Measured Data Output 3-60
3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-65
3.9.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data 3-71
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED (LED) 3-72
Indicators
________________________
* : Function Group(s), Short Form
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Contents
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (MAIN) 3-74

3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control 3-74
3.11.2 Bay Type Selection 3-78
3.11.3 Conditioning of the Measured Variables 3-79
3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement 3-81
3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions 3-98
3.11.6 Activation of Dynamic Parameters 3-102
3.11.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) 3-103
3.11.8 Function Blocks 3-105
3.11.9 Multiple Blocking 3-106
3.11.10 Blocked/Faulty 3-107
3.11.11 Coupling between Control and Protection for the 3-108
CB Closed Signal
3.11.12 Close Command 3-109
3.11.13 Multiple Signaling 3-111
3.11.14 Ground Fault Signaling 3-113
3.11.15 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic 3-115
3.11.16 CB Trip Signal 3-122
3.11.17 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the 3-124
Control Functions
3.11.18 Monitoring the Switchgear Unit Motor Drives 3-127
3.11.19 Communication Error 3-128
3.11.20 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization 3-129
3.11.21 Resetting Actions 3-131
3.11.22 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical 3-134
Communications Channels
3.11.23 Test mode 3-135
3.12 Parameter subset selection (PSS) 3-136
3.13 Self-Monitoring (SFMON) 3-138
3.14 Operating Data Recording (OP_RC) 3-141
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (MT_RC) 3-142
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (OL_DA) 3-143
3.17 Overload Recording (OL_RC) 3-146
3.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (GF_DA) 3-149
3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State 3-150
Power Evaluation
3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State 3-152
Current Evaluation
3.18.3 Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance 3-154
Evaluation
3.19 Ground fault recording (GF_RC) 3-156
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (FT_DA) 3-159
3.21 Fault Recording (FT_RC) 3-171
3.22 Time-Overcurrent Protection (DTOC) 3-177
3.23 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (IDMT_1, 3-191
IDMT_2)
3.24 Short-Circuit Direction Determination (SCDD) 3-208
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (SOTF) 3-222
3.26 Protective Signaling (PSIG) 3-224
P139/EN M/Ca8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Contents
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC) 3-230

3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) 3-249
3.27.2 Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions 3-251
3.27.3 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR) 3-254
3.27.4 ARC Counters 3-256
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (ASC) 3.257
3.29 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using (GFDSS) 3-273
Steady-State Values
3.29.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation 3-276
3.29.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation 3-281
3.29.3 Steady-State Admittance 3-283
3.29.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady- 3-289
State Power and Admittance Evaluation
3.30 Transient Ground Fault Direction Determination (TGFD) 3-290
3.31 Motor Protection (MP) 3-298
3.31.1 Overload Protection 3-301
3.31.2 Special Overload Protection Cases 3-309
3.31.3 Low Load Protection 3-313
3.31.4 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines 3-313
3.31.5 Running Time Meter 3-314
3.32 Thermal Overload Protection (THERM) 3-315
3.33 Unbalance Protection (I2>) 3-325
3.34 Time-Voltage Protection (V<>) 3-327
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (f<>) 3-338
3.36 Power Directional Protection (P<>) 3-345
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF) 3-364
3.38 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (CBM) 3-373
3.39 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (MCMON) 3-383

3.40 Limit Value Monitoring (LIMIT) 3-389
3.41 Programmable Logic (LOGIC) 3-401
3.42 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (DEV01 to 3-408
DEV10)
3.42.1 Processing Status Signals from Manually 3-409
Operated Switchgear Units
3.42.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear 3-411
Units
3.43 Interlocking logic (ILOCK) 3-427
3.44 Single-Pole Commands (CMD_1) 3-429
3.45 Single-Pole Signals (SIG_1) 3-430
3.46 Binary Counts (COUNT) 3-432
P139/EN M/Ca8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Contents
(continued)
4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs 4-1
4.2 Dimensional Drawings 4-3
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case 4-3
4.2.2 Flush Mounted Case 4-4
4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI 4-6
4.3 Modules 4-7
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type 5-2
5.3 Location Requirements 5-3
5.4 Installation 5-4
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding 5-11
5.6 Connection 5-12
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-12
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B interface. 5-21
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-21
5.7 Location diagrams 5-25
5.8 Terminal Connection Diagrams 5-26
6 Local Control Panel 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing between Display Levels 6-8
6.3 Display Illumination 6-9
6.4 Control at Panel Level 6-9
6.4.1 Bay Panel 6-9
6.4.2 Signal Panel(s) 6-16
6.4.3 Measured Value Panels 6-19
6.4.4 Event Panel 6-20
6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-21
6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree 6-21
6.5.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-22
6.5.3 Parameter Change Enable 6-23
6.5.4 Changing Parameters 6-26
6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter 6-27
6.5.6 Memory Readout 6-29
6.5.7 Reset 6-33
6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-34
6.5.9 Changing the Password 6-35
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameter 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-2
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters 7-6
7.1.3 Function Parameters 7-67
7.1.3.1 Global 7-67
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-75
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets 7-95
7.1.3.4 Control 7-121
7.2 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines 7-130
7.2.1 General 7-130
7.2.2 Restrictive Safety-Oriented Configuration 7-131
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Contents
(continued)
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Healthy 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-10
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-17
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-48
8.1.3 Operating data recording 8-54
8.2 Events 8-55
8.2.1 Event Counters 8-55
8.2.2 Measured Event Data 8-57
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-62
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1
Appendix AN-1
Contents AN-2
A Glossary A-1
B List of Signals B-1
C List of Bay Types C-1
D Overview of Changes D-1
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614
1 Application and Scope
The P139 time-overcurrent protection and control device is a one-box solution for
protection and control.
The protection functions available in the device provide selective short-circuit protection,
ground fault protection, and overload protection in medium- and high-voltage systems.
The systems can be operated as impedance-grounded, resonant-grounded, grounded-
neutral or isolated-neutral systems. The multitude of protection functions incorporated
into the device enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of
cable and line sections, transformers and motors. The relevant protection parameters
can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in order to adapt the protection
device to different operating and power system management conditions.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to six electrically operated
switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a
medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic topology). The P139
has almost 300 predefined Bay Types stored for selection and it is also possible to load
user-defined bay templates.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the integration
of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and versatile relay output
contacts, by the direct connection option for current and voltage transformers, and by the
comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This simplifies the handling of switch bay
protection and control technology from planning to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device parameters
and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-permissible switching
operations.
The P139 is equipped with a large number of protection and control functions.
These can be individually configured and cancelled.
These features give the user the means to adapt the device to the protection and control
capacity required in a specific application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes it
possible to accommodate special applications.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-1

(continued)
Protection functions P139 P139
50/51 P,Q,N DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection, four stages, phase selective
(includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection)
51 P,Q,N (IDMT1, IDMT2) Inverse-time overcurrent protection, one stage, phase selective
(includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection)
67 P,N SCDD Short-circuit direction determination
50 SOTF Switch on to fault protection
85 PSIG Protective signaling
79 ARC Auto-reclosing control (three-pole)
25 ASC Automatic synchronism check ( )
67W/YN GFDSS Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values or
admittance evaluation
TGFD Transient ground fault direction determination ( )
37/48/49/
MP Motor protection
49LR/50S/66
49 THERM Thermal overload protection
46 I2> Unbalance protection
27/59/47 V<> Time-Voltage Protection
81 f<> Frequency protection
32 P<> Power directional protection
50BF CBF Circuit breaker failure protection
CBM Circuit breaker supervision
MCMON Measuring-circuit monitoring
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LOGIC Programmable logic
Control functions P139

DEV01 to DEV10 Control and monitoring of three or six switchgear units or ( )
CMD_1 Single-pole commands
SIG_1 Single-pole signals
ILOCK Interlocking logic
COUNT Binary integrated total
Communication Functions P139

COMM1, COMM2 2 information interfaces
IRIGB IRIG-B ( )
COMM3 InterMiCOM protective interface
IEC IEC 61850 interface ( )
Measured Value Functions P139

MEASI 20mA input, 2 x 20mA outputs,
( )
MEASO inputs for resistance thermometers
= standard; ( ) = Ordering option
For further functions see Appendix A1
1-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
General Functions
Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except for
ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the specific
application requirements. Unused or cancelled function groups are hidden to the user,
thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be included in or
excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch "General Functions" of
the menu tree.
Control functions
Switchgear contact positions are acquired by the through up to 20 binary signal inputs,
that can signal and process a maximum of 10 two-pole contact positions. A maximum of
12 output relays are available to control a maximum of 10 two-pole switchgear units.
Up to 40 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they are
processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each binary
signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can have the
debouncing and chatter suppression from eight groups assigned, for which the
debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
A binary signal input is configurable to acquire a binary counter value. The binary
integrated total is stored should the supply voltage fail. Counting continues from the
stored total as the starting value when the device restarts.
The sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and validity to carry
out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of the switchgear units. If
the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has failed, it will signal this
information (e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the checks if this new
switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The interlocking logic
is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station interlocking, for each Bay
Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions can be adapted to the actual bay
and station topology. Interlocking display and operation correspond to the
programmable logic.
When a is included in a station control system the local interlocking can easily be
integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the device is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is issued.
If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then the issuing of
such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary outputs
can be freely utilized for other purposes.
Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by persistent
commands.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-3

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the is equipped with the
following global functions:
Parameter subset selection

System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and
operation
Operating data recording
(time-tagged event logging)
Overload data acquisition
Overload recording
Ground fault data acquisition
Ground fault recording
Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the
three phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
C o n tro/Mo
l n ito rin g o f u p InterMiCOM Se lf-
Co mmu n ica tio ns COMM1 COMM2 IEC IRIGB R e co rd in g a n d Overload
to 3, o r o p tio n a lly u p to6, Mo n ito rin g
d a ta
sw itch g e a r u n its
a cq u isitio n
Ground Fault
D EV IL OC K to SC AD A / su b sta tio n co n tro l/ R TU / mo d e m ...
via R S4 8 5 o r Fib re Op tics
u sin g IEC 6 0 8 7 0-5 -1 0 1, -1 0 3, Mo d b u s, D N P3,
C o u rie r LIMIT Metering
85 D istu rb a n ce
re sp. via R J4 5 o r Fib re Op tics u sin g IEC 6 1 8 5 0 LOGIC
PSIG
V ref
50/51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 67 P,N 50 49 37 /48/49 /50 S/66 46 50 BF 25 79 6 7W/YN

DTOC IDMT1 IDMT2 I2 > CBM MCMON TGFD
SCDD SOTF THERM MP CBF ASC ARC GFD SS
27 /59 /47 81 32
COUNT SIG_1 CMD _ 1 MEASI MEASO
V<> f<> P<> P139 Feeder Management
a lw a ys w ith VT fu rth e r
a va ila b le in p u ts o p tio n s and Bay Control Unit
1-1 Functional diagram
1-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Design
The P139 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum
case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one digital p/c board.
Inputs and outputs

The following inputs and outputs are available:
4 current-measuring inputs
4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs
8 or 14 output relays, freely-configurable
6 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) and 6 output relays to control 3 switchgear units
or
12 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) and 12 output relays to control 6 switchgear
units
4, 8 or 28 additional binary signal inputs with user-definable function assignment
With the maximum number of binary signal inputs and output relays fitted, 10 switchgear
units can be monitored and 6 of these can be electrically controlled.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can be set.
As an option, currents and voltages from non-conventional instrument transformers can
be connected to the NCIT module.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to 250 V DC.
As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As an option
there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to 36 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional (up to 10) inputs for resistance thermometers on the temperature p/c board
are lead-compensated and balanced.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via
20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined by 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a
selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-5

(continued)
Control and display

Local control panel with LC-display
(16 lines of 21 characters each with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels)
17 LED indicators,
12 with user-definable functional assignment
PC interface
Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Using the first of the two communication interfaces (COMM1), the numerical protection
device can be wired either to the substation control system or to a telecontrol system.
The first communication interface is optionally available with a switcheable protocol
(per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3.0, Modbus or Courier) or as an IEC 61850
interface.
The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per

IEC 60870-5-103 only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.
A direct link to other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by applying the optional
InterMiCOM interface (COMM3).
1-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P139, version -307-411/412/413-614.
Declaration of conformity
(Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The product designated ‘P139 Time-Overcurrent Protection and Control Unit’ has been
designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6
and EN 61010-1 and with the ‘EMC Directive’ and the ‘Low Voltage Directive’ issued by
the Council of the European Community.
2.2 General Data
General device data

Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case.
Weight
40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4) and terminal connection diagrams (Chapter 5).
Terminals
PC interface (X6): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1 to COMM3:

Fiber
(X7, X8 and X31, X32): F-SMA optical fiber connection
per IEC 60874-2 (for plastic fibers)
or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10-1 (for glass fibers)
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Wire leads
(X9, X10 and X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections
up to 1.5 mm²
or (for COMM3 only
(InterMiCOM))
RS 232 (X34): EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Communication interface IEC 61850:

Fiber
(X7, X8): optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5
per IEC 60874-10 (for glass fibers)
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T
Lightguide Cable Connectors)
or
Fiber
(X13): SC connector per IEC 60874-14-4 (for glass fibers)
Wire leads
(X12): RJ45 connector per ISO/IEC 8877.
Current Measuring Inputs (conventional inputs):

Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4
Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)

plugs and sockets per DIN 41652, type D-Sub, 9-pin (male, female)
Other Inputs and Outputs:

Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1 or IEC 664-1
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV,
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200 Ω
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3
Contact discharge
Single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100%.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per EN 61000-4-4 or IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4.
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV
Burst duration:15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Burst frequency: 5 kHz / 2.5 kHz
Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-22-7, Class A:
Phase-to-phase:
RMS value 150 V,
Coupling resistance 100 Ω,
Coupling capacitor 0.1 µF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground:
RMS value 300 V,
Coupling resistance 220 Ω,
Coupling capacitor 0.47 µF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, the parameter
I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) should be set as advised
in Chapter 7.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 µs,
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value:8 / 20 µs
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min
Source impedance: 12 / 42 Ω.
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Test voltage: 10 V.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Test frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11
12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5
2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface and the NCIT current and voltage measuring inputs must not be
subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5
Front time: 1.2 µs
Time to half-value: 50 µs
Peak value: 5 kV,
2-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Mechanical robustness
1(**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation), test
severity class 1 ,
5 g for 11 ms,
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport), test
severity class 1 ,
15 g for 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
Mechanical robustness
2 (**)
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-1 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 2
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.075 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 1.0 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 2 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2,
acceleration and pulse duration:
Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during operation),
test severity class 2,
10 g for 11 ms;
Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during transport),
15 g for 11 ms
Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during transport),
10 g for 16 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 2
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
(**)
Mechanical robustness 2:
Applicable to the following case variants:
Flush mounted case, flush-mounting method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Surface-mounted case
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5
2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5°C to +55°C [+23°F to +131°F].
Limit temperature range: -25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F].
Ambient Humidity Range

≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C (104°F), condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current Measuring Inputs (conventional)
Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable)
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom
or
Current Measuring Inputs (NCIT)
Per IEC 60044-8
NCIT voltage 22.5 mA at 50 A
Voltage Measuring Inputs (conventional)

Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable)
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC.
2-6 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
or
Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)
Per IEC 60044-7
NCIT voltage 3.25 V / √3 at Vnom,prim / √3
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
Binary signal inputs

Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option
18 V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Switching threshold in the range 14 V to 19 V
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58 to 72 % of the nominal input voltage
(i.e. definitively 'low' for VA < 58 % of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively 'high' for VA > 72 % of the nominal supply voltage)
"Special variant 73 V": Nominal supply voltage 110 V DC

Power consumption per input

18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W ± 30 %,
VA > 110 V DC: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA • 5 mA ± 30 %.
Notes
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in most
applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300V DC.
IRIG-B interface
Minimum / maximum input voltage level (peak-peak): 100 mVpp / 20 Vpp.
Input impedance: 33 kΩ at 1 kHz.
Electrical isolation: 2 kV
Direct current input

Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
Input load: 100 Ω
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resistance thermometer
Resistance thermometer:
Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module)
Value range: -40.0°C to +215.0°C (-40°F to +419°F)
3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and ° < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and ° < -40°F)
Direct Current Output
Output current: 0 to 20 mA
Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
Output relays
Binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO):
for switchgear control
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 8A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
All other modules:

Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Continuous current: 5A
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s
Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms,
4 A at 230 V AC and cosϕ = 0.4
BCD measured data output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces
Local control panel

Input or output:
With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels)
State and fault signals:

17 LED indicators (12 permanently assigned, 5 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interface
The communication module can be provided with up to three communication channels,
depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect
wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 870-5-103,

IEC 60870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol based on
IEC 60870-5-103.
Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication

schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection
devices (InterMiCOM protective interface).
Transmission rate: 600 or 19200 baud (adjustable).
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Distance to be bridged: max. 400 m
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m
IEC Communication
interface
Wire Leads
IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
Transmission rate: 10 or 100 Mbit/s
RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
Maximum distance: 100 m
for optical fibers (100 Mbit/s)

IEC 61850-compliant, Ethernet-based communications:
ST connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Optical sensitivity: min. -32.5 dBm
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
Optical sensitivity: min. -32.5 dBm
SC connector
Glass fiber G50/125:
Glass fiber G62.5/125:
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD- coded variable data (daily)
2-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data, and indications: see Chapter 8.
2.8 Settings
Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Definite-time and inverse-time overcurrent protection

Operate time including output relay
(measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value):
≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): ≤ 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Short-circuit direction determination

Nominal acceptance angle for forward decision: ± 90°
Resetting ratio forward/backward recognition: ≤ 7°
Base point release for phase currents:0.1 Inom
Base point release for phase-to-phase voltages: 0.002 Vnom at Vnom = 100 V
Base point release for residual currents:0.01 Inom
Base point release for neutral displacement voltage: 0.015 to 0.6 Vnom/√3 (adjustable)
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable)
Power directional protection

Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for
P>, Q>: 0.05 to 0.95 (adjustable)
P<, Q<: 1.05 to 20 (adjustable)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
Deviation: ± 3 %
Definite-time and inverse-
time overcurrent protection
Phase and Residual Current Stages
Deviation: ± 5 %
Negative-Sequence System Stages

Deviation: ± 5 %
Short-Circuit Direction
Determination
Deviation: ± 10°
Motor protection and

thermal overload protection
(reaction time)
Deviation ± 7.5 % when I/Iref = 6
Unbalance protection
Deviation: ± 5 %
Time-Voltage Protection
Operate Values
V<>, Vpos<>: ± 1 % (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
VNG>, Vneg>: ± 1 % % (in the range > 0.3 Vnom)
Frequency protection
Operate values f<>
± 30 mHz (fnom = 50 Hz)
± 40 mHz (fnom = 60 Hz)
Operate values df/dt

± 0.1 Hz/s (fnom = 50 or 60 Hz)
Power directional
protection
Operate Values P<>, Q<>
Deviation: ± 5 %
2-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Ground Fault Direction

Determination Using
Steady-State Values
(GFDSS)
Operate values VNG>, IN,act>, IN,reac>, IN>
Deviation: ± 3 %
Sector angle:
Deviation: 1°
Direct current input

Deviation: ± 1 %
Resistance thermometer
Deviation: ± 2° or ± 1 %
Analog measured data

output
Deviation: ± 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
Definitions
Deviation
Definite-time stages
Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref:
± 5 % + 10 to 25 ms
for "extremely inverse" IEC characteristics and for thermal overload characteristics:
± 7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
Deviation
Operating Data
Measurement
Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: ± 1 %
Measuring Input Voltages

Deviation: ± 0.5 %
Internally Formed Resultant Current and Negative-Sequence System Current

Deviation: ± 2 %
Internally Formed Neutral-point Displacement Voltage and Voltages of Positive- and

Negative-Sequence Systems
Deviation: ± 2 %
Active and Reactive Power / Active and Reactive Energy

Deviation: ± 2 % when cos ϕ = ± 0.7
Deviation: ± 5 % when cos ϕ = ± 0.3
Load angle
Deviation: ± 1°
Frequency
Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output

Deviation: ± 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: ± 2°BSc
Fault data
Short-Circuit Current and Voltage
Deviation: ± 3 %
Short-Circuit Impedance, Reactance, and Fault Location

Deviation: ± 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min):

Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: ± 1 ms
2-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
Time resolution
20 sampled values per period
Phase currents system

Dynamic range: 100 Inom or 25 Inom
Amplitude resolution:
at Inom = 1 A: 6.1 mArms or 1.5 mArms
Residual current
Dynamic range: 16 Inom or 2 Inom
Amplitude resolution:
Phase-to-ground voltages
and Neutral-point
displacement voltage
Dynamic range: 150 V
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVrms
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.11 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory

Scope for signals: All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of
1024 different logic state signals (see “Operating Data Memory“
in the Address List)
Depth for signals The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope for signals: All signals relevant for self-monitoring from a total of
1024 different logic state signals (see Address List:
"Monitoring Signal Memory")
Depth for signals Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of
1024 different (see Address List: "Overload Memory")
Depth for signals 200 entries per overload event
Ground fault memory

Number: The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope for signals: All signals relevant for a ground fault event from a total of
1024 different (see Address List: "Ground fault memory")
Depth for signals 200 entries per ground fault event
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent faults
Scope for signals: Signals:

All fault-relevant signals from a total of 1024 different
(see Address List: "Fault Memory")
Depth for fault values:

Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals Signals:

200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values:

max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for fnom = 50 Hz)
or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data
Signals
Time resolution: 1 ms
Fault values
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period
2-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)

Dynamic range: 100 Inom / 25 Inom (adjustable)
Amplitude resolution: 6.1 mA r.m.s / 1.5 mA r.m.s for Inom = 1 A
30.5 mA r.m.s / 7.6 mA r.m.s for Inom = 5 A
Residual current
Dynamic range: 16 Inom / 2 Inom (adjustable)
Amplitude resolution: 0.98 mA r.m.s / 0.12 mA r.m.s for Inom = 1 A
4.9 mA r.m.s / 0.61 mA r.m.s for Inom = 5 A
Voltages
Dynamic range: 150 V AC
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mV r.m.s.
2.12 Power supply

Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:
24 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal burden where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration

(relays de-energized/energized): 40 TE case: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
(relays de-energized/energized): 84 TE case: approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
( )
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) ⋅ n ⋅ I nom ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I'1, max
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
I'1,max: non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
Inom: rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rnom: rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
( )
Vsat ≥ R op + R i ⋅ k ⋅ I'1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
(R op + R i ) I1' ,max (Pop + Pi ) I1' , max

n≥ ⋅k⋅ = ⋅k ⋅
(R nom + R i ) I nom (Pnom + Pi ) I nom
With
P nom = R nom ⋅ I 2nom

Pop = R op ⋅ I 2nom
Pi = R i ⋅ I 2nom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max ≈ 1 + ωT1
with:
ω: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-dimensioning

factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function is guaranteed
under the given conditions.
2-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
If the P139 is to be used for definite-time overcurrent protection, then the over-
dimensioning factor k that is to be selected is primarily a function of the ratio of the
maximum short-circuit current to the set operate value and, secondly, of the system time
constant T1. The required over-dimensioning factor can be read from the empirically
determined curves in Figure 2-1. When inverse-time maximum current protection is
used, the over-dimensioning factor can be taken from Figure 2-2.
10
T1= 10 ms
T1= 25 ms
T1= 50 ms
0.1 T1= 500 ms

T1= 100 ms
T1= 250 ms
0.01
1 10 100
I' /I
1,max operate
2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for definite-time overcurrent protection with fnom = 50 Hz
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-19

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2-2 Required over-dimensioning factor for inverse-time maximum current protection with fnom = 50 Hz
2-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.14 Connecting NCITs to Inputs on the CT/VT-Board with NCIT
When the P139 is equipped with a CT/VT-Board with NCIT, non-conventional instrument
transformers per IEC 60044-8 (electronic current transformers) and IEC 60044-7
(electronic voltage transformers) can be connected to the P139 instead of conventional
CTs or VTs.
This feature will enable the user to utilize the advantages that the non-conventional
instrument transformer technology offers and because of the diversity of available
sensors their numbers in the bay may be reduced. Up to five devices can be connected
to one NCIT. (Designing with 200 kΩ terminal resistors is required.)
In addition transformer saturation is avoided and thermal loading of cables and
protection inputs is low because signals are low level/low burden.
Non-conventional instrument Non-conventional instrument

current transformer voltage transformer
Protection device Protection device
*
A A
D D
*option
NCIT_1_EN
2-3 Connecting NCITs to the P139 equipped with a CT/VT-Board with NCIT
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-21

2 Technical Data
(continued)
The NCIT inputs I1 to I3 on the MiCOM P30 series are designed as follows:
Rated range of the primary phase currents from 50 to 4000 A, adjustable in steps of
50 A (M A I N : I n o m p r i m . N C I T )
Dynamic range of measuring input designed for 25 kA
Optimization of the dynamic range through an internal amplification factor which is
defined by the set rated range
Dynamic range 25 Inom / 100 Inom (setting depends on model) similar to standard
processing of measured values
Residual current measurement IN with the NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range:
Generating the residual current by analog summation in order to obtain the highest
sensitivity for the measurand with its own amplification factor
No individual core balance transformer necessary for the measurement of the
sensitive earth fault (residual current)
Rated range of the primary residual currents from 10 to 800 A, adjustable in steps of
10 A (M A I N : I N , n o m p r i m . N C I T )
X3
4 + +
IA (100 x Inom)
5 + -
IA' (25 x Inom)
1 + +
IB (100 x Inom)
2 + -
IB' (25 x Inom)
7 + +
IC (100 x Inom)
+ -
8
IC' (25 x Inom)
IN (16 x Inom)
IN' (2 x Inom)
NCIT_2_EN
2-4 NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range (dynamic range dependent on model)
2-22 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Design of the NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range:

Rated range of the primary phase voltages from 0.1 kV to 1000 kV, adjustable in
steps of 0.1 kV (M A I N : V n o m p r i m . N C I T )
Resolution of the phase voltages makes calculation of neutral-point displacement
voltage VNG possible; no individual VNG VT necessary.
Connecting two voltage systems is possible.
Switching between these voltage systems through
Setting: M A I N : C h a n n e l s e l e c t . N C I T
or
Binary signal inputs M A I N : C h . x a n . N C I T o n E X T ), with x=1,2.
If both binary signal inputs are set then channel 1 is valid.
Setting of the binary signal inputs has priority over the value of the parameter setting.
Also possible is the setting 'Without channel' (neither channel 1 or channel 2
selected).
The channel for the second voltage group can be applied to the ASC function
(Automatic Synchronism Check).
Phase error correction is possible by setting the following parameters:
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph. err. VBG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph.e.VBG/Vref,2 NCIT
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-23

2 Technical Data
(continued)
V X1
4 +
O
L 5 - V1
B
T +
B 1
A1 -
2 V2
G
E 7 +
8 - V3
X2
V 4
+
O -
LB 5
+
TB 1
Vref
A2 2
-
G +
7
E -
8
NCIT_3_EN
2-5 NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range
2-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P139, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P139.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals generated by the device internally are connected to external plant via contacts
through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power
supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus module B to
the processor module P. The processor module contains all the elements necessary for
the conversion of measured analog variables, including multiplexers and analog/digital
converters. The analog data conditioned by the analog I/O module Y is transferred to
the processor module P via the digital bus module. Binary signals are fed to the
processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The
processor handles the processing of digitized measured variables and of binary signals,
generates the protective trip as well as control commands and signals, and transfers
them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication. As an option, communication module A can be
mounted on the processor module to provide serial communication with substation
control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between the user
and the device:
Integrated local control panel (LOC)

PC interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are arranged
within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is uniform throughout the
device family. The main branches are:
‘Parameters’ branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings, including the
device identification data, the configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces
to the system, and the function parameters for adapting the device functions to the
process. All values in this group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that
the values will be preserved even if the power supply fails.
‘Operation’ branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here, for example those for
resetting counters, memories and displays.
‘Events’ branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this group is
therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the measured fault
data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can be read out when
required.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the user’s choice. The appendix documents the settings and signals of the P139 in
the form of an ‘address list’. This address list is complete and thus contains all settings,
signals and measured variables used with the P139.
As a rule the local control panel shows the 'Bay Panel' displaying the current switching
states of the switchgear. The configuration of the local control panel also permits the
installation of Measured Value 'Panels’ on the LCD display. Different Panels are
automatically displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from
normal operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation following
a short circuit in the system. Thus the P139 provides the measured data relevant for the
prevailing conditions.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels;
Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)
The layout of a bay with its switchgear units is displayed on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel
usually consists of one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor
from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it
can be sub-divided into up to eight pages. The graphic LCD also permits the display of
Event and configurable Signal Panels. In addition the P139 offers Measured Value
Panels, which display the measured values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or – if activated – the Operation
Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event occurs, the display
switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that measured values have been
selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload or ground fault events, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued

(L O C : P a r a m . c h a n g e e n a b l . ) , it will be cancelled after the time, defined by the
setting L O C : A u t o m . r e t u r n t i m e , has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called
up.
Bay Panel
The P139 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type
be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139.
By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also
define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at
MAIN: Customized bay type.
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a single
line (phase) diagram. The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in the
Chapter entitled "Local Control Panel". The user can switch between two character sets
to represent the switchgear units on the Bay Panel display. The character sets are also
described in Chapter "Local Control Panel". Each external device represented in the
Bay Panel is identified by an external device designation as selected by the user. The
user can also select the designations for busbars and busbar sections. The display of
external device designations can be deactivated. The display of the control point (local
or remote control) and interlocking can also be deactivated.
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is valid for
the set time L O C : R e t u r n t i m e s e l e c t .
The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected
separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an "m out of n" parameter.
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for display as
numerical measured values. However, not all measured values that can be displayed in
numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form. In such cases, a dummy or
placeholder must be included in the selection list for the bar chart display at the same
point at which a measured value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in
the selection list for numerical measured values.
For the bar chart display, the orientation of the bar and the scaling can be selected (the
latter separately for the current and voltage data). Display of the scaling can be
deactivated.
3-4 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-2 Bay Panel
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
Signal Panel
The Signal Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one signal has been
configured. From all physical and logical binary states that the device has available up
to 28 signals can be selected for display on the Signal Panel by an "m out of n"
parameter. This occurs without influencing the Event Panel, which is additionally
available. When more signals are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of signals at intervals defined
by the setting at L O C : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the appropriate key on the local
control panel is pressed. If automatic switching to the Signal Panel is configured at
L O C : A u t . a c t i v . S i g n . P a n e l then the Signal Panel is automatically selected
when there is a change of state for a signal configured in the panel.
With the parameter L O C : S t a t . i n d . S i g n . P a n e l it is possible to differentiate

between the states 'signal active/available' and 'signal inactive/not available' shown on
the Signal Panel. This is shown by the 'clear to black' square alone and the
simultaneous change over from 'normal' display to 'highlighting' of text in the lines. The
type of signaling and the clearing, which may become necessary is selected by setting
LOC: Indicat.Sign.Panel.
LOC: Fct. Signal

Panel
Signal
m out of n
Signal
Signal LOC: Autom. LOC: Autom.
return time
return time
Signal
LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time
Selected signals for Panels for panels
LOC: Aut.activ.
LOC: Indicat.Sign. Sign.Panel
Panel
LOC: Stat.ind.
Sign.Panel
no signal.
flash. panel LOC: Sign.caus.
Sign.Panel
flash. lines
Selection
C
LOC: Chg.Sig.
Panel stat.
Sig. Panel
LOC:Chg.Sig.
Panel flash.
Keys, local control

44Ζ5209Β_ΕΝ
3-3 Signal Panel
3-6 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one measured
value has been configured. The user can select which of the measured operating values
will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an ‘m out of n’ parameter. If more
measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then
the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at
L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control panel
is pressed.
LOC: Fct.
Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC: AAutom. LOC: Autom.

return time return time
Measured value n [ 003 014 ]
LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time

Selected meas. values for Panels for panels
[ 031 075 ]
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
S1 1 ≥1 C
R1
OL_RC: Record.
in progress ≥1
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
GF_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01CXA_EN
3-4 Operation Panel
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC: Fct. Fault

Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected meas.values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA_EN
3-5 Fault panel
3-8 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Ground Fault Panel

The Ground Fault Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when
there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Ground Fault Panel remains on display until the ground fault ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Ground Fault
Panel by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for
display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set
of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
LOC: Fct. Grd.

Fault Panel
[ 053 004 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Selected
measured values
LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Ground Fault Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0139 B_EN
3-6 Ground Fault Panel
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this
case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e fo r P a n e l s or when
LOC: Fct.
Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC: Hold-time
for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0140 A_EN
3-7 Overload Panel
3-10 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the control

point
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between
local and remote control is achieved using either the L/R key on the local control panel or
an external key switch. The position of this switch is interrogated via an appropriately
configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w .) If the input is
configured 'to L/R key switch' then the L/R key on the local control panel is without
function. This setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the
switching (using either the L/R key or the key switch) is between local and remote control
(L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local
control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
LOC: Fct. assign.

L/R key
LOC: Rem.acc.
block.active
Local LOC: Loc.acc.
Remote block.active
Remote & Local LOC:Remote&
local control
MAIN: Inp.asg
L/R key sw.
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
Without function
Selected signal
Keys, local control

19Z5261A_EN
3-8 Selection of the control point
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P139 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is

optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels – depending on
the design version. Communication between the P139 and the control station’s
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all the P139's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P139 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as
the PC interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
If tests are run on the P139, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section
"Main Functions").
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P139 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P139.
There is an operating program available as an accessory for P139 control (see

Chapter 13).
3-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-9 PC interface settings
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
There are several different interface protocols available at the communication interface 1.
The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P139:
IEC 60870-5-103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, "Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2", February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
IEC 870-5-101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks," first edition
1995-11
ILS-C, internal protocol of Schneider Electric
MODBUS
DNP 3.0
COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P139.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition,

a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
3-14 P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-10 Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
COMM1: -103 prot. COMM1: Select.

variant spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: Line idle COMM1: Transm.enab.
state cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: Baud rate COMM1: Cycl. data

ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: Parity bit COMM1: Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: Dead time COMM1: Delta I
monitoring
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: Mon. time COMM1: Delta P
polling
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta f

comm. address
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: Test COMM1: Delta
monitor on meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: Name of
manufacturer COMM1: Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: Octet COMM1: Delta t

address ASDU (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: Spontan. COMM1: Contin.

sig. enable general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: Selected
protocol
304 415
COMM1: IEC
870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1: General
enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: yes
COMM1: Command
blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: Test mode Communications interface COMM1: Communi-

cation error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
COMM1: Sig./
meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0
1
0: No COMM1: Sig./
1: Yes meas.val.block.
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1: Sig./meas.
block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN: Prot. ext.
disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA_EN
3-11 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
3-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
3-13 Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-14 Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
3-15 Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-16 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via setting parameters.
3-17 Checking spontaneous signals
3-22 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P139.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
3-18 Settings for communication interface 2
3-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via setting parameters.
Spontan.
signal start
Spontan.
signal end
3-19 Checking spontaneous signals
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between
two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.
Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to
connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access, communication
interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that will transmit real time
signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its main application is to transmit
signals from protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition, any other internal or
external binary signals may also be transmitted.
Physical medium
COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface.
To transmit data the following physical media are available:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting
parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted.
After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated to this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General enable USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
(C O M M 3 : S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i v i n g a d d r e s s can be set
to different values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission of

eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . s e n d x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals
(C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection
table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen.
3-26 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 t o 8 ) , thus defining the required
checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected
telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of
"Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip'
Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-20). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Direct intertrip'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
47Z1030A_EN
3-20 Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Communication monitoring
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received
telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission
times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking
scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s f a u l t
and
S F M O N : C o m m u n i c . f a u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals are
automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C O M M 3 : D e f a u l t v a l u e r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG with the C O M M 3 : S i g . a s g . c o m m . f a u l t setting.
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . is used to determine a persistent

failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k f a i l u r e and S F M O N : C o m m . l i n k f a i l . C O M M 3 are
issued.
3-28 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Message
received
Character frame &

Source address check
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals

accepted
(Re-)Trigger
COMM3: Time-out
comm.fault
[120 033]
COMM3:
1 Communications
fault
[120 043]
COMM3: Time-out
link fail
[120 035]
COMM3: Comm. link

1 failure
[120 044]
47Z1031 B_EN
3-21 Message processing and communication monitoring
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication
link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as an updating measurand C O M M 3 : N o . t e l . e r r o r s p . u .
and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored.
If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the
corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .
and S F M O N : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are
counted (C O M M 3 : N o . t e l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
C O M M 3 : Rset.No.tlg.err.USER (as well as via the binary signal C O M M 3 : Reset
No.tlg.err.EXT).
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : S t a t e s e n d x and C O M M 3 : S t a t e r e c e i v e x , with
x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for commissioning of the
protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time
set at C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . For this test only, the source address is set
to '0'; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result can
be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon
as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to
the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The transmission
channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by setting individual
binary signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value
for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . The 7 remaining binary
signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with their actual
values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device,
e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode
is reset automatically and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
3-30 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5 Communication Interface IEC61850

(Function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
The IEC 61850 communication protocol is implemented by these function groups and
the Ethernet module.
Note:
Function group IEC is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1
(hardware ordering option!).
3.4.5.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
As a further option the P139 now includes an interface protocol according to the Ethernet
based communication standard IEC 61850.
IEC 61850
IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard.
The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability
of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company
or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level,
for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a
data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically
created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices
and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate
engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device,
based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and
processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control
device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations
and signal images.
The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used
with the P139, is available:
IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language)
with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are
to be imported into the system configurator.
PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of
available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter
addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with
the device data model as per IEC 61850.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
Ethernet Module
The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface
where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces
is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter
I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . For the optical interface on the Ethernet communications
module the user may either select the ordering option ST connector or SC connector
with 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote
access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).
Notes: The P139 may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an
alternative to function group COMM1.

The IEC function group can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
IEC: General enable USER.
The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not
automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e
c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with
MAIN: Device on-line.
Client Log-on
Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is
common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the
'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the
devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices.
A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'.
In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic
information.
In its function as server the P139 can supply up to 16 clients with information.
3-32 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Clock Synchronization
With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as
standard for Ethernet. Here the P139 functions as a SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from
SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization
occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network,
and in the second operating mode the P139 requests the device specific time signal
during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is used only when messages are no
longer received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN
function then, by selecting "COMM1", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically
active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units
Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P139 can be carried out from all
clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is
executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the
execution of such a command are rejected. To control external devices the following
operating modes can be set at
IEC: DEV control model:
Control service mode
Direct enh. security (Direct control with enhanced security)
SBO enh. security (SBO [Select before operate] with enhanced security)
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by
the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the
switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are
rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P139 resets
this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.
The switchgear units’ contact positions signaled to the clients are made with the Report
Control Blocks of the switchgear units.
Fault Transmission
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
Transmission of "Goose
Messages"
The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas
normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose
Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority.
Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the
respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850
"Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between
two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a
transfer trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will
therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.
According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", GSSE and
IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple
configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However IEC-GOOSE
enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more
extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the
opposite side. With IEC-GOOSE the P139 at this time supports sending and receiving of
binary information or two-pole external device states.
Communication with the
Operating Program
MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet
Interface
Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the
device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an
Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating
program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is
accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client
communication and "Goose Messages".
Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such
as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group IEC are described
in chapters 7 and 8.
3-34 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P139 provides function group GOOSE (IEC-GOOSE) as
defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GOOSE features high-speed and secure
transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands,
blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
"Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose
Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.
Function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter
G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional
Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all
data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals
etc.) become visible.
GOOSE: General enable USER.
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals and up to 3 two-pole states from the
maximum of 3 possible external devices associated to the P139 can be sent. Selection of
binary state signals is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32).
The up to 3 two-pole states of the external devices are a fixed part of GOOSE for which
there is no necessity to set parameters. The assignment of data object indexes to logic
state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE
outputs. The two-pole state signals from external devices 1 to 3 receive a permanent
assignment of data object indexes in ascending order from 33 to 35.
GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state
signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending
time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after
2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at
2-second intervals.
In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the
Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered
through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration
Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up
of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string
"System/LLNO$GooseST".
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
GOOSE DataSet: LLN0$GooseST

Identification : Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
VLAN Identifier: 0
VLAN Priority: 4
Application ID : 12288
Goose ID : "This IED "
DataSet Ref. : "This IED System/LLNO"
DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100
Data range: ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.
ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out2/stVal GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

… …
ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out32/stVal GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.
ServernameCONTROL/CSWI1/Pos/stVal DEV01: Control state

…
…
49Z6101B _EN
3-22 Basic structure of sent GOOSE
Receiving GOOSE
With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals and the two-pole contact position signals
from up to 16 external devices can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals
received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 16)) is made on the basis of the
selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). Contact position signals
received from external devices are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations
of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design a decentralized substation
interlock.
For each state or contact position signal to be received from an external device the
"Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the
Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the
data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the required
information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The device will not evaluate the
identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset Configuration Revision’ that are also
included in the GOOSE received.
3-36 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective
default values G O O S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t or G O O S E : E x t . D e v n d e f a u l t
(n = 1 to 16).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.5.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)
For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic

devices) in a local network, the P139 provides, as an additional functionality, the function
group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the IEC 61850 standard. GSSE features
high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse
interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.
Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication
module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this
function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
GSSE: General enable USER.
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and
enabled.
Sending GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of binary state
signals is made by setting
G S S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each selected state signal is to be
assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (G S S E : O u t p u t n b i t p a i r (n = 1 to 32)), which will
transmit this state signal.
GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will
be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs
at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for
the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set
with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to
the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then
GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which
was set in function group IEC.
Receiving GSSE
With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the
logic binary state signals received
(G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32))
is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the required
information, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ) .
Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair
(G S S E : B i t p a i r ) .
Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information.
This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration
of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a
communications fault), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective
default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).
The various settings, measured values and signals for function group GOOSE are
described in chapters 7 and 8.
3-38 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)
If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal clock of
the P139 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional IRIG-B interface.
It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on the day only (day of the
current year). Using this information and the year set at the P139, the P139 calculates
the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling or enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled via a setting parameter.
Synchronization readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P139 checks the received
signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P139. If the P139 does not
receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will not be ready any longer.
3-23 IRIG-B interface
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P139 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated in the P139 by triggering these binary signal inputs
are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs. In order to ensure that
during normal operation the P139 will recognize an input signal, it must persist for at
least 20 ms. With the occurrence of a general starting this time period may have to be
increased to 40 ms under unfavorable conditions.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization commands

should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O module as these have
an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
Operating mode of the
binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (Active 'high' mode) or absence (Active 'low' mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the state of a binary signal
input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the signal
input.
Filter function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference
peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active 'high', filt. or Active 'low', filt.).
With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signaled when
the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps
(sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter
INP: Filter.
3-40 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
INP: Fct.assignm.
Uxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Meas. Function & Function enabled
INP: Mode U xxx

[ YYY XXX ]
2
3
0: active "Low"
1: active "High"
2: active "Low", filt.
3: active "High",filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: Filter &

[ 010 220 ]
&
INP: Control
& U xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213 A_EN
3-24 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
There is a second optional analog module available for the P139. In addition to the
analog (I/O) module Y with analog inputs and outputs there is now a second analog
module obtainable, the temperature p/c board (also called the RTD module).
When the P139 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog inputs
available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P139 through the 20 mA
analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for connection of a PT 100
resistance thermometer.
The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs
available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. These analog inputs are designed
for connection of PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a measured
operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (IDC,lin) is also
displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value
Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit
Value Monitoring").
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values and
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they exceed or
fall below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
All measured variables are also forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function.
With this protection it is possible to set whether the PT 100 resistance thermometer, the
20 mA analog input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9 is to be
used for the thermal replica (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
3-42 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)

measured data input
function
The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
3-25 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the temperature, for
example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured
quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the
measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be
necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with
a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair M E A S I : I D C x and M E A S I : I D C , l i n x , the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the
Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting points, called "interpolation
points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a
simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also
used as limiting values (see figure 3-26). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising or
falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the
signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C will be generated.
IDClin / IDC,nom
1.2
1.1
1
IDClin20
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDClin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC/ IDC,nom
IDC1 IDC20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-26 Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
3-44 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom

Enable IDC p.u.
D5Z52KEC_EN
3-27 Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken
line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the
current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of ‘0’.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c .
2 0 m A i n p . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
M E A S I : O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.
Backup sensors
The open circuit signal on the 20 mA analog input from the function group MEASI is
forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. Here it is possible to set
whether the resistance thermometer connected to the PT 100 input or – if configured –
one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9, connected to the temperature p/c board (the
RTD module), is to be used as a backup sensor (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
3-46 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-28 Analog direct current input
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-29 Scaling of the linearized measured value
3-48 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the
Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is
connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required.
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand

(temperature T), a normalized value (temperature norm. T), and as the maximum value
since the last reset.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n
c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
MEASI: Enabled
MEASI: Open circ.

Measur.input PT100 PT100
SFMON: PT100
open circuit
MEASI: Temperature
T
MEASI: Temperature
p.u. T
MEASI: Temperature
Tmax
19Z5262A_EN
3-30 Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module
Backup sensors
The open circuit signal on the PT 100 analog input from the function group MEASI is
forwarded to the functions Thermal Overload Protection and Limit Value Monitoring.
In the Thermal Overload Protection it is possible to set whether the 20 mA input or – if
configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9, connected to the temperature p/c
board (the RTD module), is to be used as a backup (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
In the Limit Value Monitoring function the limit values assigned to the faulty PT 100 are
blocked.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.3 Connecting Temperature Sensors to the Temperature P/C Board (the RTD
Module)
The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs
available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. These analog inputs are designed
for connection of PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers.
If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no
further calibration is required.
All nine temperature sensors must be of the same type, which is set under
MEASI: Type of TempSensors
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand

(temperature Tx), a normalized value (temperature norm. Tx) and as the maximum value
since the last reset (temperature Tx max).
Open-circuit monitoring
If one of the measuring circuits is open due to a broken wire, the signal
M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 T x (x = 1 to 9) is issued.
MEASI: Enabled
MEASI: Open circ.

Measur.input T1 PT100 T1
SFMON: PT100 T1
open circuit
MEASI: Temperature
T1
MEASI: Temperature
p.u. T1
MEASI: Temperature
T1max
19Z5263A_EN
3-31 Temperature measurement with temperature sensor T1 connected to the temperature p/c board. The same applies to sensors T2 to T9.
3-50 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Backup sensors
The open circuit signals from temperature sensors, issued by function group MEASI, are
forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. Should the main temperature
sensor (that has been set in the Thermal Overload Protection) fail, it is possible to select
in whether the 20 mA input or – if configured – one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9,
connected to the temperature p/c board (the RTD module), is to be used as a backup
sensor (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
In addition to this, the open circuit signals from the temperature sensors, issued by the
function group MEASI, are forwarded to the Limit Value Monitoring function.
The selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in
the function group M E A S I .
For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD
board) are divided into three groups:
Group 1: T1, T2, T3

Group 2: T4, T5, T6
Group 3: T7, T8, T9
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Without, the Limit Value

Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors.
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 -2, the defective

temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 2.
If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the
corresponding sensor from group 3, under the assumption that
M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 –2/3.
The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below:
Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2 Backup sensor from group 3
With setting: With setting:
Group 1 -2 Group 1 -2/3
or
Group 1 -2/3
T1 T4 T7
T2 T5 T8
T3 T6 T9
Should temperature sensor T1 fail, with the setting Group 1 –2/3, it will replaced by T4.
Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will replaced by T7.
For further details refer to section with the description of the "Limit Value Monitoring".
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
Application example
A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1
to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a "PT 100" resistance
thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.
RTD RTD Phase RTD

Main Temp. Sensor A B C Ambient temperature /
RTD Coolant temperature
Backup Temp. Sensor
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
Stator
RTD
RTD
Rotor
Bearing Bearing
19B5236A_EN
3-32 Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (LIMIT) and the Thermal Overload protection
(THERM)
3-52 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely-configured by the user.
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating mode of the

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines whether the
output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or normally closed
arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode. Latching can be disabled
either manually via setting parameters, or by an appropriately configured binary signal
input, at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Blocking the output relays

The P139 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or by way
of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if self-
monitoring detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for
M AIN : Bl o c k e d /F a u l ty will not included in the blocking signals.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
OUTP: Outp.rel.
block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP: Outp.
1 ≥1 relays blocked
[ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: Block 1: Yes
outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN: Prot.
ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
OUTP: Oper. mode

K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
4 -K xxx
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist)
5: NE updating & ≥1 OUTP: State K xxx
[ zzz zzz ]
6: NE manual reset &
&
& ≥1
OUTP: Fct. & S1 1

assignm. K xxx
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signals
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress OUTP: Latching
[ 035 000 ] 1 reset
& [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
0
1 1
100 ms
0: don’t execute
1: execute
OUTP: Reset
latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
50Z0141 A_EN
3-33 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3-54 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting
parameters. Therefore the device must be switched to 'offline'. Triggering persists for
the duration of the set hold time.
3-34 Testing the output relays
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measurands made available by the P139 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as
direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD
output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y or not.

measured data output
function
The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
3-35 Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3-56 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data

output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input, then
the measured data output is always enabled.
3-36 Enabling measured data output
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold time if
one of the following conditions is met:
The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control panel or
through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
There is a general reset.
LED indicators reset
MEASO: Reset
output USER
[ 037 116 ]
0
1
0: don’t execute
1: execute
MEASO: Reset MEASO: Output

reset
output EXT [ 037 117 ]
[ 036 087 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER MEASO: Reset
[ 003 002 ] meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A_EN
3-37 Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-58 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.1 BCD Measured Data Output
The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measurand value.
Output of measured event
values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to 'blocked', the measured operating value that has
been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling of BCD output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated
BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD

MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this
should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the
value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled 0 ... 1
measurands
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands to be output Range

Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
values in the data model
Measurands BCD display values

Measurands in the range BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
"Measurands to be output" (Valid BCD value)
Measurands: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-60 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

BCD output
The value range for the fault measurand is set from –320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands Range
Fault measurand: -320.00% ... +320.00%
FT_DA:Fault locat.
percent
measurands

Measurands to be output 0% ... 200%
Scaled measurands to be 0.5 ... 0.813
output with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
Measurands BCD display values

Measurands in the range 0 ... 200
"Measurands to be output"
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER Yes
053 002 MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
010 010 MEASO: Hold time output BCD 1.00 s
037 140 MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 0.500
037 141 MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 0.813
037 142 MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 0
037 143 MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 200
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' are only issued in
the value range 0% to 200%.
[004.027] FT_DA: [037.050] MEASO: [004.027] FT_DA:

Fault locat. percent = Not measured Valid BCD value = Yes Fault locat. percent = Not measured
200
BCD value
0
-320% 0% 200% 320% [004.027] FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
47Z1040A_EN
3-38 Example of BCD output of fault location
Note:
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value
only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is
more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible
range on the line by setting F T _ D A: O u tp u t fa u l t l o c a t. = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.
3-62 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time

MEASO: Enabled output BCD
MEASO: 1-digit
bit
MEASO: 1-digit
bit
Setting blocked
MEASO: 1-digit
bit
MEASO: Enable MEASO: 1-digit

bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: Reset
meas.val.outp. MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 100-dig.
bit
selected measured
MEASO: 100-dig.
operating value bit
selected
measured event value
is updated
MEASO: Valid
selected measured value BCD value
not activated
selected measured value
Overflow
measured
MEASO: Fct.
assignm. BCD value
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Scaling of the
Selected meas. val. BCD output
++
MEASO: Output
value x
MEASO Output Address ++ Scaling of the BCD output

value x
MEASI: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140
MEASI: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141
MEASI: BCD-Out min. value 037 142
MEASI: BCD-Out max. value 037 143
19Z5264A_EN
3-39 BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P139 for output in the form of
load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined
for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument.
The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time
M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured, then
there is no output of a measurand value.
Output of measured event
values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured operating value that has
been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x O u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-64 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range in scaled
form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for the knee
point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure .
Measurand range to be
output
The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x

MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103 - PC
Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
measurands

Measurands with knee-point Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
to be output
Scaled measurands with a Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
scaled knee-point to be
output with:
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of the set "Scal. min. value Ax" ...

values in the data model ... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Measurands Analog display values

Measurands in the range "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...
"Measurands to be output" ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val."
(Value A-x valid)
Measurands: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-66 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the 0 V ... 150 V
variable Mx
measurands

Measurands with knee-point 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
to be output
Associated scaled 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
measurands
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measurands Analog display values

Measurands in the range 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
"Measurands to be
output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config. parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER Yes
053 000 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MAIN:
Voltage A-B p.u.
010 114 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with
0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 0.067 (corresponds with
0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 0.667 (corresponds with
1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 16 mA
037 109 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 18 mA
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines the
output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By
defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed).
If the setting was not properly entered, the signal SF M O N : In va l i d s c a l i n g A- x will
be issued.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M AIN : D e vi c e
o n - l i n e is again switched on-line.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
6
Min.
output value 4
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013 0,067 0,667 1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN
3-40 Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data Output).
3-68 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-41 Analog measured data output
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.3 Output of ‘External’ Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P139 via the communications interface.
MEASO: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P139 either in BCD data form or as
load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured data output function or
the channels of the analogue measured data output function are configured accordingly.
3-70 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P139 has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other LED indicators are
freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit either red or green or
amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and may not be configured
independently).
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color indications.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or colors),
if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 1 (green) “HEALTHY” Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the device
(supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) “EDIT MODE” Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when the
device is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by pressing
the “Up“ and “Down“ keys. (See Chapter 6, section 'Display and
Keypad')
H 2 (amber) “OUT OF SERVICE” Permanently configured with function M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y .

H 3 (amber) “ALARM” Permanently configured with function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) .
H 4 (red) “TRIP COMMAND” With the P139 this LED indicator is customarily configured with function
M A I N : G e n . t r i p s i g n a l - but the configuration may be modified.
The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal
connection drawings at the end of Chapter 5 and it is included in the
supporting documents.
H 4 (green) ---- Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely configurable.
H 5 to H 16 ---- For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may be
configured freely and independently.
The following figures illustrate the layout of LED indicators situated on the local control
panel with case 40T/84T devices.
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
C
HEALTHY G
EDIT MODE
G
O I L/R
Layout of the LED indicators
P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be selected
separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will operate either in
energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode, whether it will be flashing and
whether it will be in latching mode. Latching is disabled either manually via setting
parameters or by an appropriately configured binary signal input (see "Main Functions of
the P139"), at the onset of a new fault or of a new system disturbance, depending on the
selected operating mode.
Therefore the operating modes turn out to be the 23=8 possible combinations of the
following components:
• flashing / continuous,
• energize-on-signal (ES) / normally-energized (NE),
• updating / latching with manual reset,
in addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new fault (flashing / continuous) and
• energize-on-signal (ES) with reset after new system disturbance (flashing /
continuous),
so that there are 12 possible operating modes in total.
3-72 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
LED: Operating
mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
-Hxx
12 (red)
1: ES updating ! G !
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) ≥1
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
2: ES manual reset
8: ES manual reset bl
3: ES reset (fault) LED: State H xx
& red
9: ES reset (fault) bl [ zzz zzz ]
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl &
11: NE updating bl &
12: NE manual reset bl
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n LED: State H xx
Signal n & green
[ zzz zzz ]
&
&
Selected signals
& S1 1
R1
LED: Fct.assig.
Hxx green
[ yyy yyy ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 -Hxx
Signal 3 m out of n (green)
Signal n
Selected signals &
&
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
[ 035 000 ] &
FT_RC: System
disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
12Z6200 A_EN
3-42 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (Function Group MAIN)
3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time
tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these
signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for each of these groups the
debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters
achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.
3-74 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-43 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer
stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing the
time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be
generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value
'After debounce time'.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the
same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has
elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the
value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in
the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value
'1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the
operating data memory.
3-44 Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge
(e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem sorted'.)
Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms
s: start
e: end
3-76 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Chatter suppression
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated for the
admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can be set.
After the first "inadmissible" signal change, no further telegrams are generated and the
timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing, it is re-triggered by each
new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed, each signal change triggers a
telegram.
3-45 Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression

Set debouncing time: 20 ms
Set chatter monitoring time: 200 ms
Number of admissible signal changes: 4
s: start
e: end
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.2 Bay type selection
The P139 is designed to control up to six switchgear units. The bay type defines the
layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
The P139 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type
be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139. By
applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can define
new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at
MAIN: Customized bay type.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P139 can automatically configure the binary
inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the
List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
3-46 Bay type selection
3-78 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.3 Conditioning of the Measured Variables
The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P139. There is
the option of connecting up to five voltage transformers. The measured variables are –
electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics levels. Air-gap transformers
are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC decays and offsets)
signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further
processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P139 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P139 must also be set.
Figure 3-47 shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of the digitized
currents is rotated by 180°.
If the P139 is to operate with the GFDSS function (ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values), current transformer T4 needs to be connected to a current
transformer in Holmgreen connection (dashed lines in Figure 3-47 ) or to a core balance
current transformer.
When the P139 is equipped with the NCIT module (non conventional instrument
transformer) the conventional CTs are exchanged by NCITs as shown in the following
figure ("Connecting the P139 measuring circuits"), and described in Chapter 2
"Connecting NCITs to the NCIT Module".
When the P139 is equipped with the temperature p/c board (RTD module for PT 100,
Ni 100 or Ni 120, terminal connection diagram in Annex D) further resistance
thermometers, in addition to the PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog
module (I/O), can be connected to the RTD module as described in Chapter 3 section
"Measured Data Input”, ‘Connecting resistance thermometers to the RTD module’.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
A
B
C
MAIN: Vref,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
2U Vref
MAIN: Conn. MAIN: Inom

meas. circ. IP device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
IA
X X. Y IA
IB
IB
X X. Y
IC IC
X X. Y
1: Standard
IN (Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: Conn. MAIN: IN,nom

meas. circ. IN device
[ 010 019 ] [ 010 026 ]
IN
X X . Y
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: VNG,nom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
n e
n VN-G
MAIN: Vnom
V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
U
VA-G
e V
VB-G
W
VC-G
N
19Z6402 A_EN
3-47 Connecting the P139 measuring circuits (when the P139 is equipped with the NCIT module or the RTD module; see references in previous
text)
3-80 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement
The P139 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. For the
display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded, to avoid
fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the
value "not measured" is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed:
Phase currents for all three phases

Delayed and stored phase currents for all three phases – demand values for the
three phases
Maximum phase current
Minimum phase current
Delayed and stored maximum phase current – maximum demand values
Residual current measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer
Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages
Phase-to-phase voltages
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Positive-sequence current and negative-sequence current (in units of Inom), taking into
account the set phase sequence
Positive-sequence voltage and negative-sequence voltage (in units of Vnom)
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer
Reference voltage measured by the P139 at the T 15 transformer
Active, reactive and apparent power
Active power factor
Load angle ϕ in all three phases (in units of 1° and in units of 100°)
Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement
voltage (in units of 1° and in units of 100°)
Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current (in units of 1° and
in units of 100°)
Frequency
Active and reactive energy output and input
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted when a general
starting signal is issued or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P139.
According to the following formulas the P139 will determine the negative-sequence
current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence:
Phase sequence A-B-C: Phase sequence A-C-B:

1
3
( 2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C ) 1
( 2
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
)
I pos =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
) I pos =
1
( 2
⋅ I + a ⋅ I B + a ⋅ IC
3 A
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
3-82 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Meas. value

rel. IP
MAIN: General [ 011 030 ]
starting int.
306 539
MAIN: Hardware c
fault
306 540
IA c1
IB c2
IC c3
c4
c5
c6
1 MAIN: Current A
p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
2 MAIN: Current B
p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
3 MAIN: Current C
p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
+
+ 4 MAIN: Current
+ (IP) p.u.
[ 005 011 ]
5 MAIN: Current
COMP IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
6 MAIN: Current
IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
Imax
MAIN: Inom C.T.
Imin prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Current A
prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN: Current B
prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN: Current C
prim.
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN: Current
(IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN: Curr.
IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
19Z6403A_EN
3-48 Measured operating data - phase current, part 1
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: IA p.u.,
demand
[ 006 235 ]
MAIN: IB p.u.,
demand
[ 006 236 ]
MAIN: IC p.u.,
demand
[ 006 237 ]
MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: IP,max

IP,max,del p.u.,demand
[ 010 113 ] [ 005 037 ]
MAIN: IA p.u.,
MAIN: Current A demand stor.
p.u. [ 006 232 ]
[ 005 041 ] R
MAIN: Current B MAIN: IB p.u.,

p.u. demand stor.
[ 006 041 ] R [ 006 233 ]
MAIN: Current C MAIN: IC p.u.,

demand stor.
p.u. [ 006 234 ]
[ 007 041 ] R
MAIN: Current MAIN: IP,max
IP,max p.u. p.u.,demand.st
[ 005 051 ] [ 005 035 ]
R
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: IA prim,
demand
[ 006 226 ]
MAIN: IB prim,
demand
[ 006 227 ]
MAIN: IC prim,
demand.
[ 006 228 ]
MAIN: IP,max
prim.,demand
[ 005 036 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER MAIN: IA prim,
[ 003 033 ]
demand stor.
[ 006 223 ]
0
MAIN: IB prim,
1 demand stor.
[ 006 224 ]
MAIN: General 0: don`t execute
reset USER 1: execute MAIN: IC prim,
[ 003 002 ] demand stor.
1: execute [ 006 225 ]
MAIN: General
reset EXT MAIN: IP,max
[ 005 255 ] prim,demand.st.
MAIN: Reset [ 005 034 ]
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
19Z6404 A_EN
3-49 Measured operating data - phase current, part 2: demand values (delayed and stored phase currents and maximum phase current)
3-84 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-50 Measured operating data - residual current
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)
Display of demand values -

delayed maximum phase
current
The P139 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an
exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in
Figure 3-51). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have
reached 95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del.

stored maximum phase
current
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-51). The stored maximum phase current to the
actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-51).

delayed and stored values
of the three phase currents
The P139 offers the option of a delayed display of the three phase currents. This
functionality is equivalent to the display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (see description above, schematic diagram 3-51 and logic diagram 3-49).
However, in this case, the delayed phase current display will have reached 90 % (not
95 %) of IA , IB or IC , respectively, after the set delay.
The stored phase currents are implemented as for the stored maximum phase current.
The delay for these six operating data values is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l

as for the delayed maximum phase current.
3-86 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,demand
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: Settl. t. MAIN: Settl. t.

IP,max,del IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,demand.st
[ 005 035 ]

[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Current
IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN: IP,max
p.u.,demand.st
[ 005 035 ]

[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN: Reset
IP,max,st. EXT
[ 005 211 ] 50Z0115A_EN
3-51 Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display - display of demand values
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the
P139.
3-52 Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
3-88 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General
starting C
306 539
MAIN: Hardware
fault MAIN: Meas. value
306 540 rel. V
[ 011 032 ]
VA-G C1
VB-G C2
VC-G C3
VPG,max C4
VPG,min C5
Σ(VPG)/3 C6
VA-B C7
VB-C C8
VC-A C9
VPP,max C10
VPP,min C11
Vneg C12
Vpos C13
1 MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u.

[ 005 043 ]
2 MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
3 MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u.
[ 007 043 ]
4 MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u.
[ 008 043 ]
5 MAIN: Spg. Voltage VPG,min
p.u.
[ 009 043 ]
6 MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/√3 p.u.
[ 005 013 ]
7 MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.
[ 005 045 ]
8 MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u.
[ 006 045 ]
9 MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u.
[ 007 045 ]
10 MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u.
[ 008 045 ]
11 MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u.
[ 009 045 ]
12 MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u.
[ 009 017 ]
13 MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u.
[ 009 018 ]
MAIN: Vnom V.T.

prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Voltage A-G prim.

[ 005 042 ]
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim.
[ 006 042 ]
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim.
[ 007 042 ]
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim.
[ 008 042 ]
MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim.
[ 009 042 ]
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim.
[ 005 012 ]
MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.
[ 005 044 ]
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim.
[ 006 044 ]
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim.
[ 007 044 ]
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim.
[ 008 044 ]
MAIN: Voltage VPP,min prim
[ 009 044 ]
12Z6204A_EN
3-53 Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
3-54 Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage
3-55 Measured operating data – reference voltage
3-90 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values for

power, active power factor,
and angle
The load angle and the angle between the measured values for the residual current and
the neutral-point displacement voltage are only determined when associated currents
and voltages exceed minimum thresholds.
Parameter M A I N : M e a s . d i r e c t i o n P , Q may be changed from 'Standard' to

'Opposite' if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data displayed
with the opposite sign (see figure 3-56):
MAIN: Active power P p.u

MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.
MAIN: Active power P prim.
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim.
The remaining measured operating data is not influenced by the setting of this
parameter. It must be noted that by inverting the sign only, the display of measured
operating data is involved but all protection functions will still apply internally non-
inverted measured values.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Vnom V.T.
prim.
[ 010 002 ] MAIN: Appar.
power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]
MAIN: Active power

factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN: Appar. power
S prim.
[ 005 025 ]
IA > 0.025 Inom MAIN: Meas.
direction P,Q
[ 006 096 ]
IB MAIN: Active power
> 0.025 Inom P p.u.
X X . Y [ 004 051 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
IC X X . Y Q p.u.
> 0.025 Inom [ 004 053 ]
X X . Y MAIN: Active power
P prim.
X X . Y [ 004 050 ]
VA-G > 1.5 V MAIN: Reac. power
1: Standard Q prim.
(Y = 1) [ 004 052 ]
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
VB-G > 1.5 V
VC-G > 1.5 V
IN > 0.02 INnom

MAIN: Load angle
& C phi A p.u
VN-G > 1.5 V [ 005 073 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi A
[ 004 055 ]
MAIN: Load angle

& C phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi B
[ 004 056 ]
MAIN: Load angle

& C phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]
MAIN: Load angle

phi C
[ 004 057 ]
MAIN: Angle phi N

& C p.u.
[ 005 076 ]
MAIN: Angle phi N

[ 004 072 ]
MAIN: Angle
& C ΣVPG/IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]
MAIN: Angle
ΣVPG vs. IN
[ 005 009 ]
+
+
+
MAIN: General
starting
306 539
MAIN: Hardware
Fault
306 018
12Z6203 A_EN
3-56 Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle
3-92 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase relation IN
The P139 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured
residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the two currents is
≤ 45°, then the indication ‘Equal phase’ is displayed.
3-57 Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency
The P139 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to exceed
a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
MAIN: General C
starting
306 539
MAIN: Hardware
fault
306 018 >0.65*Vnom
MAIN: Frequency f
VA-G + C p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
VB-G -
f MAIN: Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
12Z6209 A_EN
3-58 Frequency measurement
3-94 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Active and reactive energy

output and input
The P139 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the
primary active or reactive power.
There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy.
If procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s
(approximately). If procedure 2 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined
every 100 ms (approximately). In this way higher accuracy is achieved. Whenever the
maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded, a counter is incremented
and the determination of the energy output is restarted. The value that exceeded the
range is transferred to the new cycle.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
The total energy is calculated as follows:
Total energy = number of overflows ∗ 655.35 + current count
MAIN: Op. mode

energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]
MAIN: Active power

P prim.
[ 004 050 ] MAIN: Act.energy
∫P(t) dt outp.prim
[ 005 061 ]
R
-∫P(t) dt MAIN: Act.energy

inp. prim
R [ 005 062 ]
MAIN: Reac. power
Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
∫Q(t) dt MAIN: React.en.
MAIN: Reset outp. prim
[ 005 063 ]
meas.v.en.USER R
[ 003 032 ]
0 -∫Q(t) dt MAIN: React. en.

inp. prim
R [ 005 064 ]
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
MAIN:
1: execute Overflow No.overfl.act.en.
out
Transfer [ 009 090 ]
MAIN: Reset
meas.v.en.EXT
[ 005 212 ]
MAIN:
Overflow No.overfl.act.en.
inp
Transfer [ 009 091 ]
Overflow MAIN: No.ov/fl.

reac.en.out
[ 009 092 ]
Transfer
MAIN: No.ov/fl.
Overflow reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Transfer
12Z6133A_EN
3-59 Determining the active and reactive energy output and input
3-96 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the procedure

to determine energy output
Procedure Characteristics Applications
1 Determination of the active and reactive energy Constant load and slow load variations (no
every 2 s (approximately) significant load variations within 1 second).
Reduced system loading Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
2 Determination of the active and reactive energy Fast load variations

every 100 ms (approximately).
Phase angles below 70° (cos ϕ > 0.3 ).
Increased system loading
The maximum phase-angle error of the P139 of 1° leads to greater errors in

measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown (for the range 0° ≤ ϕ < 90°) in
the following diagram.
Fault
5%
2%
45° 70° Phase angle ϕ S8Z0401A
3-60 Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P139
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
Error of measurement: approx. ± 2 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.7

approx. ± 5 % of the measured value for |cos ϕ| ≥ 0.3
where the whole measuring range is -180° ≤ ϕ ≤ 180°.
For phase angles ϕ with |cosϕ| < 0.3, or when the error of measurement resulting from
the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to
determine the energy output.
3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the desired device functions in the
configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an individually configured device
appropriate to the specific application. Parameters, signals and measured values of
cancelled device functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of
general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions
(MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Canceling a device
function
The following conditions must be met before a device function can be cancelled or
removed:
The device function must be disabled.

None of the functions of the device function to be cancelled can be assigned to a
binary input.
None of the signals of the device function can be assigned to a binary output or an
LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be cancelled.
If, for example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, the setting of
L I M I T : F u n c t i o n g r o u p L I M I T is set to 'Without'. To re-include the "LIMIT"
function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is
changed to 'With'.
The device function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined
by the function group designation (example: "LIMIT"). In the following description of the
device functions, it is presumed that the corresponding device function is included in the
configuration.
3-98 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling a
device function
Besides cancelling device functions from the configuration, it is also possible to disable
protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection can only be
disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e
P r o t e c t . E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both
configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the condition is
interpreted as "Protection externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary
signal inputs are implausible – i.e. both are at logic level = "1" – then the last plausible
state remains stored in memory.
Note: If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T , the signal
M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y is not issued.
3-61 Enabling or disabling a device function
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling the

residual current systems of
the DTOC/IDMT protection
Disabling or enabling may be carried out with parameters or binary signal inputs.
Enabling of the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection depends on the
setting at M A I N : S y s t . I N e n a b l e d U S E R . If this enabling function has been
activated, the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection can be disabled or
enabled with parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the
M A I N : System IN en a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the
residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection will be enabled by a positive
edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the M A I N : S y s t e m
I N d i s a b l e E X T function has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at
this input will have no effect.
3-100 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-62 Disabling or enabling the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.6 Activation of "Dynamic Parameters"
For several of the protection functions, it is possible for the duration of the set hold time
to switch over to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" – via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, switching is effective as long
as the binary signal input is being triggered.
MAIN: Hld time

dyn.par. PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: Switch MAIN: Dynam.

dyn.param.EXT 1 param. active
[ 036 033 ] [ 040 090 ]
t1 = 0 s &
Parameter MAIN: Hld time

dyn.par. PSx
set 1 018 009
set 2 001 211
set 3 001 212
set 4 001 213 12Z6205 A_EN
3-63 Activation of "Dynamic Parameters"
3-102 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are switched on, and, if detected, it will then block the
following functions:
The phase current starting and negative-sequence current starting of definite-time

overcurrent protection (DTOC)
The phase current starting and negative-sequence current starting of inverse-time
overcurrent protection (IDMT).
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set
threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current
trigger blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the
operating mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or
across all phases.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Op. rush

restr. PSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
0: Without
&
1: Not phase-
selective
2: Phase-
selective
MAIN: Inrush
stabil. trigg
306 014
MAIN: I>lift rush

C restr PSx
MAIN: Protection & [ * ]
active MAIN: Rush restr.
306 001 A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
&
IA
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
&
IB
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
&
IC
0.1 Inom
MAIN: Rush
I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
fnom
I(2*fn)/I(fn)
2*fnom
fnom
2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)
fnom
2*fnom I(2*fn)/I(fn)
Parameter MAIN: Op. rush MAIN: I>lift rush MAIN: Rush

restr. PSx restr PSx I(2fn)/I(fn) PSx
set 1 017 097 017 095 017 098
set 2 001 088 001 085 001 091
set 3 001 089 001 086 001 092
set 4 001 090 001 087 001 093
12Z6206 A_EN
3-64 Inrush stabilization
3-104 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.8 Function Blocks
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be
prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external
signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output

signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1
and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts
a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . X a c t i v e
is issued.
3-65 Function blocks
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.9 Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The items
available for selection are found in the Address List. The functions defined by selection
may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-66 Multiple blocking
3-106 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.10 Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal
from an output relay configured M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition functions can
be selected that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting a ‘m out of
n’ parameter.
3-67 "Blocked/Faulty" signal
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.11 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents
the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the "Closed" position
signal is made by the setting M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B c l o s e d . As a result, the CB
status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input only if this coupling is
implemented.
3-68 Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal
3-108 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.12 Close Command
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by the
automatic synchronism check (ASC), by parameters or via an appropriately configured
binary signal input. The close command by parameters or a binary signal input is only
executed if there is no trip command present and no trip has been issued by a protection
device operating in parallel. Moreover, the close command is not executed if there is a
"CB closed" position signal present. The duration of the close command can be set.
If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then the
close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.
Close command counter.

The number of close commands are counted. This counter may be reset individually or
together with other counters (see section 'Resetting Actions'). If the ARC function issues
a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then the close command requires a
close enable by the ASC function.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Man. close

cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
0
1
0: don’t execute
MAIN: Man. close
1: execute command
[ 037 068 ]
MAIN: Man. close
cmd. EXT &
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.
enabl.EXT
[ 041 023 ]
ARC: (Re)close
request &
[ 037 077 ]
ASC: Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC: Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
&
MAIN: Close aft.

man.cl.rqu
& [ 037 012 ]
ASC: Manual
close request
305 000
&
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: Close

command 1 C cmd.pulse time
[ 036 071 ] [ 015 067 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 2
[ 036 022 ] MAIN: Close
1 command
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT t [ 037 009 ]
[ 036 051 ]
CBF: Parallel
trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN: Reset c. cl/

tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0
1 + MAIN: No. close
commands
MAIN: General 0: don’t execute [ 009 055 ]
reset USER R
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset c.
cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
12Z6207A_EN
3-69 Close command
3-110 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.13 Multiple Signaling
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR
operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is
defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding
multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored
signal is reset by the following actions:
General reset
Latching reset
LED indicators reset
A command received through the communication interface.
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow
the updated signal.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Mult.
Selected signal sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN: Mult.
sig. 1 stored
S1 1 [ 221 054 ]
MAIN: Inp.asg.
mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
Selected signal MAIN: Mult.

sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 1 MAIN: Mult.
[ --- --- ] sig. 2 stored
S1 1 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1: Reset
mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP: Reset
latching
402 102
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
12Z62FMA_EN
3-70 Multiple signaling
3-112 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.14 Ground Fault Signaling
If a ground fault has been detected by either the GFDSS function (ground fault direction
determination by steady-state values) or the TGFD function (transient ground fault
direction determination), the P139 analyzes the phase-to-ground voltages and identifies
the phase on which the ground fault has occurred.
During a ground fault, the P139 determines the lowest phase-to-ground voltage and
checks if the two other phase-to-ground voltages exceed the threshold of 0.2 Vnom.
In addition, the two higher phase-to-ground voltages must exceed the lowest phase-to-
ground voltage by a factor of 1.5. If these conditions are met, a ground fault signal is
issued for the phase with the lowest phase-to-ground voltage.
3-71 Phase-selective ground fault signaling
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
Ground fault signals generated either by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS) or transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD)
are grouped together to form multiple signaling.
3-72 Erdschluss-Sammelmeldungen
3-114 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.15 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
Phase-selective starting
signals
Common phase-selective starting signals are formed from the internal phase-selective
starting signals of definite-time overcurrent protection and of inverse-time overcurrent
protection.
An adjustable timer stage is started by the phase-selective starting signals, the residual
current starting signal and the negative-sequence starting signal. While this timer stage
is running, the starting signals are blocked. The starting signals are also blocked directly
by the motor protection if the startup of a motor has been detected. Blocking is
suspended if a trip signal is present.
The operate delays for the residual current and negative-sequence current stages of the
DTOC and IDMT protection functions can be blocked for a single-pole or multi-pole
starting (depending on the setting).
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: Block

signal 1 & start. signal
[ 036 005 ] 306 512
GRUND: Gen. trip

signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MP: Startup
[ 040 119 ]
MAIN: Suppr.
start.sig.PSx
[ * ]
0 t
DTOC: Starting A MAIN: Starting A

305 458 & [ 040 005 ]
IDMT: Starting A
304 359
DTOC: Starting B MAIN: Starting B

305 459 & [ 040 006 ]
IDMT: Starting B
304 360
DTOC: Starting C MAIN: Starting C

305 460 & [ 040 007 ]
IDMT: Starting C
304 361
DTOC: Starting N MAIN: Starting GF

305 461 & [ 040 008 ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
MAIN: Starting
IDMT: Starting Ineg
Iref,neg> & [ 040 105 ]
[ 040 107 ]
DTOC: Starting MAIN: Starting A
Ineg> int.
[ 036 145 ] 306 513
DTOC: Starting MAIN: Starting B
Ineg>> int.
[ 036 146 ] 306 514
DTOC: Starting MAIN: Starting C

Ineg>>> int.
[ 036 147 ] 306 515
MAIN: Starting N
int.
306 516
MAIN: Bl.tim.st. MAIN: Starting
IN,neg PSx Ineg
[ * ] 306 517
0
MAIN: Block tim.
& st. IN,neg
1 306 400
&
2
0: Without
1: For single-ph. start
2: For multi-ph. start.
Parameter MAIN: Suppr. MAIN: Bl.tim.st.

start.sig.PSx IN,neg PSx
set 1 017 054 017 015
set 2 001 222 001 214
set 3 001 223 001 215
set 4 001 224 001 216
12Z6208A_EN
3-73 Phase-selective starting signals. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
3-116 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
The general starting signal is formed from the starting signals of the DTOC and IDMT
protection functions. A setting governs whether the residual current stages and the
negative-sequence current stage will be involved in forming the general starting signal.
If the operate signal from one of the residual current stages and the negative-sequence
current stage does not cause a general starting (due to the setting) then the associated
operate delays will be blocked. As a result, a trip command cannot be issued by residual
current and negative-sequence current stages.
MAIN: Gen. start.

Mode PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: Gen. start.

0 Mode PSx
[ * ]
1 1: With start.
IN, Ineg
0: W/o start.
IN, Ineg
1: With start.
MAIN: General IN, Ineg
reset USER MAIN: Start.
[ 003 002 ] I>,kIref,P>
1: execute 306 521
MAIN: General MAIN: No. general

reset EXT + start.
[ 005 255 ] [ 004 000 ]
R
DTOC: Starting
I>
[ 040 036 ]
IDMT: Starting MAIN: General
Iref,P> & starting
[ 040 080 ] [ 040 000 ]
DTOC: Starting
I>> MAIN: General
[ 040 029 ] starting
306 539
DTOC: Starting
I>>>
[ 039 075 ]
IDMT: Starting &

Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
DTOC: Starting &
IN>
[ 040 077 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>> MAIN: tGS
[ 040 041 ] PSx
DTOC: Starting [ * ]
IN>>>
[ 039 078 ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ] MAIN: tGS elapsed
[ 040 009 ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref,neg>
[ 040 107 ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>
[ 036 145 ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
MAIN: Block
start. signal
306 512 * Parameter MAIN: Gen.
start. Mode PSx
MAIN: tGS
PSx
set 1 017 027 017 005
set 2 001 219 001 225
set 3 001 220 001 226
set 4 001 221 001 227
12Z6201A_EN
3-74 General starting. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
Counter for general

starting signals.
The number of general starts is counted.
Multiple signaling by the

DTOC and IDMT
protection functions
The trip signals generated by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions are grouped
together to form multiple signaling.
DTOC: tIN>>>>
elapsed
[ 035 040 ]
12Z5122A
3-75 Multiple signaling by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
3-118 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command
The P139 provides two trip commands. The functions required to issue a trip can be
selected by setting a 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip
commands. The minimum trip command closure time may be set. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
Latching of the trip

commands
Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching mode.
The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameters or
reset through an appropriately configured binary signal input. Latching is ineffective if a
trip command has been issued by the ARC function.
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately configured binary
signal input. This blocking is then effective for both trip commands. The trip signals are
not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are both blocked, it is indicated by the
continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured to "Blocked/Faulty".
Trip command counter

The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or as a group.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
3-76 Forming the trip commands
3-120 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command

A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
3-77 Manual trip command
Counter of trip commands

The number of trip commands is counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or as a group.
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: No. gen.

command 1 + trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] [ 004 006 ]
R
MAIN: Gen. trip MAIN: No. gen.
command 2 + trip cmds. 2
[ 036 022 ] [ 009 050 ]
R
MAIN: Rückst.
Z. E/A K BED
[ 003 007 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: General 0: don't execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset.c.cl/
tr.cEXT
[ 005 210 ]
12Z6190 A_EN
3-78 Trip command counter
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.16 CB Trip Signal
The signal M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met

simultaneously:
The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of '1' or the
selected trip command from the P139 is present.
At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of '1' is present.
The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two
binary signal inputs need to be configured as “CB trip enable ext.“ and as “CB trip ext.“.
3-122 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-79 CB trip signal
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.17 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the
P139, the P139 first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch
command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the
interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic
for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each
control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock
equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station
interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units
within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each
switching unit and each control direction (see section ‘Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units').
If “Local” has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be
cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-124 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-80 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the interlocks
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-125

3 Operation
(continued)
3-81 Rejection of the switching commands
3-126 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.18 Monitoring the Switchgear Unit Motor Drives
For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating links or
grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors from
overheating.
The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If the
number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set limit, the
signal M A I N : M o n . m o t . d r i v e s t r . is issued. For the duration of the set cooling
time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be executed. Once the
set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are enabled again.
DEV01: Start MAIN: No. motor

+ drive op.
runn. time mon. [ 221 025 ]
307 008
R
MAIN: Perm.No.
mot.drive op
MAIN: General [ 221 027 ]
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute COMP
MAIN: General n
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020 MAIN: Mon. mot.
n>Nb.of permiss.oper. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
n = 1
MAIN: Mon.time
mot.drives
[ 221 026 ]
MAIN: Cool.time
mot.drives t
[ 221 028 ]
19Z6417A_EN
3-82 Monitoring the switchgear unit motor drives
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.19 Communication Error
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal
"Communication error" will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication
module A is not fitted.
3-83 Communication Error
3-128 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.20 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date and time need
to be set in the P139.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The P139 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-84 Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronization source
The P139 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC (full
time)
o Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC (full time)
o IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
o Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see figure 3-84 and previous
paragraph
With older device versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock synchronization
was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated triggering. No conflicts have to
be taken into account as long as synchronization sources (communication master,
IRIG-B and minute pulse source) operate at the same time of day. Should the
synchronization sources operate with a different time basis unwanted step changes in
the internal clock may occur. On the other hand a redundant time of day synchronization
is often used so as to sustain time synchronization via IRIG-B interface even if and while
the SCADA communication is out of service.
With the current device versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in the above.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as long as
time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set at
M A I N : T i m e s y n c . t i m e - o u t . The backup source is required if after the set time-
out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the device will expect
time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1 has become
defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out stage is
blocked.
3-130 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.21 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following types of resetting actions are possible:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only
the displays on the local control panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories
such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the local control panel.
By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories
may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting
parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-
by-step description in Chapter 6 "Local Control", section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter
F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant
memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset x.
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign
parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g.
I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 3 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to
parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point
M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset
without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.

(M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.)
All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration
options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then
they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access
especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them
to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is

assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is
simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two
menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . M e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to
include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g.
O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition
(L O C : F c t . M e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a
resetting action through L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y .
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset
indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
≥1 MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
MAIN: Reset
indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115 A_EN
3-85 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
3-132 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
LOC: Reset key OP_RC: Reset record.

active ≥1 EXT
310 024 & [ 005 213 ]
LOC: Fct. reset

key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC: Reset record.

EXT [005 213]
MAIN: Group
reset 1 USER
[ * ]
0
1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN: Group
reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN: Fct.assign.
reset 1
[ * ]
m out of n
x MAIN: Group MAIN: Group MAIN: Fct.

reset 1 USER reset 1 EXT assign. reset 1
OP_RC: Reset record. 1 005 253 005 209 005 248
EXT [005 213] 2 005 254 005 252 005 249
12Z61RMB_EN
3-86 "CLEAR" key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the
reset signal OP_RC: Reset record. EXT); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are:
- [004 140] TGFD: Reset signal EXT
- [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
- [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT
- [005 212] MAIN: Reset meas.v.en. EXT
- [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 242] GF_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT
- [005 244] ARC: Reset counters EXT
- [005 245] GFDSS: Reset counters EXT
- [005 246] TGFD: Reset counters EXT
- [005 247] CBM: Reset meas.val. EXT
- [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT
- [006 054] COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT
- [006 074] ASC: Reset counters EXT
- [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT
- [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT
- [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT
- [038 061] THERM: Reset replica EXT
- [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT
- [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT
- [041 082] MP: Reset replica EXT
- [217 004] COUNT: Reset EXT
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.22 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications

Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up to two
communications channels available (see Chapter "Technical Data"). These physical
communications channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and
COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the

settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit
data to and from the P139 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-87 Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels
3-134 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.23 Test mode
If tests are run on the P139, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
3-88 Setting the test mode
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
With the P139, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user may
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter

subset
The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or binary
signal input) may be selected via the function setting P S S : C o n t r o l v i a U S E R or via
the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Correspondingly, the parameter
subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function setting
P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or in accordance with external signals. The
parameter subset actually active at a particular time may be determined by scanning the
logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or P S S : P S x a c t i v e .
Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P139
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function setting will be active. The P139 also checks whether the signals present at the
binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset selection. This is only true
when only one binary signal input is set to a logic level of ' 1 '. If more than one signal
input is set to a logic level of ' 1 ', then the parameter subset previously selected remains
active. Should a dead interval occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is
the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic level of ' 0 '), then the stored hold time is
started. While this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset
remains active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of ' 1 ', the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is still no
signal input with a logic level of ' 1 ', the parameter subset selected via the function
parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of ' 1 ' is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter
subset selected via the function parameter will become active once the stored time has
elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored hold timer
stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset
selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately
100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-136 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-89 Activating the parameter subsets
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P139 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments to the alarm
signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the communication monitor,
measuring-circuit monitoring (V, Vref, I), open-circuit monitoring (20 mA input,
temperature sensors) and the logic outputs 30 to 32 and 30(t) to 32(t).
Tests during start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P139. If the P139 detects a fault in one of the tests, then start-up is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred.
No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P139 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory – the monitoring signal memory –
along with the assigned date and time (see section ‘Monitoring Signal Recording’).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signal
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
S F M O N : W a r n i n g . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is
detected.
3-90 Monitoring signals
3-138 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P139 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart – such as a fault in the hardware –, then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure.
A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action. During a warm
restart sequence the protective functions and the communication through serial
interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked
but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the protection device cannot identify which parameter in the subset is
corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state.
This means that all the protection device settings are also erased after a cold restart.
The settings that then apply are shown underlined in the column "Range of Values" in
the Address List. In order to establish a safe initial state, the default values have
been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the monitoring signal
that triggered the cold restart and the value indicating parameter loss are entered in
the monitoring signal memory.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to
eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read also about
device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 “Troubleshooting”.) Whether or not this
measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been
stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already
stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the
device will be blocked after the second warm restart.
In order to monitor this behavior better the parameter at

S F M O N : M o n . s i g . r e t e n t i o n is applied. This parameter may either be set to
‘blocked’ or to a time duration period (in hours).
The default for this timer stage is ‘blocked’ e.g. blocking of the protection device with two
identical faults occurs independent of the time evolved since the first fault monitoring
signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device
if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because
the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the
monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. To defuse
this problem it is suggested to set the function parameter to a specific time duration
period so that blocking will only occur if the same fault occurs again within this time
period. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart.

time tag
The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-140 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events,

a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The "operationally relevant" signals,
each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in
chronological order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as
function disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end
of events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as
overloads, ground faults or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory
can be cleared/reset.
Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC: Operat.
data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating data
MAIN: Oper.- memory
relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: General
Reset USER + OP_RC: No. oper.
[ 003 002 ] data sig.
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC: Reset
record USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMB_EN
3-91 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal
memory is given in the address list (see Appendix). The memory buffer allows for a
maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the
monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be
entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by
setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see 'Self-Monitoring').
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry causes the LED to
flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle now shows the device to be healthy. The contents of the
monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual
entries can be read out through the PC or communication interface or from the local
control panel.
Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).
MT_RC: Mon. signal

record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN: Time tag

306 021
SFMON: Hardware
fault
304 950
Select monit.
signal
MT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON: Overflow
≥1 MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC: No. monit.
1 ≥1 signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A_EN
3-92 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
3-142 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
Overload duration
In the event of an overload, the P139 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n
p r o g r e s s signal.
OL_RC: Record. OL_DA: Overload

in progress + duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A_EN
3-93 Overload duration
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquiring measured
overload data from the
motor protection
During a motor startup the measured values for the startup time, the maximum startup
current and heating during startup are determined and stored at the end of the startup
period.
MP Startup OL_DA: Time

taken f.startup
OL_DA: Start-up
current
MP IP
r.m.s./Iref
OL_DA: Heat.
dur. start-up
19Z5280A_EN
3-94 Measured overload values from the motor protection
3-144 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquiring measured
overload data from the
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s measured
operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Status OL_DA: Status

THERM replica THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: I OL_DA: Load

305 202
current THER
[ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: Object OL_DA: Object

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: Coolant OL_DA: Coolant

temperature temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: Pre-trip OL_DA: Pre-trip

time left t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: Temp. OL_DA: Offset

offset replica THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A_EN
3-95 Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if the motor
protection function starts (M P : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > ) or if the signal
T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > is issued.
Counting overload events
Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: Starting
k*Iref> +
[ 041 108 ]
MP: Starting R OL_RC: No.
k*Iref> overload
[ 041 057 ] [ 004 101 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z62C3B_EN
3-96 Counting overload events
3-146 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are likewise
time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event
when the event begins can be read out from the overload memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the overload) can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC
or one of the communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then O L _ R C : O v e r l .
m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)
OL_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 1 ≥1 + CT200 OL_RC: Overl. mem.

overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 007 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC: Overload
recording n
[ * ]
OL_RC: Overload
n
Measured value 1 recording n
Measured value 2 1 033 020

2 033 021
Measured value 3
Measured value n 3 033 022
MAIN: Time tag 4 033 023

306 021
5 033 024
& 6 033 025
FT_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R 8 033 027
OL_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117 A_EN
3-97 Overload memory
3-148 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
During a ground fault the P139 determines the following measured ground fault data:
Duration of the ground fault recording

With the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS)
enabled
Duration of the ground fault with steady state value evaluation, steady state power
evaluation or admittance evaluation
Neutral-point displacement voltage VNG with steady state value evaluation or
admittance evaluation
Residual current IN
Active component of the residual current with steady state value evaluation
Reactive component of the residual current with steady state value evaluation
Filtered ground fault from steady state power evaluation
Admittance, conductance and susceptance with admittance evaluation.
Resetting measured
ground fault data
After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the measured ground fault
data value is displayed as 'Not measured'. However, the values are not erased and can
continue to be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
Duration of the ground fault

recording
The duration of the ground fault recording is defined as the time period between the start
and end of the signal G F _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s .
GF_RC: Record. GF_DA: Ground

in progress + flt. duration
[ 035 005 ] [ 009 100 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
50Z01DWA_EN
3-98 Duration of the ground fault recording
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Value Evaluation
Ground fault duration

The ground fault duration is defined as the time period between starting and dropping
out of the trigger G F D S S : V N G > . A time value will only be issued if the trigger
G F D S S : V N G > has operated for at least the timer period set at G F D S S : t V N G > .
When the timer period set at G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed the display of the ground
fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: VNG> GF_DA: GF

duration pow.meas
triggered & +
[ 009 024 ]
304 151
GFDSS: GF (pow.) R
ready
[ 038 026 ] R
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0144A_EN
3-99 Measurement and storing the ground fault duration from steady state value evaluation
3-150 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
The residual current flowing at the time when the time period set at G F D S S : t V N G >
has elapsed, is stored. Also stored is the active and reactive component of the residual
current determined at the time when the directional decision is issued. All measured
values are issued as per-unit quantities referred to the device’s nominal current Inom.
Neutral-point displacement
voltage
The neutral-point displacement voltage present at the time when the time period set at
G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed, is stored.
GFDSS: Grd. C
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GF_DA: Current
IN IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: Current GF_DA: Curr.
IN,act p.u. IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ] [ 009 022 ]
& R
GFDSS: Curr. GF_DA: Curr.

IN,reac p.u. IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ] [ 009 023 ]
R
GF_DA: Voltage
GFDSS: VNG VNG p.u.
304 150 [ 009 020 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0145A_EN
3-100 Residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage from steady state value evaluation
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Power Evaluation

out of the trigger G F D S S : I N > . A time value will only be issued if the trigger
G F D S S : I N > has operated for at least the operate delay period set at
G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y I N . When the timer delay period cleared automatically.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: IN> GF_DA: GF durat.

triggered + curr.meas.
304 158 [ 009 026 ]
R
R
GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed
304 157
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0148A_EN
3-101 Measurement and storing the ground fault duration from steady state power evaluation
3-152 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
The filtered and un-filtered residual current flowing at the time when the time period set
at G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y I N has elapsed, is stored.
GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed C
304 157
GF_DA: Current IN
IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GF_DA: Curr. IN
GFDSS: 2IN filt. p.u.
filtered [ 009 025 ]
304 159
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: ausführen
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0151A_EN
3-102 Ground fault from steady state power evaluation
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.3 Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance Evaluation

out of the trigger G F D S S : V N G > . A time value will only be issued if the trigger
G F D S S : V N G > has operated for at least the timer period set at
G F D S S : t V N G > . When the timer period set at G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed the
display of the ground fault duration for the last ground fault is cleared automatically.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: VNG> GF_DA: GF

duration admitt.
triggered & +
[ 009 068 ]
304 151
GFDSS: Admittance R
ready
[ 038 167 ] R
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0152A_EN
3-103 Measurement and storing the ground fault duration from admittance evaluation
3-154 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Admittance, conductance
and susceptance
Conductance and susceptance are stored at the time when the directional decision is
issued. The admittance value is measured at the time when the timer period set at
G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y Y ( N ) > has elapsed.
Residual current
The residual current flowing at the time when the time period set at G F D S S : t V N G >
has elapsed, is stored. This measured value is issued as a per-unit quantity referred to
the device’s nominal current Inom.
Neutral-point displacement
voltage
The neutral-point displacement voltage present at the time when the time period set at
G F D S S : t V N G > has elapsed, is stored.
GFDSS: Grd. fault C

pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
IN GF_DA: Current IN
p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GFDSS: Oper.delay C
Y(N)> elapsed
304 175
GFDSS: Admitt. GF_DA: Admittance

Y(N) p.u. Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ] [ 009 065 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: Conduct. GF_DA: Conduct.
G(N) p.u. G(N) p.u.
[ 004 192 ] [ 009 066 ]
& R
GFDSS: Suscept. GF_DA: Suscept.

B(N) p.u. B(N) p.u.
[ 004 193 ] [ 009 067 ]
R
GF_DA: Voltage VNG

GFDSS: VNG p.u.
[ 009 020 ]
304 150
R
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset
LED
306 020
50Z0153A_EN
3-104 Measured ground fault data from admittance evaluation
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC)
Start ground fault recording

A ground fault exists and ground fault recording begins if at least one of the following
conditions is met:
The steady-state ground fault direction determination detected a ground fault.

The transient ground fault direction determination detected a ground fault.
Counting ground fault
events
Ground fault events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
MAIN: Ground fault GF_RC: Record. in

[ 041 087 ] ≥1 progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
forw./LS
[ 041 088 ]
MAIN: Gnd. fault
backw./BS
[ 041 089 ]
MAIN: General
reset USER + GF_RC: No. ground
[ 003 002 ] faults
1: execute [ 004 100 ]
≥1 R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
50Z01B8A_EN
3-105 Counting ground fault events
3-156 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date of each ground fault event is stored. A ground fault’s individual start or end
signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a ground fault event
when the event begins can be read out from the ground fault memory on the local control
panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to
the onset of the ground fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the
ground fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Ground fault logging

Protection signals during a ground fault event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific ground fault event. A total of eight ground fault logs, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile ground
fault memories. After eight ground fault events have been logged, the oldest ground
fault log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single ground fault, then
F T _ R C : G F m e m o r y o v e r f l o w is stored as the final signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured ground fault data will also be entered in the
ground fault memory.
The ground fault logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)
GF_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 005 ]
Signal 1 1 ≥1 + CT200 GF_RC: GF memory

overflow
Signal 2 R [ 035 006 ]
1
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 GF_RC: Ground
flt.record. n
[ * ]
n GF_RC: Ground
flt.record. n
Measured value 1
1 033 010
Measured value 2
2 033 011
Measured value 3
3 033 012
Measured value n
306 021
5 033 014
& 6 033 015
FT_RC: Record. in
progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 016
R 8 033 017
GF_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
12Z6141 A_EN
3-106 Ground fault memory
3-158 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a primary system fault, the P139 collects the following measured fault
data:
Running time
Fault duration
Short-circuit current
Short-circuit voltage
Short-Circuit Impedance
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in Ω
Fault angle
Fault distance
Ground fault (short-circuit) current
Ground fault angle
Relative fault location
Fault location in km
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)
Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
MAIN: General FT_DA: Running

starting + time
306 539 [ 004 021 ]
R
≥1
FT_RC: Record. FT_DA: Fault

in progress + duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: General ≥1
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
50Z01A9A_EN
3-107 Running time and fault duration
3-160 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The setting at F T _ D A: Sta r t d a ta a c q u i s i t. determines the time during a fault at
which acquisition of fault data takes place. The following settings are possible:
End of fault
Acquisition at the end of the fault.
Trigg., trip, GS end
Acquisition at the time
when an appropriately configured binary signal input is triggered during a general
starting state,
when a general trip signal is issued,
when a general starting state ends.
Depending on the setting a fault location output will occur during a general starting state
or during a general starting state with a simultaneous general trip signal.
3-108 Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of
Fault data
The P139 selects a measuring loop based on the phase-selective starting decision.
The fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) and the fault direction are determined
from the voltage and current values collected from these measuring loops. With single-
phase starting signals with ground the current values, corrected by the ground factor, are
used for the selected measured variables. For three-phase starting signals with or
without ground the minimum voltage value and the associated phase-to-phase current
are selected from the phase-to-phase voltages as measured variables.
Starting selected measured variables

A IA-kG / VA-G
B IB-kG / VB-G
C IC-kG / VC-G
A-N IA-kG / VA-G
B-N IB-kG / VB-G
C-N IC-kG / VC-G
A-B IA-B / VA-B
B-C IB-C / VB-C
C-A IC-A / VC-A
A-B-G IA-B / VA-B
B-C-G IB-C / VB-C
C-A-G IC-A / VC-A
A-B-C IP-P(min) / VP-P(min)
A-B-C-G IP-P(min) / VP-P(min)
3-162 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-109 Formation of currents corrected by the ground factor
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)
3-110 Selecting measured variables to collect short-circuit data
3-164 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
The fault must be present for at least 60 ms so that fault measured variables (short-
circuit data) may be determined.
To determine short-circuit data the selected measured variables Imeas and Vmeas are
applied when the fault was identified by the fault data acquisition function. One phase
current is selected as the fault current corresponding to the measuring loop selected.
For multi-pole starting it will be the fault current of the leading phase in the cycle.
The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance using the
nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected
for the measurement by the fault data acquisition function. The geometric sum of the
three phase currents is displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault angle is
the phase displacement between ground fault current and the selected measuring
voltage.
Only the short-circuit current is determined should an m.c.b. trip signal be present or the
transformer module fitted not include voltage transformers and the maximum phase
current is displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom.
If the measured or calculated values are outside of the acceptable measuring range,
‘overflow’ is displayed.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_DA: Output
meas. values C 1,2
305 075
MAIN: Inom C.T.

prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN: Vnom V.T.

prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN: Sel. meas. C 2

loop PG
306 552
60 ms 0
MAIN: General C 1
starting ≥1
306 539
MAIN: M.c.b. trip

V EXT
[ 004 061 ] ≥1
C 1,3,4 FT_DA: Fault
1 current P p.u.
MAIN: V.T. not [ 004 025 ]
fitted306 554 C 2
R
MAIN: Imeas FT_DA: Flt.volt.

1 1 PG/PP p.u.
306 545 [ 004 026 ]
COMP R
2
FT_DA: Fault loop
Imax 1 angle P
[ 004 024 ]
3 R
FT_DA: Fault
4 1 impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
R
MAIN: Sel. meas. 2 ... 3
loop A-G C 1
306 546 1
1 FT_DA: Fault
reactance,sec.
MAIN: Sel. meas. 4 [ 004 028 ]
loop B-G C 2 R
306 547
MAIN: Sel. meas. FT_DA: Fault

loop C-G C 3 1 react., prim.
306 548 [ 004 029 ]
R
MAIN: Sel. meas.
loop A-B C 1
306 549
FT_DA: Fault loop
2 angle N
MAIN: Sel. meas. [ 004 048 ]
loop B-C C 2 R
306 550
MAIN: Sel. meas. FT_DA: Fault

loop C-A C 3 2 curr. N p.u.
306 551 [ 004 049 ]
R
IA
1
IB 2
IC 3
1 ... 3 FT_DA: Meas. loop

selected
[ 004 079 ]
V < 2V
MAIN: Vmeas C
306 544
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED
306 020
50Z0155 B_EN
3-111 Acquisition of short circuit data
3-166 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault location acquisition

In order to determine the fault location in percentage of the line length and in km, the
value of the line reactance, which corresponds to 100% of the line section, as well as the
corresponding line length in km, must be set.
FT_DA: Line
length
[ 010 005 ]
FT_DA: Line
reactance
[ 010 012 ]
FT_DA: Output C
fault locat.
305 076
FT_DA: Fault
FT_DA: Fault location
reactance,sec.. [ 004 022 ]
[ 004 028 ] R
MAIN: General FT_DA: Fault

reset USER locat. percent
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 027 ]
1: execute ≥1 R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
50Z01B4A_EN
3-112 Fault location acquisition
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of load data

In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when
the following general starting signals drop out:
Load impedance
Load angle
Residual current
The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load
impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the
thresholds 0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be
determined. If the thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal was
shorter than 60 ms, the display ‘Not measured’ will appear.
3-168 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General 1
starting
306 539
60 ms 0
S1 1
R1
C 1
MAIN: Sel. meas. & S
loop A-G R
306 546
MAIN: Sel. meas. & S C 2

loop B-G
306 547 R
C 3
MAIN: Sel. meas. & S
loop C-G
306 548 R
MAIN: Vmeas & S C 4
306 544 R

loop B-C R
306 550

loop C-A ≥ 0.1 Inom
306 551 R
FT_DA: IA-kG
307 126 &
1
FT_DA: IB-kG
307 127 2
FT_DA: IC-kG
≥ 0.1 Vnom
307 128 3
4
UA-G C
UB-G
5
FT_DA: Load
UC-G imped.post-flt.
6 [ 004 037 ]
R
1 ... 6 FT_DA: Load angle

IA post-flt.
[ 004 038 ]
IB R
FT_DA: Resid.curr.
IC post-flt
[ 004 039 ]
R
IN
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Reset LED

306 020
50Z0156B_EN
3-113 Acquisition of load data
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset

After pressing the reset key ‘C’ on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as "Not measured". However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
3-170 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is present:
MAIN: General starting

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2
FT_RC: Trigger
FT_RC: I>
In addition, the user can set a logical "OR" combination of logic signals ('m out of n'
parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: I>
[ 017 065 ]
FT_RC: I>
IA triggered
[ 040 063 ]
IB
IC
FT_RC: Fct.
assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC: Trigger FT_RC: Trigger

EXT ≥1 [ 037 076 ]
[ 036 089 ]
FT_RC: Record.
FT_RC: Trigger trig active
USER [ 002 002 ]
[ 003 041 ]
0 0 1 min FT_RC: Record.

≥1 in progress
1 [ 035 000 ]
0: don’t execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
starting
306 539
MAIN: Gen. trip

signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen. trip
signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: General FT_RC: No. of

reset USER + faults
[ 003 002 ] [ 004 020 ]
1: execute ≥1 R
MAIN: General
reset EXT FT_RC: No.
[ 005 255 ] + system disturb.
FT_RC: Reset [ 004 010 ]
record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: System
& ≥1 disturb. runn
ARC: Cycle [ 035 004 ]
running & S1 1
[ 037 000 ]
R1
12Z6221 A_EN
3-114 Start of fault recording and fault counter
3-172 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time assigned to a fault
when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the local control panel or
through the PC and communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the
onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the fault memory
or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-fault
windows, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A total of
eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the
non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault
recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then
F T _ R C : F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and
date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l t y t i m e t a g is
generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the RMS measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Record. C
in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC: Fault mem.
Signal 1 + CT200 overflow
1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1
FT_RC: Fault
recording n
1 [ * ]
FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]
n FT_RC: Fault
recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value n 7 033 006

306 021
MAIN: General
reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
0
1 1: execute
0: don’t execute
1: execute
12Z6161 B_EN
3-115 Fault memory
3-174 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
Phase currents
Residual current measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer
Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer
Reference voltage Vref (when a synchrocheck VT is fitted).
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of
16.4 s is available for recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight
faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-
fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then
recording will terminate when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest
fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred
since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)
FR_RC: Record.
in progress C
[ 035 000 ]
FR_RC: Max.
recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FR_RC: Pre-fault
time
[ 003 078 ]
FR_RC: Post-
fault time
[ 003 079 ]
IA Analog channel 1
R
IB Analog channel 2
R
IC Analog channel 3
R
VA-G Analog channel 4

R
VB-G Analog channel 5

R
VC-G
Analog channel 6
R
IN Analog channel 7
R
VN-G
Analog channel 8
R
Vref Analog channel 9

R
FR_RC: Reset
record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FR_RC: Reset
record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
12Z6220A_EN
3-116 Fault value recording
3-176 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)
A three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC protection) is available

in the P139. Three separate measuring systems are available for this purpose for:

Negative-sequence current system
Residual currents system
Either the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) or the auto-reclosing

control may intervene in the functional sequence of the DTOC function.
Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover, enabling
can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-117 Disabling or enabling DTOC protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages

The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be
active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time (see section ‘Activation
of Dynamic Parameters’) and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one phase, timer stages are started
and after the time periods have elapsed, a signal is issued. The timer stages can be
blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
When the inrush stabilization function (see: ‘Main Functions of the P139’) is triggered,
the 1st stage of the DTOC function is blocked.
The trip signals from all phase current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control
function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages I> and I>> only) can be blocked by the
short-circuit direction determination function. Depending on the setting of the short-
circuit direction determination function, the trip signal of stages I> or I>> will be enabled.
3-178 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-118 Phase current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)
3-119 Trip signals from the DTOC phase current stages
3-180 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current
stages
The P139 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this formula. The result depends on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e
setting.
Phase sequence A-B-C:

1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a 2 ⋅ I B + a ⋅ I C
3
)
Phase sequence A-C-B:
1
(
I neg = ⋅ I A + a ⋅ I B + a 2 ⋅ I C
3
)
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to

detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types
can be active. The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic
parameters" (see section ‘Activation of Dynamic Parameters’) and the "normal"
thresholds are active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set
thresholds, timer stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed, a trip signal
is issued.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-
pole starting (depending on the setting).
The trip signals from the negative-sequence current stages are only enabled if the
operating mode for the general starting has been set to 'With starting IN, Ineg'.
When the inrush stabilization function (see section ‘Main Functions of the P139’) is
triggered, the 1st stage of the negative-sequence current function is blocked.
When the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) is active, trip signals from
the DTOC negative-sequence current stages have no directional dependence.
The trip signals from all negative-sequence current stages are blocked by the auto-
reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Inrush
stabil.306trigg
014 &
MAIN: Rush
restr.selec.
306 401
fct.
DTOC: Enabled
[ 040 120 ] &
MAIN: Protection
active 306 001
MAIN: Dynam.
param. active
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC: Block.
tIneg> EXT DTOC: tIneg>
[ 036 141 ] C PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: Block
tim.st. IN,neg
306 400 DTOC: Ineg>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0
DTOC: tIneg>
MAIN: Phase DTOC: Ineg> elapsed
sequence & c dynamic PSx [ 036 148 ]
[ 010 049 ] [ * ]
DTOC: Starting
IA Ineg>
IB & [ 036 145 ]
Ineg
IC
& DTOC: Trip signal
tIneg>
ARC: Blocking [ 036 151 ]
trip
[ 042 000 ]
DTOC: Block. DTOC: tIneg>>

tIneg>> EXT C PSx
[ 036 142 ] [ * ]
DTOC: Ineg>>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg>>
elapsed
DTOC: Ineg>> [ 036 149 ]
& c dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>
[ 036 146 ]
DTOC: Trip signal

& tIneg>>
[ 036 152 ]
DTOC: Block. DTOC: tIneg>>>

tIneg>>> EXT C PSx
[ 036 143 ] [ * ]
DTOC: Ineg>>>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIneg>>>
DTOC: Ineg>>> elapsed
& c dynamic PSx [ 036 150 ]
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>>
[ 036 147 ]
DTOC: Trip signal
MAIN: Gen. start. & tIneg>>>
Mode PSx [ 036 153 ]
[ * ]
1: With start.
IN, Ineg
* Parameter DTOC: Ineg>

PSx
DTOC: Ineg>
dynamic PSx
DTOC: tIneg>
PSx
DTOC: Ineg>>
PSx
DTOC: Ineg>> DTOC: tIneg>>
PSx
dynamic PSx
set 1 072 011 076 200 072 023 072 012 076 201 072 024
set 2 073 011 077 200 073 023 073 012 077 201 073 024
set 3 074 011 078 200 074 023 074 012 078 201 074 024
set 4 075 011 079 200 075 023 075 012 079 201 075 024
* Parameter DTOC: Ineg>>>

PSx
DTOC: Ineg>>> DTOC: tIneg>>>
PSx
MAIN: Gen.
dynamic PSx start. Mode PSx
set 1 072 013 076 202 072 025 017 027
set 2 073 013 077 202 073 025 001 219
set 3 074 013 078 202 074 025 001 220
set 4 075 013 079 202 075 025 001 221
12Z6281A_EN
3-120 Negative-sequence current stages
3-182 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIneg> DTOC: Trip

elapsed & signal tIneg>
[ 036 148 ] [ 036 151 ]
DTOC: tIneg>> DTOC: Trip

signal tIneg>>
elapsed & [ 036 152 ]
[ 036 149 ]
DTOC: tIneg>>> DTOC: Trip

elapsed signal tIneg>>>
[ 036 150 ] & [ 036 153 ]
ARC: Blocking
trip
[ 042 000 ]
MAIN: Gen.
start. Mode PSx
[ * ] * Parameter MAIN: Gen.
1: With start. start. Mode PSx
IN, Ineg set 1 017 027
set 2 001 219
set 3 001 220
set 4 001 221 19Z5282B_EN
3-121 Trip signals from the DTOC negative-sequence current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling
DTOC residual current
stages
DTOC residual current stages can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or
through binary signal inputs.
Residual current stages

The residual current is monitored by the P139 with four-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be active.
The "dynamic" thresholds are active for the set hold time (see section ‘Activation of
Dynamic Parameters’) and the "normal" thresholds are active when no hold time is
running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages are started and
after the time periods have elapsed, a signal is issued.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
In addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-
pole starting (depending on the setting).
The trip signals from the residual current stages are only enabled if the operating mode
for the general starting has been set to 'With starting IN, Ineg'.
The trip signals from all residual current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control
function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages IN> and IN>> only) can be blocked by
the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD). Depending on the setting of
the short-circuit direction determination function, the trip signal of stages IN> or IN>> will
be enabled.
Selecting the measured

variable
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current of the
stages IN>, IN>> AND IN>>>: either the residual current calculated from the three phase
currents or the residual current directly measured at the fourth transformer (T 4).
For stage IN>>>> the calculated residual current is always used.
IN>,>>,>>> PSx
IN>,>>,>>> PSx
12Z5104A
3-122 Selecting the measured variable
3-184 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Starting N
DTOC: Enabled 305 461
[ 040 120 ] &
DTOC: System IN
enabled
[ 040 133 ]
DTOC: Blocking DTOC: tIN>
tIN> EXT C
[ 041 063 ] PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: IN>
& c PSx
MAIN: Block [ * ] t
tim.st. IN,neg 0
306 400 DTOC: tIN>
DTOC: IN> dynamic elapsed
& c PSx [ 040 013 ]
[ * ]
DTOC: IN DTOC: Starting

IN>
307 150 [ 040 077 ]
DTOC: Blocking DTOC: tIN>>

tIN>> EXT C PSx
[ 041 064 ] [ * ]
DTOC: IN>>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIN>>
elapsed
DTOC: IN>> [ 040 121 ]
& c dynamic PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>
MAIN: Dynam. [ 040 041 ]
param. active
[ 040 090 ]
DTOC: Blocking DTOC: tIN>>>
tIN>>> EXT C PSx
[ 041 065 ] [ * ]
DTOC: IN>>>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIN>>>
DTOC: IN>>> elapsed
c dynamic PSx [ 039 079 ]
&
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>>
[ 039 078 ]
DTOC: Block. DTOC: tIN>>>>

tIN>>>> EXT C PSx
[ 041 101 ] [ * ]
DTOC: IN>>>>
& c PSx
[ * ] t 0 DTOC: tIN>>>>
elapsed
DTOC: IN>>>>
& c dynamic PSx [ 035 040 ]
[ * ]
DTOC: Starting
IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
* Parameter DTOC: IN> DTOC: IN> DTOC: tIN> DTOC: IN>> DTOC: IN>> DTOC: tIN>>
PSx dynamic PSx PSx PSx dynamic PSx PSx
set 1 017 003 017 081 017 008 017 009 017 086 017 010
set 2 073 015 073 035 073 027 073 016 073 036 073 028
set 3 074 015 074 035 074 027 074 016 074 036 074 028
set 4 075 015 075 035 075 027 075 016 075 036 075 028
* Parameter DTOC: IN>>> DTOC: IN>>> DTOC: tIN>>> DTOC: IN>>>> DTOC: IN>>>> DTOC: tIN>>>>
PSx dynamic PSx PSx PSx dynamic PSx PSx
set 1 017 018 017 087 017 019 072 018 072 036 072 030
set 2 073 017 073 037 073 029 073 018 072 105 073 030
set 3 074 017 074 037 074 029 074 018 072 202 074 030
set 4 075 017 075 037 075 029 075 018 072 219 075 030
12Z6280A_EN
3-123 Residual current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIN> DTOC: Trip

elapsed & signal tIN>
[ 040 013 ] [ 041 021 ]
SCDD: Block.
direct. tIN>
304 463
DTOC: tIN>> DTOC: Trip

elapsed & signal tIN>>
[ 040 121 ] [ 040 028 ]
SCDD: Block.
direct. tIN>>
304 464
DTOC: tIN>>> DTOC: Trip

elapsed signal tIN>>>
[ 039 079 ] & [ 040 079 ]
DTOC: tIN>>>> DTOC: Trip sign.

elapsed
[ 035 040 ] & tIN>>>>
[ 035 046 ]
ARC: Blocking
trip
[ 042 000 ]
MAIN: Gen.
start. Mode PSx
[ * ] * Parameter MAIN: Gen.
start. Mode PSx
1: With start.
IN, Ineg set 1 017 027
set 2 001 219
set 3 001 220
set 4 001 221
12Z5103B_EN
3-124 Trip signal from the DTOC residual current stages
3-186 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Hold-time logic for

intermittent ground faults
A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in the P139.
As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time is reset.
At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN> starting commences.
As IN> starting ends, the timer stage D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is started
and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened by the set value of
the timer stage.
The accumulation result is compared to the settable limit value at
DTOC: tIN>, interm. PSx.
If the limit value is reached and a general starting is present, then a trip results,
provided that it is permitted by the relevant MAIN settings:
MAIN: Block tim.st. IN,neg
(Address 017 015)
MAIN: Gen. starting mode
(Address 017 027)
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
(Address 021 001)
MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
(Address 021 002)
If the limit value is reached while the timer stage
D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is running, then a trip will occur when the next
general starting phase commences.
With each release of the trigger stage IN>, the set hold-time
D T O C : H o l d - t . t I N > , i n t m P S x is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed
or after the hold-time logic has issued a trip
(D T O C : T r i p s i g . t I N > , i n t m .), accumulation is stopped and the accumulation
buffer is cleared.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)
3-125 Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics
3-188 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-126 Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Starting IN>
DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,

i. runn
DTOC: t2 N
DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
Startings not
illustrated
have occured
here.
Settings
DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.
IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
Setting Setting Setting
19Z5243A_EN
3-127 Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value
3-190 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMT1 and IDMT2)
Note:
) In this section IDMT represents IDMT1.
This description is also valid for IDMT2 (if there is no indication to the contrary).
The addresses given apply to IDMT1. The addresses for function group IDMT2 are
given in chapters 7 and 8.
For example, the address for I D M T 1 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is 017 096
(given in the following picture), but the address for I D M T 2 : G e n e r a l e n a b l e
U S E R is 017 052.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)
The inverse-time overcurrent protection function (IDMT) operates with three separate
measuring systems for:

Negative-sequence current
Residual current.
Either the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) or the auto-reclosing

control function may intervene in the functional sequence of the IDMT function.
Disabling or enabling IDMT

protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling
3-128 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
Time-dependent
characteristics
The measuring systems for phase currents, residual current and negative-sequence
current operate independently of each other and can be set separately. The user can
select from a large number of characteristics (see table below). The measured variable
is the maximum phase current, the negative-sequence current, or the residual current,
depending on the measuring system. The tripping characteristics available for selection
are shown in figures 3-129 to 3-132.
3-192 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
Characteristic settable a b c R
factor:
k = 0.05 to 10.00
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t = k⋅ b
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 ⎛ ⎞ k⋅R
⎜ ⎟ tr = 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜⎛ I ⎞ b
⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎟
⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI ⎛ ⎞ k⋅R
⎜ ⎟ tr = 2
⎜ ⎟ ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅⎜
a
+ c ⎟ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎜ ⎛ I ⎞b ⎟ ⎝ I ref ⎠
⎜⎜ ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎟
⎟
⎝ ⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t = k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln ⎟
⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K1A S8Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1 k=0.05
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K3A S8Z50K4A
3-129 Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3
3-194 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K5C S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
Characteristic No. 7
3-130 Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-195

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1 k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K8C S8Z50K9C
Characteristic No. 8 Kennlinie Nr. 9
ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
Characteristic No. 10
3-131 Tripping characteristics as per ANSI
3-196 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50KBA S8Z50KCA
3-132 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-197

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 to detect when they exceed the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic"
threshold is active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters" (see section
‘Activation of Dynamic Parameters’) and the "normal" threshold is active when no hold
time is running. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set reference
current value is exceeded in one phase. The P139 will then determine the maximum
current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for further processing.
Depending on the characteristic selected and the current magnitude the P139 will
determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall
below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the current flow magnitude.
When the inrush stabilization function (see section ‘Main Functions of the P139’) is
triggered, the phase current stage is blocked.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal

input.
The trip signal from the IDMT protection may also be blocked by the short-circuit
direction determination or the auto-reclosing control function. Depending on the setting
of the short-circuit direction determination the trip signal will be enabled. The trip signal
from the phase current stage is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC)
when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-198 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Rush restr.

A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
IDMT: Enabled
[ 040 100 ] &
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001 IDMT: Iref,P
C PSx
& [ * ]
IDMT: Starting A
IDMT: Iref,P 304 359
MAIN: Dynam. & C dynamic

[ * ]
PSx
param. active IDMT: Starting B
[ 040 090 ] 304 360
C
IDMT: Starting C
304 361
1.05 * Iref
IDMT: Starting
Iref,P>
IA & [ 040 080 ]
IB &
IC &
IDMT: Setting
Characteristic P IDMT: Characteristic
PSx PSx
[ * ]
0: Definite Time
IDMT: Min. trip
time P PSx 1: IEC Standard Inverse
[ * ] 2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT: Factor kt,P 3: IEC Extr. Inverse
PSx 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
Setting [ * ]
5: IEEE Moderately Inv .
IDMT: Release P PSx
IDMT: Hold time P 6: IEEE Very Inverse
PSx
1: Without delay [ * ] 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
2: Delayed as per 8: ANSI Normally Inv.
char. IDMT: Release P
PSx 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
[ * ] 10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMT: Block.
tIref,P> EXT C 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
[ 040 101 ]
C
IDMT: Memory P
clear
[ 040 110 ]
IDMT: Hold time P

IP,max/Iref,P running
[ 040 053 ]
IDMT: tIref,P>
elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter IDMT: Iref,P IDMT: Iref,P IDMT:

PSx dynamic PSx Characteristic P
PSx
set 1 072 050 072 003 072 056
set 2 073 050 073 003 073 056
set 3 074 050 074 003 074 056
set 4 075 050 075 003 075 056
Parameter IDMT: Factor IDMT: Min. trip IDMT: Hold time IDMT: Release P
kt,P PSx time P PSx P PSx PSx
set 1 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
set 2 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
set 3 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
set 4 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
10Z5008B_EN
3-133 Phase current element. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.) (Trip signal: see following figures)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-199

3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT1: tIref,P>
elapsed IDMT1: Trip signal
[ 040 082 ] tIref,P>
trip
[ 042 000 ]
SCDD: Block.
direct. tkIref>
304 465
IDMT1: ARC
Starting Iref,P>
304 367
IDMT1: Starting
Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
12Z5111 B_EN
3-134 Trip signal of the phase current stage IDMT1
2 1
21 23
12Z5112A
3-135 Trip signal of the phase current stages IDMT2
3-200 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence
current stage
According to the following formulas the P139 will determine the negative-sequence
current and positive-sequence current, taking into account the set phase sequence
(alternative terminology: Rotary field):
Phase sequence A-B-C Phase sequence A-C-B

(alternative terminology: (alternative terminology:
clockwise rotary field) anti-clockwise rotary field)
I neg =
1
3
(
⋅ IA + a 2 ⋅ IB + a ⋅ IC ) I net =
1
3
(
⋅ IA + a ⋅ IB + a 2 ⋅ IC )
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the
set thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic"
current value is exceeded by the negative-sequence current. Depending on the
characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P139 will determine the
tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a
settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the negative-sequence current flow
magnitude.
When the inrush stabilization function (see section: ‘Main Functions of the P139’) is
triggered, the negative-sequence current stage is blocked.

input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by single-
pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
When the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) is enabled, a trip signal
from the IDMT negative-sequence current stage is always non-directional.
The trip signal from the negative-sequence current stage is blocked by the auto-
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-201

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Rush restr.

A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN: Rush restr.
C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
IDMT: Enabled
[ 040 100 ] &
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001 IDMT: Iref,neg
C PSx
& [ * ]
IDMT: Iref,neg
& C dynamic
[ *
PSx
]
MAIN: Dynam.
param. active
[ 040 090 ]
1.05 * Iref
Ineg/Iref,neg
MAIN: Phase C
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
IDMT: Starting
IA & Iref,neg>
Ineg [ 040 107 ]
IB
IC
IDMT: Character. Setting

neg. PSx IDMT: Character. neg.
[ * ] PSx
0: Definite Time
IDMT: Factor
kt,neg PSx 1: IEC Standard Inverse
[ * ]
2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMT: Min.trip 3: IEC Extr. Inverse
time neg PSx 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
[ * ]
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
IDMT: Hold time 6: IEEE Very Inverse
neg PSx
Setting [ * ] 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
IDMT: Character. 8: ANSI Normally Inv.
neg. PSx IDMT: Release
neg. PSx 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
1: Without delay [ * ]
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
2: Delayed as per 11: RI-Type Inverse
char.
MAIN: Betr.art C 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Gen.Anr.PSx &
[ * ]
1: With start. IN,
Ineg
IDMT: Block. IDMT: Memory neg
tIref,neg>EXT clear
[ 040 102 ] [ 040 111 ]
MAIN: Block
tim.st. IN,neg IDMT: Hold time
306 400 neg runn.
[ 040 113 ]
IDMT: tIref,neg>
elapsed
[ 040 109 ]
IDMT: Trip sig.
& tIref,neg>
ARC: Blocking trip [ 040 108 ]
[ 042 000 ]
Parameter IDMT: Iref,neg IDMT: Iref,neg IDMT: Character. IDMT: Factor

PSx dynamic PSx neg. PSx kt,neg PSx
set 1 072 051 072 004 072 057 072 054
set 2 073 051 073 004 073 057 073 054
set 3 074 051 074 004 074 057 074 054
set 4 075 051 075 004 075 057 075 054
Parameter IDMT: Min.trip IDMT: Hold time IDMT: Release MAIN: Gen.
time neg PSx neg PSx neg. PSx start. mode PSx
set 1 072 078 072 072 072 060 017 027
set 2 073 078 073 072 073 060 001 219
set 3 074 078 074 072 074 060 001 220
set 4 075 078 075 072 075 060 001 221
12Z6211A_EN
3-136 Negative-sequence current stage. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
(Note: Previous terminology of MAIN : Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field)
3-202 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measured

variable for the residual
current stage
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current: either
the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
directly measured at the fourth transformer (T 4).
3-137 Selecting the measured variable. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-203

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stage

The residual current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different thresholds can be active. The "dynamic"
current value is exceeded by the residual current. Depending on the characteristic
selected and the residual current magnitude the P139 will determine the tripping time.
Moreover the tripping time will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum
time threshold irrespective of the residual current flow magnitude.

input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked by single-
pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
The trip signal from the IDMT1 protection may also be blocked by the short-circuit
direction determination or the auto-reclosing control function. Depending on the setting
of the short-circuit direction determination the trip signal will be enabled. The trip signals
of the residual current stages IDMT1 and IDMT2 are blocked by the auto-reclosing
control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-204 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT: Enabled
[ 040 100 ] &
MAIN: System IN
enabled
[ 040 133 ]
IDMT: Iref,N
MAIN: Dynam. & C PSx
param. active [ * ]
[ 040 090 ]
IDMT: Iref,N
& C dynamic
[ *
PSx
]
C
1.05 * Iref
IDMT: IN IN/Iref,N IDMT: Starting

307 100 Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
IDMT: Characte- Setting

ristic N PSx IDMT: Characteristic N
[ * ] PSx
0: Definite Time
IDMT: Factor kt,N 1: IEC Standard Inverse
PSx
[ * ] 2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
IDMT: Min. trip
time N PSx 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
[ * ]
5: IEEE Moderately Inv .
Setting 6: IEEE Very Inverse
IDMT: Hold time N
IDMT: Release N PSx
PSx [ * ] 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
1: Without delay 8: ANSI Normally Inv.
IDMT: Release N 9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
2: Delayed as per PSx
char. [ * ] 10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
MAIN: Gen. start. & C 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Mode PSx
[ * ]
1: With start. IN,
Ineg
IDMT: Block. IDMT: Memory N
tIref,N> EXT clear
[ 040 103 ] [ 040 112 ]
MAIN: Block tim.
st. IN,neg IDMT: Hold time N
306 400
running
[ 040 054 ]
IDMT: tIref,N>
elapsed
[ 040 083 ]
Parameter MAIN: Gen. IDMT: Iref,N IDMT: Iref,N IDMT: Characte-

start. Mode PSx PSx dynamic PSx ristic N PSx
set 1 017 027 072 052 072 005 072 058
set 2 001 219 073 052 073 005 073 058
set 3 001 220 074 052 074 005 074 058
set 4 001 221 075 052 075 005 075 058
Parameter IDMT: Factor IDMT: Min. trip IDMT: Hold time IDMT: Release N
kt,N PSx time N PSx N PSx PSx
set 1 072 055 072 079 072 073 072 061
set 2 073 055 073 079 073 073 073 061
set 3 074 055 074 079 074 073 074 061
set 4 075 055 075 079 075 073 075 061
12Z6210A_EN
3-138 Residual current stage. (IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.) (Trip signal: see following figures)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-205

3 Operation
(continued)
IDMT1: tIref,N>
elapsed IDMT1: Trip signal
[ 040 083 ] tIref,N>
[ 040 085 ]
ARC: Blocking
trip
[ 042 000 ]
SCDD: Block.
direct. tkINref>
304 466
IDMT1: ARC Starting

Iref,N>
IDMT1: Starting 304 368
Iref,N>
[ 040 081 ]
12Z5113 B_EN
3-139 Trip signal from the residual current stage
2 2
22 24
12Z5114A
3-140 Trip signal from the residual current stage
Holding time
Depending on the current flow the P139 will determine the tripping time and a timer
stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during which the
IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped out. Should
starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the renewed starting will be
added to the time period stored. When the starting times sum reach the tripping time
value determined by the P139 then the corresponding signal will be issued. Should
starting not recur during the hold time period then, depending on the setting, the memory
storing the accumulated starting times value will either be cleared without delay or
according to the characteristic set. In figure 3-141 the effect of hold time is shown by the
example of a phase current stage.
3-206 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-141 Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example
Example A: Hold time determined is not reached.
Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
(IDMT represents IDMT1 and IDMT2; the addresses apply to IDMT1.)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-207

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Short-Circuit Direction Determination (Function Group SCDD)
The P139 provides short circuit direction determination (SCDD). With this feature it is
possible to apply the P139 for directional definite-time overcurrent protection and
directional inverse-time overcurrent protection. Two separate measuring systems are
available for this purpose for:

Residual currents system
Enable/disable the short-
circuit direction
determination
The short-circuit direction determination can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter
subset.
3-142 Enable/disable the short-circuit direction determination
3-208 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages

To determine direction in the phase current stages and depending on the type of fault a
phase current and the opposed phase-to-phase voltage as well as the respective
optimum characteristic angle are used.
As an example for a single-pole fault in phase A to ground the phase A current value (I),
the phase B to phase C voltage value (V) and the characteristic angle = +45° are
selected as measured variables (see figure 3-143).
The vector of the selected phase-to-phase voltage is the reference quantity. Beginning
with the reference quantity the characteristic angle αP will determine the measuring
relation. Depending on the type of fault the P139 will present various characteristic
angles. The measuring relation is defined as the angle bisector for the directional zone
"Forward". Forward directional is apparent if the vector of the selected phase current
lies in the range ≤ ± 90° of the measuring relation.
Backward directional is apparent if the vector of the selected phase current lies in the
range > ± 90° of the measuring relation.
3-143 Example for the forming of a directional phase current stage decision with a single-pole fault in phase A to ground (A-G) and with an
inductive system and a phase sequence A-B-C (or clockwise rotary field direction)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-209

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling for
phase current stages
Direction determination for phase current stages is only enabled if the following
conditions are met simultaneously:
The short-circuit direction determination is enabled.

Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected no faults in the voltage measuring loop
(see "Measuring Circuit Monitoring").
A phase current starting signal is present.
At least two phase-to-phase voltages exceed 200 mV.
All three phase current values exceed 0.1 Inom.
The external signal M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T is not present.
If the short-circuit direction determination is disabled the internal signal
S C D D : P h a s e c u r r . s t a g e b l . is generated.
Voltage memory can be applied when 3-pole faults have occurred. (See description at
the end of this section.)
3-144 Enabling direction determination for phase current stages
3-210 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
After being enabled and depending on the direction determination decision one of the
following signals will be issued:
With a fault in forward direction,

SCDD: Fault P forward
SCDD: Fault P backward
To inhibit transient contention problems starting and dropping out of a direction
determination decision in both directions is delayed for 30 ms.
MAIN: Rotary field

[ 010 049 ]
1: A- B- C
2: A – C – B
SCDD: Determin.
P enabled
304 456
MAIN: Starting
A int.
306 513
MAIN: Starting
B int. Starting Selected meas. var. Characteristic angle αP
306 514
MAIN: Starting Imeas Vmeas

C int.
306 515
IA at Setting at Setting
Rotary field Rotary field
IB
A – B – C A – C – B
IC
A IA UB-C +45° +135°
UA-G + B IB UC-A +45° +135°
UB-G - C IC UA-B +45° +135°
UC-G + A-B IA UB-C +60° +150°
- B-C IC UA-B +30° +120°
- C-A IC UA-B +60° +150°
+ A-B-C IC UA-B +45° +135°
SCDD: Fault P
forward
[ 036 018 ]
Direction determination
SCDD: Fault P
backward
[ 036 019 ]
19Z5029B_EN
3-145 Direction determination for phase current stages

(Note: Previous terminology of MAIN : Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-211

3 Operation
(continued)
Forming the blocking

signal for the phase current
stages
To form the blocking signal for the two DTOC phase current stages and the IDMT phase
current stage the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may be set
separately for each of the stages to either 'Forward directional', 'Backward directional' or
'Non-directional'.
A blocking signal for the first DTOC phase current stage is formed when one of the
following conditions is met:
The direction for tI> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
determination detects a fault in backward direction.
The direction for tI> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
determination detects a fault in forward direction.
A blocking signal for the second DTOC phase current stage is formed when one of the
The direction for tI>> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
The direction for tI>> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
A blocking signal for the IDMT phase current stage is formed when one of the following
conditions is met:
The direction for tIref,P> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
The direction for tIref,P> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
In case the direction determination function is not enabled (e.g. with a M.c.b. trip) it is
possible to select whether stages set to 'Forward directional' may be operated with
biased tripping by enabling S C D D : T r i p b i a s P S x .
3-212 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
SCDD: Block.
direct. tkIref>
19Z5030 B_EN
3-146 Forming the blocking signals for the phase current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-213

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stages

To determine direction in the residual current stages the residual current measured (IN)
and the neutral-point displacement voltage (VN-G = -VG-N) are used. The specification of
a good characteristic angle is carried out by the user according to the neutral-point
treatment of the system. The characteristic angle αN may be set in
the range: - 90° to + 90°
The reference quantity is the neutral-point displacement vector. Beginning with the
reference quantity the characteristic angle will determine the measuring relation. The
measuring relation is defined as the angle bisector for the directional zone "Forward".
Forward directional is apparent if the vector of the residual current lies in the range
≤ ± 90° of the measuring relation.
Backward directional is apparent if the vector of the residual current lies in the range
> ± 90° of the measuring relation.
In the following example the system neutral is grounded with a relatively low resistance.
Here the residual current apparent with a single-pole fault in phase A to ground (A-G)
and a forward directional fault will take up the approximate position as shown in figure
3-147. With the characteristic angle αN = -45° a forward directional decision will be
issued.
3-147 Example for forming a directional decision in the residual current stage
3-214 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning and selecting

the measured variables
For the short-circuit direction determination it is possible to use either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or
the displacement voltage measured at the T 90 transformer.
SCDD: Evaluation
VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 SCDD: VNG
310 026
VC-G
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter SCDD: Evaluation

VNG PSx
Set 1 071 056
Set 2 071 057
Set 3 071 058
Set 4 071 059
19Z6450 A_EN
3-148a Selecting the measuring voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-215

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling for
residual current stages
Direction determination for residual current stages is only enabled if the following
conditions are met simultaneously:
The short-circuit direction determination is enabled

The short-circuit direction determination is not blocked by the measuring-circuit
monitoring (see section ‘Measuring Circuit Monitoring’)
A residual current starting signal is present
The residual current exceeds 0.01 Inom
The external signal M A I N : M . c . b . t r i p V E X T is not present.

The neutral-point displacement voltage exceeds the threshold value set at
SCDD: VNG> PSx.
SCDD: Enabled
[ 040 098 ]
MCMON: Meas.
circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: Starting
N int.
306 516
DTOC: Starting
IN>>
[ 040 041 ]
SCDD: VNG>
DTOC: Starting PSx
IN>>> [ * ]
[ 039 078 ]
SCDD: VN-G
310 026
> 0.01 Inom
SCDD: Determin.
N enabled
304 455
IN SCDD: Resid.
curr.stage bl.
304 454
Parameter SCDD: VNG>

PSx
set 1 017 077
set 2 077 244
set 3 078 244
set 4 079 244
19Z6451 A_EN
3-148b Enabling direction determination for residual current stages
3-216 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
After being enabled and depending on the direction determination decision one of the
following signals will be issued:

SCDD: Ground fault forward
With a fault in backward direction,

SCDD: Ground fault backward
To inhibit transient contention problems starting and dropping out of a direction

determination decision in both directions is delayed for 30 ms.
SCDD: Determin. SCDD: Charact.

N enabled angle G PSx
304 455 [ * ]
IN
Direction
determination
SCDD: VN-G
310 026
SCDD: Ground
fault forward
[ 040 037 ]
SCDD: Ground
fault backw.
[ 040 038 ]
Parameter SCDD: Charact.

angle G PSx
set 1 017 076
set 2 077 243
set 3 078 243
set 4 079 243
19Z6452 A_EN
3-149 Direction determination for residual current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-217

3 Operation
(continued)
Forming the blocking

signal for the residual
current stages
To form the blocking signal for the two DTOC residual current stages and the IDMT
residual current stage the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may be set
separately for each of the stages to either 'Forward directional', 'Backward directional' or
'Non-directional'.
A blocking signal for the first DTOC residual current stage is formed when one of the
The direction for tIN> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
The direction for tIN> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
A blocking signal for the second DTOC residual current stage is formed when one of the
The direction for tIN>> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
The direction for tIN>> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
A blocking signal for the IDMT residual current stage is formed when one of the following
conditions is met:
The direction for tIref,N> is set to 'Forward directional' and the short-circuit direction
The direction for tIref,N> is set to 'Backward directional' and the short-circuit direction
In case the direction determination function is not enabled (e.g. with a M.c.b. trip) it is
possible to select whether stages set to 'Forward directional' may be operated with
biased tripping by enabling S C D D : T r i p b i a s P S x . In case of a phase current
starting bias tripping in the residual current stage may be suppressed by enabling
SCDD: Block. Bias G PSx.
3-218 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
SCDD: Block.
direct. tkINref>
19Z5033 B_EN
3-150 Forming the blocking signals for the residual current stages
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-219

3 Operation
(continued)
Signaling logic
Fault directional signals generated by the directional determination function of the phase
and residual current stages are grouped together to a combined function.
3-151 Fault signals from phase or residual current stages forward or backward directional
Short-circuit direction
determination using
voltage memory
The short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) function group is subdivided into two
subsets.
Direction determination in a residual current system
For direction determination in a residual current system the measured residual current IN
and the vector addition of the phase-ground voltages are applied.
In this case voltage memory is not used.
Direction determination in a phase system
For direction determination in a phase system the SCDD function uses the fault-
dependent short-circuit current and – in general – the phase-to-phase, un-faulted
voltages (not involved in the short-circuit) assigned to the type of fault. This ensures that
with single-pole and two-pole faults there is always sufficient voltage available for
direction determination.
This procedure can also be applied to three-pole faults with a phase-to-phase voltage
> 200 mV.
Should a three-pole fault occur close to the point of measurement, there could be such a
large 3-phase voltage drop, that direction determination on above basis is no longer
possible. For such fault occurrences there is a voltage memory available from which the
SCDD function can obtain the necessary voltage information for direction determination.
3-220 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
With a three-pole fault in the phase-current stage the measurement loop voltage
(VABmeas) is compared to the selected operate value (Vop.Val.) of the voltage memory
set by the user at S C D D : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x . If VABmeas < Vop.Val. then
the SCDD function will not use VABmeas but will revert to the voltage memory, if it has
been enabled. The following signal is issued:
SCDD: Direct. using memory
If the voltage memory has not been enabled (i.e. |Delta f| > 2.5 Hz) the SCDD function
will check if VABmeas is sufficient for direction determination.
Should the result with a disabled voltage memory be VABmeas > 200 mV the direction
will be determined on the basis of VABmeas. The following signal is issued:
SCDD: Direct. using Vmeas
If V12meas < 200 mV, a forward fault is detected if the voltage memory is disabled and if
the pre-orientation is active (set under S C D D : T r i p b i a s ), otherwise the directional
decision is blocked. The following signal is issued:
SCDD: Forw. w/o measurem.
These signals are additionally delivered to the following signals:
SCDD: Fault P forward

SCDD: Fault P backward
SCDD: Fault P Fault P or G forwd.
SCDD: Fault P Fault P or G backw.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-221

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)
When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing

fault. This is especially critical as the overcurrent protection will only clear the fault after
the set time delay period has elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible
clearance is desired.
To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be applied
not only to the circuit breaker but at the same time also to the P139. With the manual
close command a settable timer stage will be triggered, as long as there is no close
request present from the ARC and no HSR cycle from an external auto reclose control is
operating. By setting a parameter it is possible to choose which starting decisions from
the overcurrent protection will generate a trip signal while the timer stage is running.
An internal blocking signal is generated together with the trigger signal for the timer
stage. This internal blocking signal will prevent that ARC is activated during an existing
fault when a manual close signal is issued.
3-222 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-152 Switch on to fault protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-223

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG)
Protective signaling
Protective signaling is used together with the short-circuit direction determination in
power systems with single-side infeed and a subsequent parallel line configuration (line
section). Selective instantaneous clearing of the line section affected by the fault is
initiated by this function, while the DTOC or IDMT tripping times are bypassed.
Disabling or enabling
protective signaling
Disabling or enabling may be carried out with a parameter or binary signal inputs.
The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via

P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via P S I G : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, PSIG can
be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If
only the function P S I G : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then
protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is disabled by
a negative edge. If only the function PSIG: D i s a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary
signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
Protective signaling
is ready
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
It must be activated.
There is no external block.
There is no transmission fault.
3-224 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-153 Protective signaling is ready
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-225

3 Operation
(continued)
Setting up a
communications link
When setting up a communications link the make contact or the break contact
(dependent on the selected transmission relay operating mode 'Transm. rel. make con.'
or 'Transm. rel. break con.') is to be connected by pilot wires to the input labeled
"PSIG: R e c e i v e E X T " at the remote station (see Chapter 5 "Installation and
Connection" and figure 3-154). With both operating modes and in the idle state there is
a receive signal (DC loop closed) present at the local and at the remote station.
S8Z 5031B_EN
3-154 Protective signaling over pilot wires, operating mode selected 'Transm. rel. break con.'
3-226 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation of
protective signaling
When a general starting condition is issued the DC loop is opened without delay (Send).
Closing again of the DC loop with the general starting condition present after the set
tripping time has elapsed occurs according to the operating mode selected at
PS I G : D i r e c . d e p e n d e n c e P S x and dependent on the directional decisions:
Independently of a directional decision

Dependent on the condition that no directional decision by the phase current stage in
backward direction is present
Dependent on the condition that no directional decision by the residual current stage
in backward direction is present
Dependent that one of the conditions in below table is met:
Fault residual Fault residual Fault phase Fault phase

current stage current stage current stage current stage
backward forward backward forward
No No No No
No No No Yes
No Yes No No
No Yes No Yes
Yes No No Yes
The signal P S I G : T r i p s i g n a l is generated without delay after the DC loop is

closed again with the general starting condition present and the status signal for a closed
DC loop was issued to the binary signal input labeled P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T .
Delayed by the release time set at P S I G : R e l e a s e t . s e n d P S x the DC loop is
closed again after the general starting condition has dropped out.
When protective signaling is not ready the DC loop is open when the operating mode is
set to 'Transm. rel. make con.' and it is closed when the operating mode is set to
'Transm. rel. break con.'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-227

3 Operation
(continued)
PSIG: Receive EXT PSIG: Receive

[ 036 048 ] (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
PSIG: Tripping
PSIG: Ready C time PSx
[ 037 027 ] [ * ]
MAIN: General Parameter PSIG: Tripping PSIG: Direc.

starting time PSx dependence PSx
[ 040 000 ]
Set 1 015 011 015 001
Set 2 024 003 015 115
Set 3 024 063 015 116
PSIG: Direc. Set 4 025 023 015 117
dependence PSx
[ * ] Parameter PSIG: Release t. PSIG: DC loop
send PSx op. mode PSx
Set 1 015 002 015 012
1 Set 2 024 001 024 051
Set 3 024 061 025 011
2
Set 4 025 021 025 071
3
4
PSIG: Trip signal
1: Without [ 038 007 ]
2: Phase curr. system
3: Residual curr.system
4: Phase/resid.c.system
SCDD: Fault P
forward
[ 036 018 ]
SCDD: Fault P
backward
[ 036 019 ]
SCDD: Ground
fault forward
[ 040 037 ]
SCDD: Ground
fault backw.
[ 040 038 ]
PSIG: Release t.
send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: Send
(signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: Send
(transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
PSIG: Test
telecom. USER
[ 015 009 ] PSIG: DC loop
op. mode PSx
[ * ]
0
1 1
0: don't execute 2
1: execute 1: Transm.rel.break con
2: Transm.rel.make con.
PSIG: Test
telecom. chann.
[ 034 016 ]
PSIG: Test
telecom. EXT
[ 036 038 ]
19Z6423 A_EN
3-155 Protective signaling logic
3-228 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring and testing the

DC loop for PSIG
The pilot wires are monitored for broken wire. If during a faultless operation, e.g. with no
general starting condition present, there is no signal received from the DC loop after the
set release time period for the transmit relay (+ 600 ms) has elapsed, then the signal
P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y is issued (see figure 3-156). A transmission fault leads to
a blocking of the protective signaling function.
In order to test the DC loop the communications link may be broken by setting the
parameter at P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R to 'execute'.
3-156 Protective signaling transmission fault
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-229

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC)
Under certain conditions the automatic reclosure control function (ARC) will cause a line
section to be cleared and then, when the dead time has elapsed, automatic reclosure of
the line section will occur.
Figure 3-157 shows an example for the usual sequence of a failed high-speed reclosure
(HSR) followed by a subsequent successful time-delay reclosure (TDR).
3-230 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-157 Example for an ARC sequence
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-231

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC operating modes

The ARC function available in the P139 offers the possibility of triggering starting times
with different starting signals. Once the starting times have elapsed, a trip signal is
generated. Multiple reclosures are possible with the ARC function available in the P139.
When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin
with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR,
then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delay reclosure (TDR).
Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set
accordingly.
3-158 Setting the operating mode of the ARC function.
3-232 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the

ARC function
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets)

via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated, the
Auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled by setting parameters or
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary
signal inputs have equal status. If only the A R C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned
to a binary signal input, then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter A R C : D i s a b l e E X T has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-233

3 Operation
(continued)
3-159 Enabling or disabling auto-reclosure control
3-234 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocking
Under certain conditions the ARC will be blocked and the signal A R C : B l o c k e d will
be issued, provided that one of the following conditions is met:
A blocking signal is present because of a manual close.

An external signal A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is present.
ARC is disabled.
Protection is disabled (off).
A manual trip command is issued via setting parameter.
When all blocking conditions have been removed, the blocking time is started. When the
blocking time has elapsed, ARC blocking is canceled.
3-160 ARC blocking
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-235

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready to operate

An ARC cycle can only start if the ARC is ready. For this purpose the following
conditions need to be met simultaneously:
Protection is activated (on).

ARC is not blocked.
The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening &
closing drive is ready).
The circuit breaker contacts must be in closed position (closed position scanning is
optional).
No ARC cycle is running.
3-161 ARC ready to operate
3-236 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping times
When protection functions operating with auto-reclosure control are started, the tripping
times (HSR or TDR) are started together with the operative time. If the tripping time has
elapsed during an active ARC cycle while the operative time is still running, a trip signal
is issued. The HSR or TDR trip time having caused the trip signal also determines which
dead time (HSR or TDR) is to be triggered. Once the dead time commences, all tripping
times already triggered and the operative time will be terminated.
The beginning of the following starts or input signals trigger the tripping times provided
that the starting conditions are met and the respective tripping times are not blocked.
If short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) is enabled, then some of the starting
signals are directional:
General starting
DTOC Starting I> (directional)
DTOC Starting I>> (directional)
DTOC Starting I>>>
DTOC Starting IN> (directional)
DTOC Starting IN>> (directional)
DTOC Starting IN>>>
IDMT Starting Iref,P> (directional)
IDMT Starting Iref,N> (directional)
IDMT starting Iref,neg>
Start by programmable logic
Ground fault direction determination by steady-state values (GFDSS) has operated
and detected one of the following faults:
GFDSS starting fault 'forward/LS'
GFDSS starting Y(N)>
GFDSS starting fault 'forward/LS' or GFDSS starting Y(N)>
If - in the operating mode HSR/TDR permitted - only one of the starting conditions listed
above applies, then the first trip signal is always generated by the HSR trip time stage,
regardless of the duration of the HSR or TDR tripping time setting. HSR precedes TDR.
If more than one starting is present then the trip signal will be issued after the HSR
tripping time that has elapsed first. As an exception, a TDR will be triggered first after
having elapsed first, if the associated HSR tripping time is set to Blocked.
If the trip signal has been generated by a TDR tripping time stage, then no HSR will be
initiated within the same ARC cycle.
The ARC trip signal must be included in the ‘m out of n’ selection of the trip commands.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-237

3 Operation
(continued)
3-162 Tripping time, part 1
3-238 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-239

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC: HSRtrip.t.
Iref,P PSx
[ * ]
IDMT: ARC ARC: HSR trip

Starting Iref,P> t. elapsed
304 367 303 152
ARC: HSRtrip.t.
Iref,N PSx
[ * ]
IDMT: ARC
Starting Iref,N>
304 368
ARC: HSRtr.t.
Iref,neg
PSx
[ * ]
IDMT: Starting
Iref,neg>
[ 040 107 ]
ARC: Block/
reset HSR
303 104
ARC: TDRtrip.t.
Iref,P PSx
[ * ]
ARC: TDR trip

t. elapsed
303 153
ARC: TDRtrip.t.
Iref,N PSx
[ * ]
ARC: TDRtr.t.
Iref,neg
PSx
[ * ]
AWE: Block/
reset TDR
303 105
Parameter ARC: HSRtrip.t. ARC: HSRtrip.t. ARC: HSRtr.t. ARC: TDRtrip.t. ARC: TDRtrip.t. ARC: TDRtr.t.
Iref,P PSx Iref,N PSx Iref,negPSx Iref,P PSx Iref,N PSx Iref,negPSx
set 1 015 094 015 096 015 034 015 095 015 097 015 035
set 2 024 106 024 107 024 108 024 118 024 119 024 120
set 3 024 156 024 157 024 158 024 168 024 169 024 170
set 4 025 106 025 107 025 108 025 118 025 119 025 120
12Z6230 A_EN
3-164 Tripping time, part 3 (In this figure IDMT represents IDMT1)
3-240 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-241

3 Operation
(continued)
3-242 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking and resetting the

tripping times
Except by the setting value Blocked the HSR tripping time stages are blocked or reset by
one of the following conditions:
ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to Test HSR only permitted.

I>>> starting is present and A R C : H S R b l o c k i n g b y I > > > P S x has been
selected.
ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to "TDR only permitted".
An HSR is not permitted because an HSR or TDR has already occurred within the
current ARC cycle.
The ARC is blocked.
Except by the setting value Blocked the TDR tripping time stages are blocked or reset by
one of the following conditions:
ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to Test HSR only permitted.

I>>> starting is present and A R C : T D R b l o c k i n g b y I > > > P S x has been
selected.
The ARC is blocked.
The number of permitted TDRs has been reached and thus no further TDRs are
permitted.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-243

3 Operation
(continued)
3-168 Blocking and resetting the tripping time stages
ARC cycle
An ARC cycle begins, provided that the starting condition is met, with the presence of a
relevant starting option (DTOC/IDMT starting, starting via programmable logic, GFDSS,
or start of a test HSR), as long as the signal A R C : R e a d y is present at this time.
As the ARC cycle proceeds, the signal A R C : R e a d y is no longer taken into account.
An ARC cycle is running if the ARC is not blocked and one of the following conditions is
met:
The operative time is running.

A dead time is running.
The reclaim time is running.
3-244 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking the DTOC or

IDMT protection function,
the GFDSS function, and
programmable logic
If the ARC is ready, it will block the trip signals of DTOC and IDMT1 and IDMT2
protection as well as the GFDSS function and the programmable logic via the signal
A R C : B l o c k i n g t r i p . ARC permits the generation of a trip command by the other
protection functions if one of the following conditions is met:
A R C c y c l e r u n n i n g is not applicable, and ARC is not ready.

The final reclaim time is running.
Only an HSR test is permitted ("Test HSR only permit").
ARC is blocked.
The operative time is running during a running tripping time.
A relevant starting type begins while a dead time is running.
One or more starts do not trigger a tripping time stage because the relevant tripping
time stages are disabled (t set to "Blocked"). If a tripping time stage is started in this
condition by an additional starting and as long as no final trip command has been
issued, the ARC again generates a trip command.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-245

3 Operation
(continued)
Example of programmable
logic in the ARC
This example (see figure ) illustrates the possible interconnection and the binary signal
output for starting the tripping time stage via a binary signal input.
By using the programmable logic a binary signal input with serial operate delay and an
AND element is implemented. The function AR C : Bl o c k i n g tr i p "NOT" has been
assigned to the second input on this AND element. The output from the AND element
must be included in the configuration of the ‘m out of n’ selection for the general trip
command. The tripping time can be started by the output signal
ARC: Start by logic.
For this example the following list parameters need to be set from the local control panel
(see the section on ‘Setting a List Parameter’ in the chapter entitled ‘Local Control’).
List Parameter
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. OR e.g. LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
output 1 (address 034 003)
(address 030 000)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. OR LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
output 2 (address 042 033)
AND NOT ARC: Blocking trip
(address 042 000)
In general, any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to start the
ARC tripping time.
One of the options offered by the programmable logic is the triggering of the ARC by an
external protection device.
3-246 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-169 Example of programmable logic in the ARC
General control functions

The entire ARC sequence is monitored and controlled by a sequence control function.
While the ASC function is enabled, reclosure requires a close enable by the ASC
function, which implements a check of the synchronism conditions.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-247

3 Operation
(continued)
3-170 ARC sequence control. (In this figure IDMT represents IDMT1.)
3-248 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)
If the starting conditions are met then any ARC-relevant protection startings will trigger
an ARC cycle. The startings set off the associated tripping time stages and the
operative time. If an HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the
signal A R C : T r i p s i g n a l is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the
function assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. With the release
of the starting, the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. If there
is no starting during the dead time, a reclosure command is issued once the dead time
has elapsed. The reclaim time is started simultaneously. If during the reclaim time there
is no starting with trip command, the signal ARC: R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l is issued
and the ARC cycle is terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed.
If the HSR does not succeed and another starting occurs then a TDR is started if at least
one TDR is permitted. If TDR after HSR is not permitted then the current reclaim time
will be the last reclaim time of the ARC cycle. If the last reclaim time has elapsed and
another starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. Instead the
signal AR C : Bl o c k i n g tr i p is set to a logic value of ‘0’ and a trip by other protection
functions is enabled. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it will be
regarded as a final trip. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has
elapsed.
When the signal A R C : C y c l e r u n n i n g appears, the signal

A R C : S i g . i n t e r r . C B t r i p . (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued and it is reset
after the final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle, once the close command pulse time
has elapsed. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal A R C : B l o c k e d
appears during an ARC cycle.
If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out, the last reclaim time will
be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled.
During the dead time, the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings
occur. If this is the case, the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection
trip signals is cancelled.
While the ASC function is enabled, the procedures described in the following section
"Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions" are also applicable.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-249

3 Operation
(continued)
3-171 HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC disabled – see also next section "Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions")
3-250 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.2 Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions
Figure shows the joint operation of the ARC and ASC functions, illustrated for a high-
speed reclosure (HSR).
an ARC cycle. The startings set off the associated tripping time stages and the
operative time. If a HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal
A R C : T r i p s i g n a l is issued, and this signal can lead to a trip command if the
function assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. With the release
of the starting, the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. After the
dead time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to
determine whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the
ASC operative time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a close
command is issued immediately.
Moreover, the reclaim time is started. If during the reclaim time there is no starting with
trip command, the signal ARC: R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l is issued and the ARC
cycle is terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed.
If the ASC function decides against a reclosure then the reclaim time is started and the
ARC cycle is completed after the reclaim time has elapsed.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-251

3 Operation
(continued)
3-172 HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC enabled)
3-252 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Test HSR
A test HSR can only be triggered when the ARC is ready to operate and if the operating
mode has been set to Test HSR only permit. In this operating mode, the blocking of the
trip signals from the DTOC, IDMT and other protection functions is cancelled so that any
system fault can be properly cleared.
Once a test HSR has been triggered, a trip signal of defined duration is issued.
The subsequent sequence corresponds to a successful HSR (open and reclose
command when the HSR dead time has elapsed). Once the close command pulse time
has elapsed, further triggering during the reclaim time does not result in a further HSR.
A test HSR can be triggered either via setting parameter or via a binary signal input and
adds an increment to the A R C : N u m b e r H S R counter.
Each ‘Test HSR’ request that does not result in a test HSR generates the signal
ARC: Reject test HSR.
3-173 Test HSR
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-253

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.3 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR)
Multiple reclosures using TDRs are possible if the operating mode is set accordingly. A
TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the
operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is only possible if the setting for
A R C : N o . o f p e r m i t . T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero.
the associated tripping times. The operative time is started simultaneously. If a TDR
tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal A R C : T r i p s i g n a l
is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function assignment for the trip
commands is configured appropriately. With the release of the starting, the operative
time is terminated and the TDR dead time begins. If there is no starting during the dead
time, a reclosure command is issued once the dead time has elapsed. The reclaim time
is started simultaneously. If no further TDR is permitted during the current ARC cycle
then this will be the last reclaim time. If the last reclaim time has elapsed and another
starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. Instead the signal
A R C : B l o c k i n g t r i p is set to a logic value of ‘0’ and a final trip by other protection
functions is enabled. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it will be
regarded as a final trip. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has
elapsed. If during the last reclaim time there is no starting with trip command, the signal
A R C : R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l will be issued.
If there is a new starting during the reclaim time and at least one TDR is still permitted
then the reclaim time is terminated and another trip is issued when the tripping time has
elapsed. Once the dead time has elapsed, a further reclosure command is issued.
When the signal A R C : C y c l e r u n n i n g appears, the signal

A R C : S i g . i n t e r r . C B t r i p (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued automatically
and it is reset after the final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle, once the close
command pulse time has elapsed. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal
A R C : B l o c k e d appears during an ARC cycle.
If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out, the last reclaim time will
be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled.
During the dead time, the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings
occur. If this is the case, the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection
trip signals is cancelled.
While the ASC function is enabled, the procedures described in the previous section
"Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions" are also applicable.
3-254 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-174 Signal sequence of a failed HSR followed by a failed TDR and then by a final successful TDR (example shown is with ASC disabled)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-255

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.4 ARC Counters
The following events are counted:
Number of high-speed reclosures (HSR) that have been carried out

Number of time-delay reclosures (TDR) that have been carried out.
The associated counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
ARC: Number HSR

ARC: (Re)close + A-B-C
signal HSR [ 004 007 ]
[ 037 007 ] R
ARC: (Re)close + ARC: Number TDR
signal TDR [ 004 008 ]
[ 037 006 ] R
ARC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
1 ≥1
reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
12Z6147 A_EN
3-175 ARC counters
3.27.5 Counter for Number of CB Operations
The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time
period) may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x o p e r . c a p . Associated with
this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . to which the
maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge
of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at

M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation.
Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals
D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .
The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value

of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality, in
particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.e.
M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.
3-256 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before
a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system sections that
are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system sections is de-
energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages – generally the voltages on
the line and busbar sides – are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and
voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the
system sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side).
The measurement loop must be set to correspond to the reference voltage connection
(A S C : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct measuring voltage is
selected for the comparison. In the connection example shown in the section entitled
'Conditioning the Measured Variables' (chapter 3 / MAIN), the busbar voltage VA-B is the
reference voltage.
3-176 Selecting the measurement loop
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-257

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

ASC function
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets)

via A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ASC can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have
equal status. If only the A S C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a binary signal
input, then ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a
negative edge. If only the A S C : D i s a b l e E X T function has been assigned to a
binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued.
3-258 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: General enable

USER
No
Yes
ASC: Enable
PSx
ASC: Enabled
No
Yes
INP: Fct. assignm.

U xxx
Address
Address
ASC: Enabled
ASC: Enable EXT
ASC: Enable USER
don't execute
execute
ASC: Disable EXT
ASC: Disable USER
don't execute
execute
ASC: Enable PSx

set
set
set
set
19Z5232A_EN
3-177 Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-259

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC readiness and

blocking
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.
Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer M.c.b. was tripped or by an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can specify whether closing or
reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC
function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delay
reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.
3-260 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-178 ASC readiness and blocking
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-261

3 Operation
(continued)
Close request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, via setting parameters, from an
appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ), or via a
close request from the control function. Close requests via a setting parameter, the
binary signal input or the control function are only accepted if no ARC cycle is running.
3-179 Close request
3-262 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is issued
before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued. Otherwise
an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-180 Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-263

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC operating modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting (see
Figure 3-182). The following operating mode settings are possible:
Voltage-checked
Sync.-checked
Voltage/synchronism-checked
Voltage-checked
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked
close enable without affecting the former. For this purpose the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to determine whether they exceed
or fall below the set threshold values (A S C : V > v o l t . c h e c k and
A S C : V < v o l t . c h e c k ). Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage
check, all three phase-to-ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in
order to meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding
to the set operating mode for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met, then the
close enable is issued after the set minimum time has elapsed
(A S C : t m i n v o l t . c h e c k ). The following operating modes for voltage checking can
be selected separately for each parameter subset:
Vref but not V

V but not Vref
Not V and not Vref
Not V or not Vref
3-264 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled
ASC: Active
ASC: Operating mode

PSx
volt. check
ASC: V> volt.check
PSx
volt./
sync. check
V A-G VA G
VB-G VB G
VC-G VC G
ASC: V< volt. check

PSx
VA G
VB G
VC G
ASC: tmin volt.

check PSx
ASC: Meas. loop ASC: Op.mode volt.
selected PG chk.PSx
V V
not V & Vref
V & not Vref
not V & not Vref
not V or not Vref
ASC: Close enable,

volt.ch
ASC: Close enable

ASC: Close enable,
sync.ch
ASC: Op.mode ASC: V> volt. ASC: V< volt. ASC: tmin volt.
volt.chk.PSx check PSx check PSx check PSX
set
set
set
set
19Z5233A_EN
3-181 Voltage-checked close enable
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-265

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronism-checked
Before a close enable is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism.
Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
The three phase voltage and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value (A S C : V > s y n c . c h e c k ) . When with a three-phase voltage the setting of
M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is 'Low-imped. grounding' both the phase-to-ground
and the phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is "Isol./res.w.start.(or
w/o st.)PG" only the phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must
not exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a V m a x ).
The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a f m a x ).
The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a p h i m a x ). In these comparisons
the set offset angle A S C : P h i o f f s e t is taken into account.
If these conditions are met for at least the set time A S C : t m i n s y n c . c h e c k , then a
close enable is issued. The ASC operating time for determination of differences in
voltage, angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored
as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In the event of
another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.
3-266 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-182 Synchronism-checked close enable
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-267

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage/synchronism-
checked
If this setting has been selected, then the close enable is issued if the conditions for
voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-183 ASC sequence control
3-268 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the ASC function

For test purposes a close request can be issued via a setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Figure 3-184). In this case no close
command is issued and it is not counted.
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request.
The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and
A S C : C l o s e e n a b l e is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no network
synchronism is registered, a 100 ms signal A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n is issued.
Close Enable Close Reject
ASC: Cycle running ASC: Cycle running
ASC: gen. ASC: gen.

Close request Close request
ASC: Operat.time ASC: Operat.time

running running
ASC: Close enable ASC: Close

rejection
2 2 2
ASC: Close ASC: Close enable

rejection
2
ASC: >
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5230A_EN
3-184 ASC sequence during testing
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-269

3 Operation
(continued)
Integrating the ASC

function into the control
and monitoring of
switchgear units
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible. This
requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that the ASC
system integration is set to Autom. synchr. control. If the control function issues a close
request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires the A S C : C l o s e
e n a b l e (see ‘Issue of the switching commands’ in Section ‘Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units’.
However if A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to Autom. synchron. checkl ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously
updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations have been set
accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may make decisions as to
which external device is to be given a switching command.
3-185 Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units
3-270 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values obtained

by ASC
The following measured values are obtained and calculated during an ASC cycle and
are transmitted during a set cycle time:
Voltage from the reference voltage channel

Voltage from the selected measuring loop
Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
Difference in phase angles
Frequency difference
Outside of the ASC cycle the measured values have the status of "not measured".
ASC: Transm.cycle,
meas.v.
101 212
ASC: Cycle
running
038 019
ASC: Voltage
Vref
004 087
ASC: Volt. sel.

meas.loop
004 088
ASC: Volt. magnit.

diff.
004 091
ASC: Angle
difference
004 089
ASC: Frequ.
difference
004 090
19Z5231A_EN
3-186 Measured values obtained by ASC
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-271

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
Number of reclosures after a close request via a setting parameter or an

appropriately configured binary signal input.
Number of close requests
Number of close rejections
The counters can be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed) or as
a group.
ASC: Manual ASC: No. RC aft.

close request >S 1 1 & + man.clos
305 000 [ 004 009 ]
>R 1 R
MAIN: Close
command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: Gen. close ASC: No. close
request + requests
306 012 [ 009 033 ]
R
ASC: Close ASC: No. close
rejection + rejections
[ 037 086 ] [ 009 034 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC: Reset
counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0: don’t execute
1: execute
47Z1377A_EN
3-187 ASC counters
3-272 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values

(Function Group GFDSS)
Ground fault direction determination is carried out by evaluating the neutral-point

displacement voltage and the residual current using the steady-state power evaluation
mode or, as an alternative, the admittance evaluation mode. Also possible is a steady-
state current evaluation only. In this case only the filtered residual current is used as a
criterion for a ground fault. Ground fault direction determination is then not possible.
By using the ARC function it is possible to intervene in the functional sequence of ground
fault direction determination using steady-state values.
Enable/disable the ground

fault direction
determination using
steady-state values
The ground fault direction determination using steady-state values can be disabled or
enabled via setting parameters. Switching over to 'Steady-state current' evaluation is
made by setting parameters or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
Ground fault direction

determination using
steady-state values is
ready
A ready signal is issued for the evaluation mode selected if the protection and the
ground fault direction determination using steady-state values are enabled.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-273

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: no
1: yes
GFDSS: General
enable USER
[ 016 060 ]
GFDSS: Enabled
& [ 042 096 ]
0
1
0: no
1: yes
&
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
GFDSS: Operating
mode
[ 016 090 ]
1
2
3
1: Steady-state power
2: Steady-state current
3: Steady-state admitt.
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
& ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.) GFDSS: GF (pow.)
eval. EXT not ready
[ 038 020 ] [ 038 027 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
& ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
evaluat.
[ 039 071 ]
GFDSS: Admit-
& tance ready
[ 038 167 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Enable GFDSS: Admit-

PSx tance not ready
[ 038 168 ]
set 1 001 050
set 2 001 051
set 3 001 052
set 4 001 053
12Z6243 A_EN
3-188 Enable/disable the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values
3-274 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)

For the conditioning of measured variables the P139 is fitted with integrated
transformers. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement
voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 transformer for steady-state power
evaluation. The current transformer has been especially designed for this application so
that it will perform with a very small phase-angle error.
EWATT: Eval-
uation VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 GFDSS: VN-G
304 150
VC-G
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter EWATT: Eval-

uation VNG PSx
set 1 016 083
set 2 001 011
set 3 001 012
set 4 001 013
12Z6241 A_EN
3-189 Selecting the measuring voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-275

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation
The ground fault direction determination using steady-state values requires the neutral-
point displacement voltage and the residual current values to be able to determine a
ground fault direction. The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these
values by using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation if the time
stage G F D S S : t V N G > has been set to a time period equal to or greater than 60 ms.
This will result in the suppression of typical ripple-control frequencies in addition to all
integer-frequency harmonics. If the time stage was set to a time period less than 60 ms
only one period will be used for filtering.
The measurement is enabled when the time period set at G F D S S : t V N G > and
which was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Dependent on the operating mode selected
(e.g. 'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power
(G F D S S : O p . m o d e G F p o w . / a d m 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power
(G F D S S : O p . m o d e G F p o w . / a d m 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the
direction. Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
G F D S S : M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . When the connection 'Standard' has been made
a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the
busbar side will issue the decision 'BS'.
3-276 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: GF (pow.) GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

ready C PSx PSx
[ 038 026 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: General
starting
306 539 t 0
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151
GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P meas.) PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: VN-G GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1
2 2
1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard
2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite
1: cos phi circuit
2: sin phi circuit
C C
GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
GFDSS: P
304 155
GFDSS: Q
304 156
Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 004
12Z6240 A_EN
3-190 Direction determination with the operating mode 'Steady-state power'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-277

3 Operation
(continued)
cos phi circuit
The directional decision is not enabled until the active component of the residual current
exceeds the set threshold and the phase displacement between residual current and
neutral-point displacement voltage is smaller than the set sector angle. The sector angle
makes it possible to extend the "dead zone" to take into account the expected phase-
angle errors of the measured variables. These settings make it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-191.
Output of the direction decisions is operate- and reset-delayed.
The trip signal 'forward directional' issued by the ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values (GFDSS) is blocked by the auto-reclosing control function
(ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-191 Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, operating mode 'cos phi circuit'
3-278 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
sin phi circuit

The direction decision is enabled if the reactive component of the residual current has
exceeded the set threshold operate value. This setting makes it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-192.
The trip signal 'forward directional' issued by the ground fault direction determination
3-192 Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, operating mode 'sin phi circuit'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-279

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: GF
(pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx GFDSS: IN,act>/
[ * ] C reac> LS PSx
1, 3, 4 [ * ]
1: cos phi circuit
2, 3, 4
2: sin phi circuit
GFDSS: P
304 155
IN,act 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG GFDSS: IN,act>/
C reac> BS PSx
filtered [ * ]
304 152
GFDSS: Q
304 156
IN,react 2, 4
GFDSS: Curr.
4 IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ]
3
GFDSS: Current
1 ... 2 IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ]
GFDSS: Direction
LS
304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
ARC: Blocking
trip
[ 042 000 ]
GFDSS: Starting
forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS: Trip
signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]
GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Sector
C angle LS PSx GFDSS: Direct.
[ * ] forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
< Sector angle LS

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx GFDSS: Release
[ * ] [ * ] delay BS PSx
C GFDSS: Sector
angle BS PSx
[ * ] GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
< Sector angle BS
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS: Starting
backw. /BS
[ 009 041 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: Sector GFDSS: IN,act>/ GFDSS: IN,act>/
pow./adm PSx angle LS PSx angle BS PSx reac> LS PSx reac> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 065 016 068 016 064 016 067
set 2 000 236 000 242 000 248 000 239 000 251
set 3 000 237 000 243 000 249 000 240 000 252
set 4 000 238 000 244 000 250 000 241 000 253
Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
12Z6242 A_EN
3-193 Output of the direction decisions with the operating mode 'steady-state power'
3-280 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation
The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from the residual current value by
using a Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for evaluation. If the residual current
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay time period has elapsed.
GFDSS:
Admittance ready
[ 038 167 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GF GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release

(curr.) ready C (I meas. PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
[ 038 028 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ] GFDSS: Ground
MAIN: General fault (curr.)
starting [ 009 038 ]
306 539
t 0 0 t
IN
GFDSS: Op. delay

IN elapsed
304 157
GFDSS: IN>
triggered
304 158
GFDSS: IN
filtered
304 159
GFDSS: Curr. IN
filt. p.u.
[ 004 047 ]
Parameter GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: IN> GFDSS:Operate GFDSS: Release

(I meas. PSx PSx delay IN PSx delay IN PSx
set 1 016 092 016 093 016 094 016 095
set 2 001 047 001 017 001 020 001 023
set 3 001 048 001 018 001 021 001 024
set 4 001 049 001 019 001 022 001 025
12Z6244A_EN
3-194 Evaluating residual current
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-281

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting ground faults

The number of ground faults is counted. The counter may be reset either individually or
together with other counters.
GFDSS: Op. delay +

IN elapsed GFDSS: No. GF
304 157 (curr. meas)
R [ 009 003 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1
0: don't execute
MAIN: General 1: execute
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
Counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z61BRB_EN
3-195 Counting ground faults
3-282 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.3 Steady-state admitt.
To determine a ground fault direction the steady-state admittance evaluation requires the
neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual current values. The frequency
provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by using a Fourier analysis.
The measurement is enabled when the time period set at G F D S S : t V N G > and
which was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Dependent on the operating mode selected
(e.g. 'cos phi circuit' or 'sin phi circuit') the sign of the active power
(G F D S S : O p . m o d e G F p o w . / a d m 'cos phi circuit') or of the reactive power
(G F D S S : O p . m o d e G F p o w . / a d m 'sin phi circuit') is used to determine the
direction. Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
G F D S S : M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . When the connection 'Standard' has been made
a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the
busbar side will issue the decision 'BS'. Phase-angle errors of the system transformers
can be compensated with the setting at G F D S S : C o r r e c t i o n a n g l e .
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-283

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: tVNG>

starting C PSx PSx
306 539
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ] t 80 ms
GFDSS: Grd.
fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS: VNG>
triggered
304 151
GFDSS: f/fnom
C (P meas.) PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS: VN-G GFDSS: VNG

304 150 filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Meas.

pow./adm PSx direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
IN
1 1
2 2
1: cos phi circuit 1: Standard
2: sin phi circuit 2: Opposite
GFDSS: Correction
C angle PSx
[ * ]
C C
GFDSS: Direction
LS
Q 304 153
GFDSS: Direction
BS
304 154
GFDSS: P
304 155
GFDSS: Q
304 156
Parameter GFDSS: VNG> GFDSS: f/fnom GFDSS: tVNG> GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: Correction GFDSS: Meas.
PSx (P meas.) PSx PSx pow./adm PSx angle PSx direction PSx
set 1 016 062 016 091 016 061 016 063 016 110 016 070
set 2 000 233 001 044 000 230 000 236 001 026 001 002
set 3 000 234 001 045 000 231 000 237 001 027 001 003
set 4 000 235 001 046 000 232 000 238 001 028 001 004
12Z6245 B_EN
3-196 Direction determination with the operating mode 'Steady-state admittance'
3-284 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
cos phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (conductance G(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-197.
The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
3-197 Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance, operating mode 'cos phi circuit'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-285

3 Operation
(continued)
sin phi circuit

Direction determination is enabled when the conductance value (susceptance B(N)) on
the ground return exceeds the set threshold. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-198.
The trip signal in forward direction issued by the ground fault direction determination
3-198 Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance, operating mode 'sin phi circuit'
3-286 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
GFDSS: Admittance
ready
[ 038 167 ]
C GFDSS: G(N)> /
B(N)> LS PSx
GFDSS: Direction [ * ]
LS
304 153
GFDSS: Direction GFDSS: Starting

BS forward/LS
304 154 [ 009 040 ]
GFDSS: Op.m.GF
pow./adm PSx
[ * ]
1, 3, 4, 5 GFDSS: G(N)> /
1: cos phi circuit C B(N)> BS PSx
[ * ]
2, 3, 4, 5
2: sin phi circuit
GFDSS: Starting
GFDSS: P backw. /BS
304 155 [ 009 041 ]
G(N) 1, 3
GFDSS: VNG
filtered
304 152
GFDSS: Q
304 156
B(N) 2, 4
Y(N) 5
GFDSS: Admitt.
Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ]
5 GFDSS: Conduct.
G(N) p.u.
4 [ 004 192 ]
GFDSS: Suscept.
3 B(N) p.u.
[ 004 193 ]
1 ... 2
ARC: Blocking GFDSS: Trip
trip signal forw./LS
[ 042 000 ] [ 009 031 ]

delay LS PSx delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]

delay BS PSx delay BS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Direct.
backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: GF (curr.)
not ready
[ 038 029 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Op.m.GF GFDSS: G(N)> / GFDSS: G(N)> /

pow./adm PSx B(N)> LS PSx B(N)> BS PSx
set 1 016 063 016 111 016 112
set 2 000 236 001 029 001 032
set 3 000 237 001 030 001 033
set 4 000 238 001 031 001 034
Parameter GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Operate GFDSS: Release GFDSS: Release

delay LS PSx delay BS PSx delay LS PSx delay BS PSx
set 1 016 066 016 069 016 072 016 073
set 2 000 245 001 044 001 005 001 008
set 3 000 246 001 045 001 006 001 009
set 4 000 247 001 046 001 007 001 010
12Z6246 A_EN
3-199 Output of the direction decisions with the operating mode 'steady-state admittance'
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-287

3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional ground
fault determination
The admittance value from the ground return is used for evaluation. If the admittance
value exceeds the set threshold a ground fault signal is issued after the settable operate
delay time period has elapsed.
The trip signal from the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by the auto-
GFDSS: Oper.delay
Y(N)> elapsed
304 175
GFDSS: Admittance GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper. GFDSS: Rel.

ready C PSx delay Y(N)>PSx delay Y(N)> PSx
[ 038 167 ] [ * ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: General
starting
306 539
t 0 0 t GFDSS: Trip
IN Y(N)>
[ 009 075 ]
GFDSS: GF
(curr.) ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS: GF (pow.)
ready
[ 038 026 ] GFDSS: Trip
signal Y(N)>
trip
[ 042 000 ] GFDSS: Starting
Y(N)>
[ 009 074 ]
Parameter GFDSS: Y(N)> GFDSS: Oper. GFDSS: Rel.

PSx delay Y(N)> PSx delay Y(N)> PSx
set 1 016 113 016 114 016 115
set 2 001 035 001 038 001 041
set 3 001 036 001 039 001 042
set 4 001 037 001 040 001 043
12Z6247 A_EN
3-200 Evaluating admittance
3-288 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and

Admittance Evaluation
The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters may
be reset individually or together with other counters (see section 'Resetting Actions').
GFDSS: No. GF
GFDSS: Oper.delay + admitt. Y(N)
Y(N)> elapsed [ 009 060 ]
304 175
R
GFDSS: Grd. fault GFDSS: No. GF
pow./adm. + power/admitt.
[ 009 037 ] [ 009 002 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
forward/LS + forward/LS
[ 009 035 ] [ 009 000 ]
R
GFDSS: Direct. GFDSS: No. GF
backward/BS + backward/BS
[ 009 036 ] [ 009 001 ]
R
GFDSS: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: General 0: don’t execute
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z6191 B_EN
3-201 Counting ground faults
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-289

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Transient Ground Fault Detection (Function Group TGFD)
By applying the transient ground fault measuring procedure the ground fault direction is
determined by evaluating the neutral-point displacement voltage and the residual
current.
Enable/disable the
transient ground fault
detection function.
The transient ground fault detection function (TGFD) can be disabled or enabled via
setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
The transient ground fault

detection function is ready
A ready signal is issued if the following conditions are met:
The protection is enabled.

The transient ground fault detection function is enabled.
The nominal frequency is set to 50 Hz.
There is no external blocking.
Transient ground fault detection has issued no directional decisions.
Self-monitoring has detected no faults with transient ground fault detection.
3-290 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
TGFD: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
TGFD: General
enable USER
[ 016 040 ]
0 TGFD: Enabled
[ 037 100 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Nominal
frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
50: 50 Hz SFMON: Fcts.not
perm.f.60Hz
60: 60 Hz [ 093 098 ]
TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]
TGFD: Blocking
EXT[ 004 034 ]
TGFD: Direct.
determined
[ 004 030 ]
SFMON: TGFD mon.
triggered
[ 093 094 ]
TGFD: Not ready
[ 037 081 ]
SFMON: Module N TGFD: Hardware

DPR faulty fault
[ 093 090 ] 304 207
SFMON: Module N
RAM faulty
[ 093 091 ]
SFMON: Time-out
module N
[ 093 092 ]
SFMON: Invalid SW
vers. N
[ 093 093 ]
SFMON: DAC faulty
module N Parameter TGFD: Enable
[ 093 095 ] PSx
SFMON: +15V set 1 001 054
faulty mod. N
[ 093 096 ] set 2 001 055
SFMON: -15V set 3 001 056
faulty mod. N set 4 001 057
[ 093 097 ]
12Z6282 A_EN
3-202 Enabling, disabling and readiness of the transient ground fault detection function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-291

3 Operation
(continued)

To condition measured variables VNG and IN the P139 is fitted with integrated
transformers. As an alternative it is possible to use the neutral-point displacement
voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages.
Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
TGFD: M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . A pole reversal of the residual current measuring
circuit through the global setting at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N will in no way
influence direction determination by the transient ground fault detection function.
TGFD: Evaluation
VNG PSx
[ * ]
VN-G 2
1
VA-G
VB-G 1 ... 2 TGFD: VN-G
VC-G 304 200
1: Sum (VA-B-C-G)
2: Measured
Parameter TGFD: Evaluation

VNG PSx
set 1 016 048
set 2 001 058
set 3 001 059
set 4 001 060
12Z6283 A_EN
3-203 Selecting the neutral-point displacement voltage
3-292 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Determining the ground

fault direction
A ground fault direction can only be determined if the TGFD function is ready.
The higher frequency content is filtered from the measured values for residual current
and neutral-point displacement voltage. Settable triggers monitor the amplitudes of the
residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage harmonics as well as the neutral-
point displacement voltage fundamental. To determine the ground fault direction the
P139 will evaluate trigger decisions by the harmonics monitoring function, separately for
the positive and negative half-wave.
The sign of the neutral-point displacement voltage harmonic is determined immediately

after the current harmonic has exceeded the positive or negative threshold value.
Trigger decisions for current and voltage are compared to determine the ground fault
direction where, as a rule, evaluation depends on the connection of the measuring
circuits. Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting at
TGFD: M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . When the connection 'Standard' has been made a
ground fault on the line side will issue the decision 'LS' and a ground fault on the busbar
side will issue the decision 'BS'. The directional decision is enabled after the operate
delay period has elapsed, which follows monitoring of the neutral-point displacement
voltage fundamental.
Furthermore the starting of a current trigger will start a timer stage that, after it has
elapsed, will enable the TGFD function to detect further transient ground faults.
The time period after which a new transient ground fault may be detected is given by the
setting of the operate delay +40 ms.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-293

3 Operation
(continued)
TGFD: Hardware
fault
304 207
TGFD: Ready TGFD: IN,p>

[ 037 080 ] C PSx
[ * ]
IN TGFD: IN,p>
triggered
304 201
pos. peak value

neg. peak value
TGFD: VNG>
PSx TGFD: Operate
[ * ] delay PSx
[ * ]
TGFD: Ground
fault
TGFD: VN-G [ 004 033 ]
304 200
C TGFD: VNG>
(f0) triggered
304 202
TGFD: VNG>
triggered
304 203
pos. peak value

neg. peak value S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
TGFD: Measurem.
direc. PSx
[ * ]
TGFD: Direction
1 LS
304 204
1 TGFD: Direction
2 BS
304 205
2
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Parameter TGFD: IN,p> TGFD: VNG> TGFD: Operate Measurem. direc.

PSx PSx delay PSx PSx
set 1 016 042 016 041 016 044 016 045
set 2 001 064 001 061 001 067 001 073
set 3 001 065 001 062 001 068 001 074
set 4 001 066 001 063 001 069 001 075
12Z62EUA_EN
3-204 Direction determination
3-294 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Directional decisions are issued for the duration of the set buffer time. If buffer time is
set to 0 s directional decisions are issued for as long as the neutral-point displacement
voltage fundamental exceeds the trigger threshold set at T G F D : V N G > .
TGFD: Hardware
fault
304 207
TGFD: Buffer
time PSx
[ * ]
TGFD: Forward /
TGFD: Direction LS
1 [ 004 031 ]
LS R
304 204
TGFD: Backward /
TGFD: Direction 1 BS
BS [ 004 032 ]
304 205 R
TGFD: Reset t = 0 s TGFD: Direct.

signal 100ms 0 determined
304 206 [ 004 030 ]
TGFD: VNG>
(f0) triggered
304 202
S1 1
R1 Parameter TGFD: Buffer
time PSx
S1 1 set 1 016 043
set 2 001 070
R1 set 3 001 071
set 4 001 072
12Z62EVA_EN
3-205 Output of the directional decisions
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-295

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting a directional
decision
While the buffer time is elapsing the directional decisions can be reset from the
integrated local control panel, a setting parameter or through an appropriately configured
binary signal input. Should the buffer time be set to ∞ ("infinity") the directional decision
must be reset so that a new transient ground fault can again be detected.
TGFD: Reset
signals USER
[ 003 009 ]
0
1 ≥1 100 ms TGFD: Signals
reset
0: don't execute [ 004 141 ]
1: execute
TGFD: Reset
signals EXT
[ 004 140 ]
MAIN: General TGFD: Reset

reset USER ≥1 signal
[ 003 002 ] 304 206
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
12Z61EWA_EN
3-206 Resetting directional decisions
Monitoring the measured

variables
TGFD is blocked after 5s if the respective set threshold value is exceeded by the current
or the higher frequency content of the neutral-point displacement voltage in the absence
of a ground fault (that is while the neutral-point displacement voltage fundamental stays
below the set trigger threshold).
5 s 0 SFMON: TGFD mon.

TGFD: IN,p> 30 ms
triggered & triggered
304 201 [ 093 094 ]
TGFD: VNG>
triggered
304 203
TGFD: VNG>(f0)
triggered &
304 202
TGFD: Ready
[ 037 080 ]
MT_RC: Reset
record USER
[ 003 008 ]
1: execute
MT_RC: Reset
record EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z61EXC_EN
3-207 Monitoring the measured variables
3-296 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting transient ground

faults
The number of transient ground faults and directional decisions are counted.
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
TGFD: Ground
fault + TGFD: No. GF
[ 004 033 ] [ 004 015 ]
R
TGFD: Direct. + TGFD: No. GF

forward/LS forward/LS
[ 004 031 ] [ 004 013 ]
R
GFDSS: Backward / + TGFD: No. GF

BS backward/BS
[ 004 032 ] [ 004 014 ]
R
TGFD: Reset
counters USER
[ 003 022 ]
0
1 ≥1
reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
TGFD: Reset
counters EXT
[ 005 246 ]
12Z61EYA_EN
3-208 Counting transient ground faults
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-297

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Motor Protection (Function Group MP)
The P139 features a motor protection function (MP function). This motor protection
function is specifically designed to protect directly switched high-voltage asynchronous
motors with thermally critical rotors. Protection functions specially adapted for this
application are available:
Overload protection including a thermal replica of the motor (complete memory)

Taking into account heat dispersion processes in the rotor after several startups
Separate cooling time constants for running and stopped motors
Monitoring of startup frequency including re-start blocking
Heavy starting logic
Locked rotor protection
Logic function for the operating mode including thermal overload protection (THERM)
Special startup measured values during commissioning
Running Time Meter
The definite-time overcurrent protection stages required for global motor protection
operation as well as the necessary unbalance protection are described in sections
‘DTOC Protection’ and ‘Unbalance Protection (I2>)’, respectively.
3-298 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Enable/disable the motor

protection function
The motor protection function can be enabled or disabled via a parameter setting.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3-209 Enable/disable the motor protection function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-299

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting conditions
The overcurrent stage Iref,P> is used as a starting stage for overload protection. For this
the maximum value of the three phase currents is evaluated. The settable reference
current Iref is used as the reference quantity for the operate value and the tripping time.
When the threshold kP·Iref is exceeded then the current stage operates.
The output signal from the current stage Iref,P> is used as the starting signal.
3-210 Starting conditions
3-300 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.1 Overload Protection
Operating state recognition

The P139 features an operating state recognition function with which the overload
protection function is controlled, e.g. the thermal replica is plotted as precisely as
possible. The possible individual operating states with a directly switched asynchronous
motor are detected via various trigger stages as listed below:
Machine stopped:
If the measured maximum RMS phase current value has dropped below the threshold
of 0.1·Iref the function will decide on 'machine stopped' (signaled by
M P : M a c h i n e s t o p p e d ). No-load currents for asynchronous motors lie
significantly above the current threshold value of 0.1 Iref.
Machine running:
If the measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the threshold of 0.1 Iref
the function will decide on 'machine running' (signaled by
M P : M a c h i n e r u n n i n g ).
Overload range:
For a machine the overload range starts with current values exceeding the maximum
permissible continuous thermal current of the machine. The overload memory will be
incremented if the measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the
threshold value of Iref,P>.
Startup:
The onset of startup in a directly switched asynchronous motor is detected when the
measured maximum RMS phase current value exceeds the threshold value set at
M P : I S t U p > P S x for a minimum time duration period set at M P : t I S t U p > .
The end of a startup process is detected when, after the onset of startup has been
identified, the measured maximum RMS phase current value falls below the threshold
value of 0.6·IStUp> .
Overload memory
The thermal overload protection function featured by the P139 is specifically suited for
protection of high-voltage asynchronous motors with thermally critical rotors, a very
common motor type. For this there is a specific overload memory available that presents
a replica of the protected object’s relative over-temperature based on the coolant
temperature and with a values range from 0 to 100 %. The following values stored in the
overload memory have particular significance within the range of this model:
0%:
The value 0% represents the cold state of a protected object, e.g. it has cooled down
to ambient temperature.
20%:
The value 20% represents the minimum value stored by the overload memory when
the protected object is at operating temperature or after initial startup. A running
machine is always considered as being at operating temperature.
40%:
The value 40% temporarily represents the minimum value stored by the overload
memory after two consecutive startups of the machine.
60%:
The value 60% temporarily represents the minimum value stored by the overload
memory after three consecutive startups of the machine.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-301

3 Operation
(continued)
100%:
The instant when the overload memory reaches the value of 100% (trip threshold) an
overload protection trip will be issued. The hysteresis for a defined release of the trip
signal is 1%.
The overload memory mapping process that results in a replica of the actual thermal
conditions existing in the protected object includes the following operations:
Mapping of heating:
Basically the overload memory is continuously incremented when the maximum
RMS phase current value measured will have exceeded the threshold value of kP Iref
(overload range). The rate of this increase of the storing value depends on the
magnitude of the maximum RMS phase current value and, to a certain extent, on the
selected tripping characteristic (M P : C h a r a c t e r i s t i c P P S x ).
Mapping of heat transfer:

After a startup has been identified and the maximum RMS phase current value has
fallen below the current threshold of 0.6 IStUp> (load range), then the stored value is
continuously and automatically pre-decreased, governed by the settable heat
dispersion time constant M P : T a u a f t e r s t . - u p P S x of the overload memory.
This time constant is used to map the heat transfer in the asynchronous motor from
the copper of the rotor to the rotor’s iron core. This continuous pre-decreasing of the
stored value is carried out linearly up to the minimum value stored after initial startup
(mentioned above) and depending on the count of the startup frequency monitor.
The rate for this pre-decreasing of the stored value is constant and ranges at about
40% of the discharge (τ after startup = 20) within a time duration of 60 s, for example.
Mapping of cooling:
When the measured maximum RMS phase current value has fallen below the current
threshold of IkIref,P> and when the mapping of heat transfer, if applicable, has been
completed, then cooling of the protected object is simulated by a continuous
decreasing of the value stored in the overload memory. If the machine is running,
decreasing of the stored value will be governed by the cooling time constant
M P : T a u m a c h . r u n n i n g P S x and will continue until the minimum loading
state of 20 % is reached. If the machine is stopped, decreasing of the stored value
will be governed by the constant M P : T a u m a c h . s t o p p e d P S x and will
continue until the minimum loading state of 0 % is reached. Decreasing of the stored
value is an exponential function of time. The cooling time duration from an initial
value m0 to an interim value of m(t) can be determined as follows:
m − 0.2
Machine running: t = τ rotating machine ⋅ In 0
m(t ) − 0.2
m0
Machine stopped: t = τ machine stopped ⋅ In
m(t )
3-302 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup frequency
monitoring
The P139 features a startup counter in 'count down' circuit configuration for startup
frequency monitoring. Depending on the setting of M P : P e r m . N o . s t . - u p s P S x ,
the permissible number of consecutive startups is either 'three from cold or two from
warm' or 'two from cold or one from warm'. The counter reading at any given time
indicates the number of consecutive startups that are still permitted. The startup counter
is controlled as follows (see Figure 3-211):
Decrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted):

As the end of a startup is detected, the startup counter is decremented by ' 1 '. When
the counter reading reaches its minimum value of ' 0 ', then the signal
M P : R C b l o c k i n g is issued and can - and indeed should - be configured to an
output relay with which CB closure is blocked.
Incrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted):
When the setting for the permissible number of consecutive startups is 'three from
cold or two from warm' and the machine is running, then the startup counter is
incremented by ' 1 ' if the stored value in the overload memory drops below a
threshold value of 40% or 22%, respectively, in conjunction with 'mapping of cooling'
of the protected object. When the machine is stopped then the startup counter will be
incremented by ' 1 ' if the stored value in the overload memory drops below the
threshold of 40%, 20% or 2%, respectively, in conjunction with 'mapping of cooling' of
the protected object.
When the setting for the permissible number of consecutive startups is 'two from cold
or one from warm' and the machine is running, then the startup counter is
incremented by ' 1 ' if the stored value in the overload memory drops below a
threshold value of 22%, in conjunction with 'mapping of cooling' of the protected
object. When the machine is stopped then the startup counter will be incremented by
' 1 ' if the stored value in the overload memory drops below the threshold of 20% or
2%, respectively, in conjunction with 'mapping of cooling' of the protected object.
The signal M P : R C b l o c k i n g is withdrawn if the stored value in the overload
memory drops below the threshold of 40% (for 'three from cold or two from warm') or
22% (for 'two from cold or one from warm').
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-303

3 Operation
(continued)
3-211 Overload memory and startup counter
Heavy starting logic

The heavy starting application involves a situation in which a machine’s startup time tStUp
exceeds its maximum possible blocking time tE from operating temperature. For this
application the P139 features a specific logic function that can be activated by the
following two settings:
The permissible number of consecutive startups is limited to 'two from cold or one
from warm' (M P : P e r m . N o . s t . - u p s P S x ) ) .
For the permissible startup time tStUp (M P : S t . - u p t i m e t S t U p P S x ), a higher
value is set than for the maximum permissible blocking time tE from operating
temperature (M P : B l o c k i n g t i m e t E P S x ). These two setting values are only
relevant for this particular application; if both settings are identical, they have no
effect on the protective function and the heavy starting logic is not active.
When this logic function has been activated, then the two timer stages tE and tStUp are
triggered at the time when the onset of a startup is detected, corrected by the
discrimination time tStUp >. Once the set time tE has elapsed, the logic function checks to
see whether the machine is actually running. The presence of an external signal - from
an overspeed monitor, for example - serves as the criterion for a running machine.
When a running machine is detected once the set time tE has elapsed, then the stored
value in the overload memory is automatically frozen and tracking is only restarted after
the set startup time tStUp has elapsed. When a locked rotor state is detected after the set
time tE has elapsed, the overload memory is automatically set to a value of 100%, which
leads to an immediate trip decision.
3-304 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping time
characteristics
The P139 user can choose between the following two tripping time characteristics:
Reciprocally squared: t = (1 − m 0 ) ⋅ t 6 I ref ⋅

36
(I I ref )2
Logarithmic: t = (1 − m 0 ) ⋅ t 6 I ref ⋅ 36 ⋅ In
(I I ref )2
(I I ref )2 − 1
where m0 in each case signifies the pre-charging of the overload memory at time t = 0.
With reference to the basic physical model (two-body model), the logarithmic
characteristic in the overload range also takes into account heat transfer to the coolant,
but this heat transfer becomes less significant as the overcurrent increases. At I = 6·Iref,
for example, the tripping time increase is only about 1.4% and is thus below the specified
accuracy of the protection device. For a low overcurrent range, selection of the
logarithmic characteristic provides significantly higher tripping times than selection of the
reciprocally squared characteristic (see Figure 3-212), since the latter characteristic
neglects any heat transfer to the cooling medium in the overload range. The possibility
of choosing between two different tripping time characteristics takes into account the fact
that the user or the application may require a more restrictive or a less restrictive type of
protection. For currents in excess of 10 Iref, the tripping times are limited in the direction
of lower values.
The equation for determining the setting value t6Iref can be derived from the above
equations for tripping time t. For this the startup current Istartup and the maximum
permissible blocking time from cold tblock,cold for the asynchronous motor must be known.
Setting the overload protection function on the basis of the 'cold' tripping time where
m0 = 0 % ('cold curve') is permitted since the conditions for a machine at operating
temperature are automatically taken into account. The conditional equations for the
setting value t6Iref are therefore the following:
Reciprocally squared: t 6 I ref = t block,cold ⋅

(Istartup I ref )2
36
1
Logarithmic: t 6 I ref = t block,cold ⋅
36 ⋅ In
(Istartup I ref )2
(Istartup I ref )2 − 1
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-305

3 Operation
(continued)
3-212 Tripping time characteristics
3-306 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
10000
A
1000
B
C
100
D
E
t in s 10
F
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / Iref
A = logarithmic characteristic D = reciprocally squared
(at t6Iref=100s) characteristic (at t6Iref=10s)
B = reciprocally squared E = logarithmic characteristic

characteristic (at t6Iref=100s) (at t6Iref=1s)
C = logarithmic characteristic F = reciprocally squared

(at t6Iref=10s) characteristic (at t6Iref=1s)
S8Z50D6A
3-213 Tripping characteristic of motor protection (at I/Iref = 2.5 we have m=0.2, at I/Iref > 2.5 we have m=0)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-307

3 Operation
(continued)
Plausibility conditions
A number of plausibility conditions need to be observed in order to ensure that the
protected object is given optimum protection and that unintended tripping is prevented.
When the permissible number of consecutive startups is set for the sequence 'three
from cold or two from warm' and if this set permissible number of consecutive
startups is also intended to be used up during operation, then the heating during
startup in the overload memory (O L _ D A : H e a t . d u r . s t a r t - u p , M P ) must not
exceed 60%. When the calculation is based on a constant startup current
(O L _ D A : S t a r t - u p c u r r e n t ) over the entire startup period, then this will result
in the plausibility condition tstartup = 0.6·tblock,cold. However, since the startup current
decreases during the course of the startup time
(O L _ D A : T i m e t a k e n f . s t a r t u p ), thereby causing the rate of value storing
into the memory to decrease as well, it can therefore be assumed that there is a
corresponding extra margin available.
The setting value for the overload protection function is determined on the basis of
the stated maximum permissible blocking time from the cold state tblock,cold. However,
when a machine at operating temperature is connected, a protective trip during the tE
period must be guaranteed. Therefore, it is always necessary to check and ensure
that the plausibility condition tblock,cold = 1.25·tE is met.
Initialization or plausibility
check of the thermal
replica
Under the following conditions, the P139 will not be able to track the thermal replica of
the protected object, and re-initialization of the thermal replica will be triggered:
The power supply has been interrupted

Protection has been disabled (off)
Motor protection has been disabled (off)
If the above conditions no longer apply, a plausibility check of the thermal replica is
automatically performed prior to cyclic processing.
Operation condition 'machine running' but not 'starting up':

A cyclic plausibility check of the thermal replica is carried out such that if the stored
value in the overload memory is below 20% it is increased to the minimum value of
20% (= machine at operating temperature).
Operation condition 'machine starting up':
Once the end of a startup is detected and the startup counter is decremented as a
result, the stored value in the overload memory is increased, if appropriate, to the
associated minimum value.
For each of the above procedures involving initialization or a plausibility check of the
thermal replica, the stored value status in the overload memory is always coupled to the
reading of the counter M P : S t - u p s s t i l l p e r m i t t . Therefore, if the value in the
overload memory is set automatically, the counter reading is also changed to a plausible
value as a function of the protection setting.
3-308 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.2 Exceptional Overload Protection Cases
Logic function for the

operating mode with
(THERM)
For particular applications, the machine may be operated in the overload range for a
longer period of time. In such cases the motor protection function (MP) is too restrictive.
For such applications the MP and THERM protection functions are combined. The MP
protection function then serves as rotor protection and the THERM protection function as
stator protection.
When M P : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x is set to 'With THERM', the overload memory

will be incremented when the maximum RMS phase current is above the current
threshold set at M P : I S t U p > P S x . If this threshold is not exceeded, the stored
value in the memory after a startup will initially be decremented until the mapping of the
heat transfer from the copper of the rotor to the rotor core is complete. Thereafter, the
value stored in the overload memory will remain constant and the thermal model of the
thermal overload protection function (THERM) will become active. With the onset of
another startup of the asynchronous motor (not the first startup), the thermal model of
the THERM protection function will be temporarily blocked during the startup time.
1000
100
t in s 10
0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / Iref
MP protection: set reciprocally squared characteristic, t6Iref = 1 s
THERM protection: set time constant 1 = 300 s, trip limit value = 100 %
S8Z50F3A
3-214 Tripping characteristic of motor protection with operating mode 'With THERM' ('cold’ characteristic)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-309

3 Operation
(continued)
Change of threshold for

'reclosure permitted'
Depending on the particular application, it is possible to change the overload memory
threshold value assumed for general use, when mapping protected object cooling, to
either 40 % (with 'three startups from cold or two from warm') or 22 % (with 'two startups
from cold or one from warm).' This threshold value set at M P : R C p e r m i t t e d , T <
P S x can differ from these average values so as to be more restrictive or less
restrictive.
3-310 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MP: Therm.repl.
buffer MP
[ 004 018 ]
MP: Therm. repl.
MP p.u.
[ 005 071 ]
MP: Trip signal
[ 040 046 ]
MP: St-ups still
permitt
[ 004 012 ]
MP: St-ups st.
perm.p.u.
[ 005 086 ]
MP: Reclosure
blocked
[ 040 049 ]
MP: Trip by
failed st-up
[ 041 081 ]
12Z6232 A_EN
3-215 Overload protection in motor protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-311

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup counter
The motor startups are counted. The counter can be reset either individually or with
others as a group.
MP: Startup MP: No. of

[ 040 119 ] + start-ups
[ 004 011 ]
R
MAIN: General
reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
12Z6231A_EN
3-216 Startup counters
Resetting the thermal

replica
The thermal replica for motor heating can be reset at the local control panel or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-217 Resetting the thermal replica
3-312 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.3 Low Load Protection
The low load protection function makes it possible to monitor the load torque of a motor
drive for a minimum level. If the operating state recognition function detects a running
machine and the measured maximum RMS phase current falls below the set operate
value for a set time, then an appropriate signal is issued. The signal needs to be
configured to a separate output relay, as it cannot be linked directly to either the general
starting signal or the trip command.
3-218 Overload protection in motor protection
3.31.4 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines
Motors that are operated in hazardous areas must not reach a temperature level in the
case of overload or blocking that would be critical for the existing air-gas mixture.
The P139 is suitable for this type of application, which requires increased-safety
protection (type 'Ex e'.), but the device must be installed outside the hazardous area.
Please follow the setting information in chapter "Settings" ('Protection of Increased-

Safety Machines').
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-313

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.5 Running Time Meter
The P139 features a running time meter M P : N o . o f h o u r s r u n to monitor the

number of hours a protected machine has operated. The time period (in hours) is
measured during which the P139 has detected 'Machine running' (compare with signal
M P : M a c h i n e s t o p p e d ) and this value is compared with the maximum number to
be set at M P : H o u r s _ R u n > . When the time period value measured exceeds the
set value at M P : H o u r s _ R u n > the value for M P : S i g . H o u r s _ R u n > is set to
'Yes'.
Additionally the number of hours run may be defaulted to any desired initial value
ranging from 0 to 65000 hours. This value is defined at
M P : I n i t . v a l . H o u r s _ R u n . The default is initialized by setting
M P : I n i t i a l i z e H o u r s _ R u n to 'Execute'.
3-314 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented. The Thermal
Overload Protection function can be operated together with the Motor Protection
function.
Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
THERM: Enabled
USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
THERM: Enabled
1 & [ 040 068 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM: Enable
PSx
[ * ]
1
0: No
1: Yes PSS: PS x Parameter THERM: Enable
x Enabled PSx
PSS: PS x Enabled 1 036 090 Set 1 072 175
[ * ] 2 036 091 Set 2 073 175
3 036 092 Set 3 074 175
4 036 093 Set 4 075 175
19Z6112 B_EN
3-219 Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-315

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of thermal
overload protection
Thermal overload protection will issue T H E R M : N o t r e a d y if one of the following
conditions applies:
Thermal overload protection is disabled.

Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature
(ambient) acquisition.
Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THERM: Enabled THERM: Not ready

[ 040 068 ] [ 040 035 ]
THERM: Block.
by CTA error
305 200
&
THERM: Therm.
repl.block EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM: Setting
error,block.
[ 039 110 ]
19Z6113 B_EN
3-220 Signal T H E R M : n o t r e a d y
Operating modes
Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
Relative replica
Absolute replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if both
operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload protection is
blocked and an error message is generated by the :
THERM: Setting error,block.
3-316 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Coolant temperature effect

To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition, one of the analog modules Y must
be fitted, either the analog (I/O) module Y with a 20 mA current input and the "PT100"
input or the temperature p/c board (the RTD module) with the temperature sensor inputs
T1 to T9.
One of the 11 measuring inputs listed above is selected for the primary measurement of
coolant temperature by setting the parameter T H E R M : S e l e c t m e a s . i n p u t P S x .
In addition the parameter T H E R M : S e l . b a c k u p t h . P S x is set to select which of
these 11 measuring inputs is to be used as a backup to measure the coolant
temperature when the primary measuring input has failed.
If the parameters T H E R M : S e l e c t m e a s . i n p u t P S x o r
T H E R M : S e l . B a c k u p t h . P S x have been set incorrectly the thermal overload
protection is blocked and an error message is generated by the :
THERM: Setting error,block.
An open measuring circuit, due to a broken wire, is determined by the measured value
inputs (function group MEASI). This will result in the issuance of these signals:
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.
MEASI: PT100 open circuit
M E A S I : T 1 o p e n c i r c . to
MEASI: PT100 T9 open circ.
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the coolant
temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs selected will lead to
the issuance of the signal T H E R M : C T A e r r o r .
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-317

3 Operation
(continued)
The setting of T H E R M : F u n c t . f . C T A f a i l . P S x determines how the thermal

overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee continued
and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed.
Default temperature value:

The coolant temperature set at T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x is applied. The
thermal overload protection is not blocked.
Last measured temperature:
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has occurred
in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature measured before such an
erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal overload protection is not blocked.
The coolant temperature set at T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x is applied if no last
measured values are available because a device warm restart or a parameter subset
selection was carried out.
Blocking:
The signals T H E R M : W a r n i n g and T H E R M : T r i p s i g n a l are reset and
blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the basis of the
measured current alone. All further measurands are issued as "not measured".
All relevant parameters for coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden if none
of the two analog modules Y available have been fitted. The tripping time is calculated
by including the setting for T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x .
Thermal overload
protection operation
without coolant
temperature (ambient)
acquisition
In order to guarantee thermal overload protection, without considering an offset due to a
variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the parameter
T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x to the max coolant temperature permitted.
3-318 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
THERM: Select
meas.inputPSx
[ * ]
0
1
2
n
0: None
1: PT100
2: 20mA input
n = 3 ... 11: Tx
&
MEASI: Open circ. &
PT 100
[ 040 190 ]
MEASI: Overload &
20mA input >1
[ 040 191 ] &
MEASI: Open circ.
20mA input
[ 040 192 ]
MEASI: Open circ.
Tx
[ * ]
THERM: Sel.
backup th. PSx
[ * ]
THERM: With CTA
305 201
0
&
1
2
n
0: None
1: PT100
2: 20mA input
n = 3 ... 11: Ty
THERM: CTA error
& [ 039 111 ]
& SFMON: CTA error
[ 098 034 ]
&
MEASI: Open circ. &

Ty
[ * ]
THERM: CTA error

EXT
[ 038 062 ]
THERM: Funct.
f.CTA fail.PSx
[ * ]
1
2
& THERM: Block.
3 by CTA error
305 200
1: Default temp. value

2: Last meas.temperat.
3: Blocking
MEASI: Tx Ty
Open circ.
T1 040 193 040 193
T2 040 194 040 194
T3 040 195 040 195
T4 040 208 040 208
T5 040 209 040 209
T6 040 218 040 218 Parameter THERM: Select THERM: Sel. THERM: Funct.
meas.inputPSx backup th. PSx f.CTA fail.PSx
T7 040 219 040 219 Set 1 072 177 072 080 076 177
T8 040 252 040 252 Set 2 073 177 073 080 077 177
Set 3 074 177 074 200 078 177
T9 040 253 040 253 Set 4 075 177 075 200 079 177
19Z6110 B_EN
3-221 Coolant temperature monitoring
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-319

3 Operation
(continued)
Relative replica
The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal replica.
In the "Relative replica" operating mode, the following settings have to be made for
thermal overload protection:
The rated operating current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f P S x

The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set at T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p P S x
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters must be

set:
The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object Θmax

THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) Θa,max
THERM: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
Absolute replica
The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the absolute
thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the maximum
coolant temperature.
In the "Absolute replica" operating mode, the following parameters have to be set for
thermal overload protection:
The thermal limit current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f P S x

The limit temperature for tripping Θmax
THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax - Θa,max )
THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
Note: The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θa,max is derived from the
difference between the parameters T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x
and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s . P S x
Tripping characteristics
The maximum RMS phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica as
specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the following
parameters will govern the tripping time:
The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
The accumulated thermal load ∆ϑ0.
The current measured coolant temperature Θa.
3-320 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − ∆ϑ0
t = τ ⋅ In ⎝ I ref ⎠
2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θ − Θ a , max ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − ∆ϑ trip ⋅ ⎜1 − a ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎝ Θ max − Θ a ,max ⎠
The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set to a fixed value of 100 % ( = 1 ) if the operating mode
is "Absolute replica".
θtrip / %
10000
200
1000
110
τ/min
50
100
200
110
10 1000
50
t/min 200
1
110
50 30
0.1
0.01 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.00
I/Iref
D5Z50BE
3-222 Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ∆ϑ0 = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum
permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-321

3 Operation
(continued)
Warning
Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of the
following parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx

Absolute replica: THERM: Warning temp. PSx
Additionally, a pre-trip time limit can be set; when the time left until tripping falls below
this pre-trip limit, a warning will be issued.
Trip
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the following
parameters:
Relative replica: THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx

Absolute replica: THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the thermal
replica has decreased by the value T H E R M : T r i p H y s t e r e s i s P S x , at least for
a fixed time of 5s.
Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is applied with
the set time constant T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x . This element in the
thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of stopped motors.
Note: These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers
and power lines.
Operation together with the

motor protection function
If the thermal overload protection function is operated together with the motor protection
function (function group MP) and if another startup of an asynchronous motor occurs
(other than the first startup), then the thermal overload protection function will be
temporarily blocked during the startup time.
The motor protection will effect the thermal overload protection and not vice versa if both
protection functions are applied simultaneously.
3-322 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
IA COMP THERM: I
IB 305 202
IC
IP,max AR_MV
MAIN: Protection
active & C
306 001
THERM: Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM: Starting
k*Iref>
THERM: Therm.repl. [ 041 108 ]
block EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM: Block. by &
CTA error
305 200 C
MP: Block.
replica THERM THERM: Tim.
304 700 C const.1,>Ibl
[ *
PSx
]
THERM: Iref THERM: Tim.
PSx <0.1 Iref C const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
THERM: Start. THERM: O/T
fact.OL_RC PSx C f.Iref pers. PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
THERM: Warning
k*Iref C[temp. PSx
* ]
THERM: Max.perm.
THERM: Absolute C obj.tmp.PSx
[ * ]
replica THERM: Max.perm.
[ 022 065 ]
C cool.tmpPSx
[ * ] THERM: Within
0 THERM: Rel. O/T pre-trip time
C warning PSx [ 041 109 ]
1
[ * ]
SFMON: Setting
THERM: Rel. O/T error THERM
0: No C[trip PSx [ 098 035 ]
* ]
1: Yes THERM:Setting
THERM: Default error,block.
C CTA
[ *
PSx
] [ 039 110 ]
THERM: Relative THERM: Hysteresis THERM: Warning
replica trip PSx [ 039 025 ]
[ 022 064 ] [ * ]
THERM: Warning THERM: Trip
pre-trip PSx signal
0 [ 039 020 ]
[ * ]
1 THERM: Reclosure
blocked
0: No [ 039 024 ]
1: Yes THERM:Buffer
empty
[ 039 112 ]
THERM: Status
C THERM replica
[ 004 016 ]
R THERM: Object
I/Iref temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM: Coolant
temperature
[ 004 149 ]
THERM: With C THERM: Pre-trip
CTA time left
305 201
[ 004 139 ]
Coolant THERM: Temp. offset
temperature replica
THERM: Reset [ 004 109 ]
replica THERM: Coolant
[ 039 061 ] temp. p.u.
[ 004 178 ]
THERM: Object
temp. p.u.
[ 004 179 ]
THERM: Therm.
replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
Parameter THERM: Iref THERM: Start. THERM: Tim. THERM: Tim. THERM: O/T THERM: Warning THERM: Max.perm.
PSx fact.OL_RC PSx const.1,>Ibl PSx const.2,<Ibl PSx f.Iref pers. PSx temp. PSx obj.tmp.PSx
Set 1 072 179 072 180 072 187 072 188 072 167 072 153 072 182
Set 2 073 179 073 180 073 187 073 188 073 167 073 153 073 182
Set 3 074 179 074 180 074 187 074 188 074 167 074 153 074 182
Set 4 075 179 075 180 075 187 075 188 075 167 075 153 075 182
Parameter THERM: Max.perm. THERM: Rel. O/T THERM: Rel. O/T THERM: Default THERM: Hyst- THERM: Warning
cool.tmpPSx warning PSx trip PSx CTA PSx eresis trip PSx pre-trip PSx
Set 1 072 185 072 184 072 181 072 186 072 183 072 191
Set 2 073 185 073 184 073 181 073 186 073 183 073 191
Set 3 074 185 074 184 074 181 074 186 074 183 074 191
Set 4 075 185 075 184 075 181 075 186 075 183 075 191
19Z6111 B_EN
3-223 Thermal overload protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-323

3 Operation
(continued)
Reset
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload
protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
THERM: Reset
replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
THERM: Reset
1 replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't
execute
1: execute
THERM: Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM: Reset
replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020 B_EN
3-224 Resetting the thermal replica
3-324 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Unbalance Protection (Function Group I2>)
The P139 features an unbalance protection function (I2> protection).
Enable/disable the
unbalance protection
function
The unbalance protection function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
3-225 Enable/disable the unbalance protection function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-325

3 Operation
(continued)
Functional description
The presence or absence of unbalance is assessed on the basis of the negative-
sequence system current. The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds the set thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed,
a signal is issued. The following stages are available for the negative-sequence current:
Unbalance stage Ineg> with time delay tIneg>

Unbalance stage Ineg>> with time delay tIneg>>
The elapsing of all operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary
signal inputs.
The unbalance protection signals can be configured to separate output relays. These
signals cannot be linked to the general starting signal but can be configured to the trip
command.
I2>: Blocking
tIneg> EXT
[ 041 076 ]
I2>: Blocking
tIneg>> EXT
[ 041 077 ]
I2>: Enabled
[ 040 073 ] &
MAIN: Protection
active
306 001
I2>: Blocking EXT & C I2>: Ineg> I2>: tIneg>

[ 035 100 ] PS1 PS1
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 I2>: tIneg>
>0.1 Inom |Ineg|/Inom elapsed
[ 035 033 ]
I2>: Starting
Ineg>
IA [ 035 024 ]
IB
I2>: Ineg>> I2>: tIneg>>
IC PS1 PS1
[ * ] [ * ]
I2>: tIneg>>
MAIN: Rotary field elapsed
[ 010 049 ] [ 035 034 ]
I2>: Starting
Ineg>>
[ 035 025 ]
Ineg
Parameter I2>: Ineg> I2>: tIneg> I2>: Ineg>> I2>: tIneg>>

PS1 PS1 PS1 PS1
set 1 018 091 018 093 018 092 018 094
set 2 018 224 018 230 018 227 018 233
set 3 018 225 018 231 018 228 018 234
set 4 018 226 018 232 018 229 018 235
19Z5083B_EN
3-226 Unbalance protection
3-326 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)
The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental wave of the phase
voltages and of the neutral-point displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence
voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental waves of the
three phase-to-ground voltages.
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled via a parameter setting. Moreover, enabling
V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit by measuring-circuit monitoring.
3-227 Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-327

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the phase

voltages
The P139 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Dependent on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-
to-ground voltages ('Star' operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages ('Delta'
operating mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be
blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
Minimum current
monitoring
Furthermore there is an enabling threshold available with the V<> element which is
based on minimum current monitoring for undervoltage stage V<. The following two
settings may be used to activate the operating mode for minimum current monitoring and
to set the enabling threshold:
V<>: I enable V< PSx

V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx
3-328 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-228 Selection of Measured Variables
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-329

3 Operation
(continued)
3-229 Overvoltage monitoring
3-330 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-230 Undervoltage monitoring
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-331

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the positive-

and negative-sequence
voltages
The P139 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the
fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas
given below. This is based on the M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e setting (alternative
terminology: Rotary field).
Phase sequence A-B-C (alternative terminology: clockwise rotary field):

Positive-sequence voltage:
1
(
V pos = ⋅ V A − G + a ⋅ V B− G + a 2 ⋅ V C −G
3
)
Negative-sequence voltage: V neg =

1
3
(
⋅ VA − G + a 2 ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ V C −G )
Phase sequence A-C-B (alternative terminology: anti-clockwise rotary field):
Positive-sequence voltage:
1
V pos = ⋅ V
3 A −G
(
+ a 2 ⋅ V B−G + a ⋅ V C −G )
V gegen =
1
(
⋅ V A −G + a ⋅ V B−G + a 2 ⋅ V C −G )
Negative-sequence voltage: 3
a = e j120°
a 2 = e j240°
3-332 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Phase
sequence
[ 010 049 ]
D5Z50AYB_EN
3-231 Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages

(Note: Previous terminology of M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e was M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d )
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set
thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed. The timer
stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-333

3 Operation
(continued)
3-232 Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage
3-334 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-233 Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-335

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral-

point displacement voltage
Dependent on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or
the neutral-point displacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage
measuring input, for example the neutral-point displacement voltage from the open delta
winding of the voltage transformers (see section 'Conditioning of Measured Variables').
The neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
3-234 Selecting the measured variable
3-336 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-235 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-337

3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P139 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
frequencies. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero
crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection function
has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be explained
below using the first stage as an example.
over-/underfrequency
protection
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
3-236 Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection
3-338 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measuring

voltage
By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the
over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either
a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.
3-237 Selecting the measuring voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-339

3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude.
Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or

interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.
3-238 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
3-340 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/

underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:
Frequency monitoring
Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (∆f/∆t)
Depending on the setting, the P139 monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-341

3 Operation
(continued)
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (∆f/∆t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be

set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value ∆f within the set
time ∆t, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the ∆t/∆f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3-239 Operation of frequency monitoring combined with ∆f/∆t monitoring
3-342 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-240 First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-343

3 Operation
(continued)
fmin/fmax measurement
For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition and for
the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition, the two
following measured event values are available:
f<>: Max. frequ. for f>
f<>: Min. frequ. for f<
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new overfrequency
or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER
3-344 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>)
The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive power from
the fundamental currents and voltages. The sign of the active or the reactive power,
respectively, is evaluated for direction determination
P<> protection
The power directional protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
3-241 Enabling or disabling power directional protection
Power determination
The P139 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase currents and
the phase-to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring function detects
malfunctioning in the voltage measuring circuit, power determination will be blocked.
Power monitoring
The P139 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when
values have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be
used. Otherwise the trip command would always be present when the system voltage
was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-345

3 Operation
(continued)
3-242 Power determination
3-346 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds
the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting signal
is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-347

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Operate
delay P> PSx
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay P> PSx
tP> EXT
035 082
P<>: P> P<>: Signal

PSx P> delayed
035 087
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P> PSx
P<>: Starting
P>
035 086
P<>: Operate
delay P>>PSx
P<>: Release
delay P>>PSx
P<>: Blocking
tP>> EXT
035 083
P<>: P>> P<>: Signal

PSx P>> delayed
035 090
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P>>PSx
P<>: Starting
P>>
035 089
Diseng. Operate Release

ratio P> PSx delay P> PSx delay P> PSx
set
set
set
set
ratio P>>PSx delay P>>PSx delay P>>PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5271A_EN
3-243 Active power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
3-348 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

exceeded
The P139 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results.
A setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a
backward-directional or a non-directional decision.
3-244 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-349

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring

exceeded
The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
3-350 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Operate
delay Q> PSx
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay Q> PSx
tQ> EXT
035 084
P<>: Q> P<>: Signal

PSx Q> delayed
035 093
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q> PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>
035 092
P<>: Operate
delay Q>>PSx
P<>: Release
delay Q>>PSx
P<>: Blocking
tQ>> EXT
035 085
P<>: Q>> P<>: Signal

PSx Q>> delayed
035 096
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q>>PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>>
035 095

ratio Q> PSx delay Q> PSx delay Q> PSx
set
set
set
set
ratio Q>>PSx delay Q>>PSx delay Q>>PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5270A_EN
3-245 Reactive power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-351

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

exceeded
The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
3-246 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
3-352 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-353

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking tP<

EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>: P<
PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ] P<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release
ratio P< PSx delay P<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: P P<>: Signal P<

402 631 delayed
[ 035 055 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
& P<>: Fault P<

[ 035 057 ]
P<>: Blocking
tP<< EXT &
[ 035 051 ]
P<>: P<<
PSx P<>: Operate delay
[ * ]
P<<PSx
[ * ]
ratio P<< PSx delay P<<PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Signal P<<

delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Fault P<<

& [ 035 063 ]
&
P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx
[ * ] pulse PSx
[ * ]
P<>: tP< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>: tP</tP<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
Parameter P<>: P< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release

PSx ratio P< PSx delay P<PSx delay P<PSx
set 1 017 030 017 034 017 060 017 226
set 2 017 031 017 035 017 061 017 227
set 3 017 032 017 036 017 062 017 228
set 4 017 033 017 037 017 063 017 229
P<>: P<< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
Parameter PSx ratio P<< PSx delay P<<PSx delay P<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 234 017 238 017 242 017 246 018 246
set 2 017 235 017 239 017 243 017 247 018 247
set 3 017 236 017 240 017 244 017 248 018 248
set 4 017 237 017 241 017 245 017 249 018 249
19Z5272 B_EN
3-247 Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
3-354 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
The P139 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-355

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Starting
P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent power S > 0.010 Snom
P<>: Direction
P< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>: Trip signal

& P<
P<>: Signal [ 035 058 ]
P< delayed &
[ 035 055 ]
&
P<>: tP< &

elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ] P<>: Trip signal
& & P< trans
[ 035 059 ]
P<>: P+
402 633
&
P<>: P-
402 634
&
P<>: Starting
P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>: Direction
P<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>: Trip signal

& P<<
P<>: Signal P<< & [ 035 064 ]
delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip sig.

P<>: tP<< & & P<< trans.
elapsed trans. [ 035 065 ]
[ 035 062 ]
&
Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction &

P< PSx P<< PSx
set 1 017 230 017 250
set 2 017 231 017 251
set 3 017 232 017 252
set 4 017 233 017 253
19Z5273 B_EN
3-248 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
3-356 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
P<
035 054
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
*
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
* 2
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
035 055
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
035 056 3
P<>: Fault
P<
035 057
P<>: Operate
1 delay P< PSx *
P<>: Release
2 delay P< PSx *
P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *
Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay P< PSx delay P< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 060 017 226 018 246
set 2 017 061 017 227 018 247
set 3 017 062 017 228 018 248
set 4 017 063 017 229 018 249
19Z5278A_EN
3-249 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-357

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring

when values fall below set
thresholds
The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
3-358 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking tQ<

EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>: Q<
PSx P<>: Operate
[ * ] delay Q< PSx
[ * ]
ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Q P<>: Signal

402 632 Q< delayed
[ 035 067 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
& P<>: Fault Q<

[ 035 069 ]
P<>: Blocking
tQ<< EXT &
[ 035 053 ]
P<>: Q<<
PSx P<>: Operate
[ * ] delay Q<< PSx
[ * ]
ratio Q<< PSx delay Q<< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: Signal Q<<

delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Fault Q<<

& [ 035 049 ]
&
P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
P<>: tQ< elapsed

trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
P<>: tQ</tQ<<
elaps.trans
[ 035 179 ]
Parameter P<>: Q< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release

PSx ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
set 1 018 035 018 044 018 052 018 056
set 2 018 036 018 045 018 053 018 057
set 3 018 037 018 046 018 054 018 058
set 4 018 038 018 047 018 055 018 059
P<>: Q<< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
Parameter PSx ratio Q<< PSx delay Q<< PSx delay Q<< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 085 018 095 018 213 018 236 018 246
set 2 018 086 018 096 018 214 018 237 018 247
set 3 018 087 018 097 018 215 018 238 018 248
set 4 018 088 018 098 018 216 018 239 018 249
19Z5276 B_EN
3-250 Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-359

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

when values fall below
set thresholds
The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
3-360 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Starting
Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Direction
Q< PSx
[ * ]
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>: Trip signal

& Q<
P<>: Signal [ 035 155 ]
Q< delayed &
[ 035 067 ]
&
P<>: tQ< &

elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ] P<>: Trip sig.
& & Q< trans.
[ 035 156 ]
P<>: Q+
402 635
&
P<>: Q-
402 636
&
P<>: Starting
Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>: Direction
Q<< PSx
[ * ]
1
2
3
3: Non-directional
P<>: Trip signal

& Q<<
P<>: Signal & [ 035 176 ]
Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
&
&
P<>: Trip signal

P<>: tQ<< & & Q<<
elapsed trans. [ 035 177 ]
[ 035 016 ]
&
Parameter P<>: Direction P<>: Direction &

Q< PS1 Q<< PSx
set 1 018 081 018 242
set 2 018 082 018 243
set 3 018 083 018 244
set 4 018 084 018 245
19Z5277 B_EN
3-251 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-361

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
*
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
* 2
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
035 067
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
035 068 3
P<>: Fault
Q<
035 069
P<>: Operate
1 delay Q< PSx *
P<>: Release
2 delay Q< PSx *
P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *
Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246
set 2 018 053 018 057 018 247
set 3 018 054 018 058 018 248
set 4 018 055 018 059 018 249
19Z5279A_EN
3-252 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
3-362 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting signal with

direction
P<>: Direction P
& forw.
[ 035 181 ]
P<>: Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
P<>: Starting P>>

[ 035 089 ]
P<>: Starting P<

[ 035 054 ]
P<>: Starting P<<

[ 035 060 ]
P<>: P+ P<>: Direction P

402 633 & backw.
[ 035 191 ]
P<>: P-
402 634
19Z5274B_EN
3-253 Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring
P<>: Q+
402 635
P<>: Direction Q
forw.
P<>: Q-
402 636
& [ 035 193 ]
P<>: Starting Q>

[ 035 092 ]
P<>: Starting Q>>

[ 035 095 ]
P<>: Starting Q<

[ 035 066 ]
P<>: Starting Q<< P<>: Direction Q

[ 035 010 ] & backw.
[ 035 194 ]
19Z 5275B_EN
3-254 Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-363

3 Operation
(continued)
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
The P139 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been
issued the CBF function monitors that the circuit breaker has actually been triggered.
Enable/disable circuit
breaker failure protection
The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this
parameter has been activated the CBF function may be enabled or disabled by
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and
configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the function C B F : E n a b l e
E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then circuit breaker protection will be enabled
by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the
function C B F : D i s a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at
this input will have no effect.
CBF: General
enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
CBF: Enabled
1 & [ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 041 & ≥1

Address 038 042
&
CBF: Ext./user
& & ≥1 S 11 enabled
[ 038 040 ]
& ≥1 R1
CBF: Enable EXT
[ 038 041 ]
CBF: Enable USER

[ 003 016 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF: Disable EXT &

[ 038 042 ]
CBF: Disable USER

[ 003 015 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138 B_EN
3-255 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
3-364 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Readiness of circuit
breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available under the following conditions:
The CBF function is not activated.

Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to 'blocked'.
CBF: Enabled CBF: Not ready

[ 040 055 ] ≥1 [ 040 025 ]
&
CBF: Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
≥1
CBF: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
Blocked &
CBF: t2
[ 022 166 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/fault
beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
Blocked
CBF: Delay/CB
sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
Blocked
19Z6130 B_EN
3-256 Signal C B F : Not ready
Detecting a CB tripping
A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.
Protection functions that have tripping criteria not directly dependent on current flow may
additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.
Current flow monitoring

This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole
selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the
set threshold value C B F : I < .
As long as the current flow remains higher than the set threshold value of C B F : I < ,
then the appropriate phase-selective messages C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w A ,
C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple signal
C B F : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x will be issued continuously.
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-365

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF: Current flow A

IA [ 038 230 ]
IB CBF: Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
IC
CBF: Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF: Current flow
Phx
[ 038 233 ]
47Z1139 D_EN
3-257 Current flow monitoring

Evaluation of CB status
signals
Trip signals included in the G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , which use CB status signals
in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.

The P139 is capable of checking the following CB status signals for plausibility and
evaluating them:
The open signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B 1 o p e n 3 p E X T

The closed signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the respective
binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P139
issuing of the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria is
not affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this
configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P139.
As an alternative the status signals from the external device may be used by the P139.
Assigning necessary for this is made with the parameters
M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B o p e n or M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B c l o s e d . Status signals
from external devices are processed similar to CB status signals
M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T .
3-366 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address 031 028 &

Address 036 051 CBF: CB pos.
& implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT &
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
&
19Z6131C_EN
3-258 Plausibility check of CB status signals
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-367

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup criteria
The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following criteria are evaluated as a
startup criterion:
Internal startup criterion:

Generating the G e n . T r i p s i g n a l 1 is considered a start criterion. In addition it
may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F : S t a r t f o r m a n u a l t r i p , that a
manual trip signal will also be used as a start criterion.
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal,
included in the G e n . T r i p c o m m a n d 1 , has been selected from the protection
function in parameter C B F : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of the CB
auxiliary contacts.
External startup criterion:

Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may
be used as a startup criterion.
To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by
applying the signal C B F : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T .
Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated when no current flow is registered.
Note:
The startup criterion drops off if the configured general trip signal or the external
starting criterion drops off. This occurs independently of the current flow and CB
state signal criteria.
Timer stages and output

logic
Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signal C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still

present when the time period, set at timer stage C B F : t 1 3 p , has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The signal C B F : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still

present when the time period, set at timer stage C B F : t 2 , has elapsed.
The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or
protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of
gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers
then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a
reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapse of timer
stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately
configured at C B F : C B f a u l t y E X T .
3-368 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Fct.
assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3
Selected signals
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: I<
[ 022 160 ] &
≥1
&
IA & & S 1 1
IB
R 1
IC
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
≥1 & ≥1 S 1 1 CBF: Startup 3p

[ 038 211 ]
R 1
≥1 &
>1
CBF: Start with

man. trip
[ 022 154 ]
0
1 & ≥1
0: No
MAIN: Trip cmd. 1: Yes
blocked
[ 021 013 ] &
MAIN: Gen. trip &
signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Manual trip
signal
[ 034 017 ]
INP: Fct.
assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx & ≥1
Address 038 209 &

CBF: Enable
Start EXT
[ 038 209 ]
CBF: Start 3p
EXT
[ 038 205 ]
19Z6132D_EN
3-259 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-369

3 Operation
(continued)
CBF: Not ready CBF: t1 3p

[ 040 025 ] c
[ 022 165 ]
CBF: Startup 3p CBF: Trip

[ 038 211 ] t 0 signal t1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF: t2 CBF: CB failure

c ≥1 [ 036 017 ]
[ 022 166 ]
CBF: Trip
t 0 ≥1 signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
CBF: CB faulty
EXT
[ 038 234 ]
19Z6433 A_EN
3-260 Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection
Trip commands
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the
user can set minimum time delay periods for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure
protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch
mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately
CBF: Min.dur.
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN: Trip cmd. CBF: Trip command
blocked t1
[ 021 013 ] & t 0 ≥1 [ 038 220 ]
CBF: Trip signal t1 ≥1
[ 038 215 ]
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF: Min.dur.
0: No trip cmd.t2
1: Yes [ 022 168 ]
CBF: Trip command
& t 0 ≥1 t2
[ 038 224 ]
CBF: Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
≥1
CBF: Latching
trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Latch. trip c.
reset
[ 040 139 ]
19Z6134 B_EN
3-261 CBF trip commands
3-370 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting trigger
The signal C B F : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal
C B F : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal
input and a general starting is present. The signal C B F : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued
after timer stage C B F : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/
starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN: General t 0 CBF: Trip signal

starting & [ 040 026 ]
[ 040 000 ]
CBF: Starting trig. CBF: Starting
EXT [ 038 021 ]
[ 038 016 ]
19Z6135 B_EN
3-262 Starting trigger
Fault behind CB protection

A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker
already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if the
circuit breaker does not provide the information that it is closed after the time delay set at
C B F : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.
When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F : F a u l t b e h . C B is

issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM
protective interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker
failure function.
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ] CBF: Delay/
fault beh. CB
CBF: I< [ 022 171 ]
[ 022 160 ]
t 0 CBF: Fault behind CB
& [ 038 225 ]
IA &
IB
IC
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB closed
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
19Z6136D_EN
3-263 Fault behind CB protection
P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-371

3 Operation
(continued)
CB synchronization
supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts
are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of
CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the
time delay C B F : D e l a y / C B s y n c h . s u p e r v can be used. When this time period
has elapsed the signal C B F : T r i p S i g C B s y n c h . s u p e r is issued. Poles that are
recognized as being open will still be signaled.
CBF: CB pos.
implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB open 3p
EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ] CBF: Delay/CB
MAIN: CB closed sync.superv
sig. EXT [ 022 172 ]
[ 036 051 ] CBF: TripSig
CBF: I> & t 0 CBsync.super
[ 022 160 ] [ 038 226 ]
IA ≥1
IB
IC
<3
CBF: CBsync.superv
& A open
[ 038 227 ]
CBF: CBsync.superv
& B open
[ 038 228 ]
CBF: CBsync.superv
& C open
[ 038 229 ]
19Z6137 D_EN
3-264 CB synchronization supervision
3-372 P139/EN M/Ba8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.38 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM)
3.38.1 Functional Description
The P139 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports state-
controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.
Enable/disable circuit
breaker monitoring
Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Enabled
USER
[ 022 010 ]
1 CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404B_EN
3-265 Enable/disable circuit breaker monitoring
Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of methods:
Monitoring the mechanical switching operations

Accumulating disconnection current values
Accumulating the squared disconnection current values
Calculating the current-time integral of disconnection and accumulation current values
Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB wear
characteristic.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-373

3 Operation
(continued)
CB wear characteristic
Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying the
maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the disconnection current.
Figure 3-266 displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current
of 2000 A and a maximum cutoff current of 63 kA. The mean disconnection current is
48 kA.
100000
10000
Number of permissible CB operations
1000
100
10
0,1 1 10 100
Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN
3-266 Circuit breaker wear characteristic
3-374 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
The knee points in figure 3-266 are necessary to set the wear characteristic for the circuit
breaker:
The nominal current C B M : I n o m , C B for the circuit breaker and the permitted
number of CB operations at nominal current C B M : P e r m . C B o p . I n o m , C B
The medium disconnection current C B M : M e d . C u r r . I t r i p , C B for the circuit
breaker and the permitted number of CB operations at medium disconnection current
CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
The maximum cutoff current C B M : M a x . c u r r . I t r i p , C B for the circuit breaker
and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum cutoff current
CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
Not all types of circuit breakers provide a value for the medium disconnection current.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to 'blocked'. A knee point
is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters for the knee
point is set to 'blocked'.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that the knee
points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously descending).
When setting currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible according to the
characteristic the P139 will issue an error message and block circuit breaker monitoring.
Calculating the CB wear

state
The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining CB
operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB operations
nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively and after each disconnection
by the P139. Calculation is per this equation:
With:
Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB

n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
Id,CB: Ruptured current
n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB before
disconnection
nrem,(Inom,CB) Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-375

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes
Setting the parameter C B M : O p e r a t i n g m o d e will select the condition under
which the function will be triggered:
with trip cmd. only:

Function is triggered only by the general trip command 1
w i t h C B s i g . E X T only:
Function is triggered by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
CB sig. EXT or trip:
Function is triggered by the general trip command 1 or the CB open signal generated
by an auxiliary contact
Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and compared
with set threshold values.
A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time

C B M : C o r r . a c q u i s . t i m e . This enables proper evaluation of leading or lagging
auxiliary contacts or the delay period between forming of the trip command and opening
of the CB contacts.
Cycle for circuit breaker
monitoring
The cycle for circuit breaker monitoring is defined pole-selectively. During an active
cycle the signals C B M : C y c l e r u n n i n g X (X = A, B or C) are issued.
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The remaining
time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected current zero crossing.
The signal C B M : C u r r . F l o w e n d e d X (X = A, B or C) is then issued.
The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The start of the cycle
time is corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole is considered to
be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after the maximum cycle time
has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB tripping are canceled and the
signal C B M : t m a x > X (X = A, B or C) is issued.
Linking control functions

with the trip command
With the P139, the trip command from the optional control function can be linked with the
general trip command 1 of the protection, when setting external devices. In such a case
the trip command from the control function must be associated by the parameter
C B M : S i g . a s g . T r i p c m d . so that operational trip commands, issued to the
circuit breaker by the control function, are considered additionally to the general trip
command 1.
3-376 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
CBM: Sig. asg.

trip cmd.
[ 022 152 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
>1 CBM: Internal
Selected signal trip cmd
310 025
MAIN: Gen. trip
command 1
[ 036 071 ]
19Z6124 C_EN
3-267 Forming the linked trip commands
The external devices state signal "open" may be linked to the control function state signal
"open" by setting the parameter C B M : S i g . a s g . t r i p c m d . so that the function in
the P139 will be triggered by CB auxiliary contacts.
MAIN: Sig. asg.

CB open
[ 021 017 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
MAIN: Internal
Selected signal CB trip
310 030
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT

[ 031 028 ]
19Z6125 C_EN
3-268 Forming the linked "open" state signal
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-377

3 Operation
(continued)
Pole-selective counter
values and measured
values
The P139 separately evaluates each phase current and generates an individual wear
presentation for each CB pole.
The following counter values are presented pole-selectively:
The number of mechanical switching operations made

The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current
This value is derived by evaluating wear with reference to the CB wear characteristic.
The following measured values are presented pole-selectively, and per-unit values refer
to CB nominal current:
Primary disconnection currentThis value is applied to evaluate wear with reference to

the CB wear characteristic.
Per-unit disconnection current
Second power of the per-unit disconnection current
Sum of the per-unit disconnection currents
Sum of the squares of the per-unit disconnection currents
Current-time integral of the per-unit disconnection current
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit disconnection currents
The disconnection current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a last
zero crossing.
The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and current
disappearance. Current reset is recognized when there are no further current zero
crossings detected. An example for calculation of the current-time integral is displayed
in figure 3-269.
3-378 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
20,00
15,00
10,00
5,00
0,00
-5,00
-10,00
-15,00
-20,00 Calculating the current-time integral
General trip command 1
Correction time running
19Z6126A_EN
3-269 Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1
Resetting measured values

Measured values from the respective last CB tripping may be reset via the interfaces on
the device. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.
Setting measured values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the
respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced.
The available interfaces on the device may be used to set measured values in the circuit
breaker monitoring function.
Note: Only such measured values and counter values in the P139 may be set to
new values that do not have their default values set to 'blocked'.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to "blocked".
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P139
to 'blocked'.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-379

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: Protection
active & C
306 001
CBM: Enabled
[ 044 130 ] CBM: Operating
mode
[ 022 007 ]
0 &
1 &
2 & C
1: With trip cmd. only
2: With CB sig.EXT only C CBM: Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
MAIN: Inom C.T.
CBM: Blocked prim.
[ 044 199 ] [ 010 001 ]
CBM: Internal CBM: Perm. CB op.
trip cmd Inom,CB
310 025 [ 022 013 ]
MAIN: Internal CB
trip CBM: Med. curr.
310 030 Itrip,CB
fnom [ 022 014 ]
Ix CBM: Perm. CB op.
Imed,CB[ 022 015 ]
CBM: Max. curr.

Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
CBM: Perm. CB op.
Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
C
CBM: Corr. acquis.
time
CBM: Set No. CB [ 022 018 ]
oper. A
[ * ]
CBM: Set remain. CBM: Itrip A
CB op. A R [ * ]
[ * ]
CBM: Set Itrip CBM: I*t A
A [ * ] [ * ]
R
CBM: Set
Itrip**2 A CBM: Itrip,prim A
[ * ] [ * ]
R
CBM: Set I*t A
[ * ] CBM: Itrip**2 A
R [ * ]
CBM: Itrip A
S [ * ]
CBM: Itrip**2 A
S [ * ]
CBM: I*t A
S [ * ]
CBM: No. of CB
oper. A
S [ * ]
CBM: Remain. No.

CB op. A
S [ * ]
CBM: Initialize
values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM: Reset
meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]
Phase x / CBM: Set No. CB CBM: Set remain. CBM: Set Itrip CBM: Set CBM: Set I*t CBM: No. of CB CBM: Remain.
Current Ix oper. A CB op. A A Itrip**2 A A oper. A No. CB op. A
A / IA 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143 008 011 008 014
B / IB 022 132 022 135 022 138 022 141 022 144 008 012 008 015
C / IC 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145 008 013 008 016
Phase x / CBM: Itrip A CBM: I*t A CBM: Itrip,prim CBM: Itrip**2 CBM: Itrip A CBM: Itrip**2 CBM: I*t A
Current Ix A A A
A / IA 009 047 009 061 009 212 009 051 009 071 009 077 009 087
B / IB 009 048 009 062 009 213 009 052 009 073 009 078 009 088
C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 076 009 079 009 089
19Z6120 B_EN
3-270 Triggering and calculating circuit breaker monitoring
3-380 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the number of

CB operations
Depending on the selected operating mode the P139 will calculate the current wear state
of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of remaining CB operations
at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A threshold value can be set with
the parameter C B M : N o . C B o p e r a t i o n s < . An alarm is issued should the
number of remaining CB operations drop below this threshold.
CBM: Remain No.

C CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM: Remain. CBM: Sig. Rem.

No. CB op. A No.CB op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]
CBM: Remain.
No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
CBM: Remain.
No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
19Z6121 B_EN
3-271 Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P139 counter for the
number of CB operations The number of CB operations performed is displayed.
A threshold value can be set with the parameter C B M : N o . C B o p e r a t i o n s > .
An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations performed exceed this threshold.
CBM: No. CB
C operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM: No. of CBM: Sig. No. CB

CB oper. A op. >
[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM: No. of
CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]
CBM: No. of
CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
19Z6122 B_EN
3-272 Monitoring the number of CB operations performed
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-381

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring disconnection
currents
In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number of CB
operations performed, the P139 features the means to accumulate and display the
disconnection current values and the squares of these values. Threshold values can be
set with the parameters C B M : Σ I t r i p > , C B M : Σ I t r i p * * 2 > and C B M : Σ I * t .
An alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed any of these
thresholds.
Blocking circuit breaker
monitoring
When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring function
should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring results. CBM
protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CBM: Enabled CBM: Blocked

[ 044 130 ] [ 044 199 ]
&
CBM: Blocking
EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM: Blocking
USER
[ 022 150 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346C_EN
3-273 Blocking circuit breaker monitoring
3-382 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.39 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)
Monitoring of the reference voltage has been added to the measuring-circuit monitoring
function.
The P139 monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system
operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is
taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
3-274 Monitoring signals
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be deactivated by the appropriate setting. In the event

of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-383

3 Operation
(continued)
Current monitoring
Current monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled.

The difference between the maximum and the minimum phase current exceeds
0.05xInom.
A general starting signal is absent.
Current monitoring is based on checking the difference in the phase current magnitudes
under the following operate condition:
I P, max − I P, min
≥ I diff
I P,max
where IP,max is the highest of the three phase currents and IP,min is the lowest; Idiff> is the
set operate value M C M O N : I d i f f > . In order to suppress short-term transients, the
measuring stage Idiff> is followed by a set operate-delayed timer stage
MCMON: Operate delay
If connection is to two current transformers only (phase ANC connection only) evaluation
of current IB can be disabled by an appropriate selection for the operating mode.
3-384 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-275 Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-385

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled.

In addition to these conditions, either a minimum current having the default threshold
setting of I > 0.05 ⋅ I nom or the closed position of the circuit breaker contacts can be used
as enabling criteria. If at least one of the phase-to-phase voltages falls below the set
trigger value M C M O N : V m i n < for the period of the operate-delayed timer stage
M C M O N : O p e r a t e d e l a y , then the M C M O N : U n d e r v o l t a g e signal is issued.
The signal M C M O N : M e a s . v o l t a g e o . k . is generated if all three phase-to-

phase voltages exceed the fixed threshold of 0.65 Vnom and there is no incorrect phase
sequence.
Phase-sequence
monitoring
Phase-sequence monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled.

Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled.
All three phase-to-ground voltages exceed 0.4xVnom.
In order to suppress short-term transients, the phase-sequence monitoring trigger is
followed by a set operate delay of 1 s. Once the operate delay has elapsed, the signal
M C M O N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e f a u l t y is issued.
3-386 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
MCMON: Operate
delay
[ 017 023 ]
MAIN: General
starting
[ 040 000 ]
MCMON: Enabled >0.05 Inom
[ 040 094 ] C
IA
IB
IC
MCMON: Op. mode

Vmin< monit
[ 018 079 ]
1
2 &
3 &
1: Vmin<
2: Vmin< with I enable
MAIN: CB closed 3: Vmin< w.CB cont.enab
sig. EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MCMON: Vmin<
& C
[ 017 022 ] t 0 MCMON: Undervoltage
& [ 038 038 ]
VA-G +
VB-G SFMON: Undervoltage
- [ 098 009 ]
+
VC-G -
-
+
>0.65 Unom
C
MCMON: Meas.
& voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
MCMON: Phase sequ.

monitor.
[ 018 019 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
>0.4 Vnom
C
&
& C
MAIN: Rotary field

[ 010 049 ]
60°< (VA-B)<180°
60°< (VB-C)<180° MCMON: Phase sequ.
V faulty
60°< (VC-A)<180° [ 038 049 ]
t 0 SFMON: Phase sequ.
V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
19Z5088 B_EN
3-276 Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits

(Note: Previous terminology of M A I N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e was M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d )
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-387

3 Operation
(continued)
"Fuse Failure" monitoring

of the reference voltage
The P139 includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is
required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC).
Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC function has
been configured. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the
voltage transformer m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is not desired it can be disabled by
setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the three-
phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is
present when the following conditions are met:
The circuit breaker is closed.

The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom.
3-277 "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
3-388 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.40 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it is only

applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor temperature limits.
Enable/disable the Limit

Value Monitoring function
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
Monitoring phase currents

and phase voltages
With the P139 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:
Maximum phase current

Minimum phase current
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-389

3 Operation
(continued)
3-278 Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
3-390 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT: VPP> LIMIT: tVPP>

[ 040 074 ]
[ 014 027 ] [ 014 039 ]
MAIN: Protec-
tion active
306 001
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP>
elapsed
[ 040 228 ]
VA-G COMP LIMIT: VPP>> LIMIT: tVPP>>
VB-G [ 014 028 ] [ 014 040 ]
VC-G
t 0
VPP,max LIMIT: tVPP>>
elapsed
VPP,min [ 040 229 ]
LIMIT: VPP< LIMIT: tVPP<
[ 014 029 ] [ 014 041 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP<
elapsed
[ 040 230 ]
LIMIT: VPP<< LIMIT: tVPP<<

[ 014 030 ] [ 014 042 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPP<<
elapsed
[ 040 231 ]
LIMIT: VPG> LIMIT: tVPG>

[ 014 023 ] [ 014 035 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG>
elapsed
[ 040 224 ]
COMP LIMIT: VPG>> LIMIT: tVPG>>

[ 014 024 ] [ 014 036 ]
t 0
VPG,max LIMIT: tVPG>>
elapsed
VPG,min [ 040 225 ]
LIMIT: VPG< LIMIT: tVPG<

[ 014 025 ] [ 014 037 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG<
elapsed
[ 040 226 ]
LIMIT: VPG<< LIMIT: tVPG<<

[ 014 026 ] [ 014 038 ]
t 0
LIMIT: tVPG<<
elapsed
[ 040 227 ]
47Z0154 B_EN
3-279 Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltage
P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-391

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral-

point displacement voltage
The neutral displacement voltage, calculated from the three phase-to-ground voltages, is
monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If any of the
thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
3-280 Monitoring the neutral-point displacement voltage
3-392 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the measured
values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is
issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-281 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-393

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the reference

voltage
The reference voltage Vref (when synchrocheck VT is fitted) is monitored by two stages
to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values. If the measured value exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: General
enable USER
014 010
LIMIT:
Enabled
040 074
0: no
MAIN: Device 1: yes
on-line LIMIT: Vref> LIMIT: tVref>
003 030
042 144 042 148
1: yes (= on)
LIMIT: tVref>
elapsed
042 152
LIMIT: Vref>> LIMIT: tVref>>

042 145 042 149
LIMIT: tVref>>
Vref elapsed
042 153
LIMIT: Vref< LIMIT: tVref<

042 146 042 150
LIMIT: tVref<
elapsed
042 154
LIMIT: Vref<< LIMIT: tVref<<

042 147 042 151
LIMIT: tVref<<
abgelaufen
042 155
19Z5215A_EN
3-282 Monitoring the reference voltage
3-394 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)

"PT 100" temperature
value
The temperature value that is measured by the P139 with a resistance thermometer
(PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y, is monitored by two stages to
determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT LIMIT
MAIN: Protection
active
MEASI: Temperature LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
19Z5212A_EN
3-283 Monitoring the measured "PT 100" temperature value
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-395

3 Operation
(continued)

temperature values T1 to
T9
The temperatures that are measured by the P139 using temperature sensors connected
to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) are each monitored by two stages to
determine if they exceed or fall below set thresholds. If any of the measured values
exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued
after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: Starting
T1>
040 200
LIMIT Enabled LIMIT: T1> LIMIT: tT1>
014 120 014 122

GRUND Schutz ein
LIMIT: tT1>
elapsed
MEASI Temperature
T1 040 202
LIMIT: Starting
T1>>
040 201
LIMIT: T1>> LIMIT: tT1>>
014 121 014 123
LIMIT: tT1>>
elapsed
040 203
LIMIT: Starting
T1<
040 204
LIMIT: T1< LIMIT: tT1<
014 124 014 126

LIMIT: tT1<
elapsed
040 206
LIMIT: Starting
T1<<
040 205
LIMIT: T1<< LIMIT: tT1<<
014 125 014 127

LIMIT: tT1<<
elapsed
040 207
19Z5213A_EN
3-284 Monitoring the measured temperature value T1 as an example for measured temperature values T1 to T9
3-396 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Open circuit PT100

The open circuit signals from the temperature sensors, issued by the function group
M E A S I (see function description for 'Measured data input’) are forwarded to the Limit
Value Monitoring function. An open circuit signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 T x
(x = 1 to 9) will lead to blocking of these signals:
LIMIT: Starting Tx>, LIMIT: Starting Tx>>,

LIMIT: Starting Tx<, LIMIT: Starting Tx<<,
LIMIT: Starting Tx> elapsed, LIMIT: Starting Tx>> elapsed,
LIMIT: Starting Tx< elapsed, LIMIT: Starting Tx<< elapsed
Backup sensors
When an open circuit has occurred the 2-out-of-3 logic available with the Limit Value
Monitoring function will revert to backup sensors.
The selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in
the function group M E A S I .
For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD
module) are divided into three groups:
Group 1: T1, T2, T3

Group 2: T4, T5, T6
Group 3: T7, T8, T9
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to 'Without' the Limit Value

Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors.
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 -2,

the defective temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor
from group 2.
If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the
corresponding sensor from group 3, under the assumption that
M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 –2/3.
The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below:
Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2 Backup sensor from group 3
With setting: With setting:
Group 1 -2 Group 1 -2/3
or
Group 1 -2/3
T1 T4 T7
T2 T5 T8
T3 T6 T9
Should temperature sensor T1 fail, with the setting Group 1 –2/3, it will replaced by T4.
Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will replaced by T7.
2-out-of-3 monitoring
Limit values resulting from temperature values measured by main sensors (from
group 1) or their corresponding backup sensors are processed by the '2-out-of-3' Limit
Value Monitoring function, L I M I T : 2 o u t o f 3 w i t h T 1 , 2 , 3 . This is displayed in the
following figure.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-397

3 Operation
(continued)
MEASI: enabled MEASI: Backup MEASI: Backup

TempSensor PSx TempSensor PSx
* PS1: 004 243
035 008
PS2: 004 244
PS3: 004 245
without
PS4: 004 246
Group 1 - 2
Group 1 - 2/3
MEASI: T1 open circ.

040 193
LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed LIMIT: tTx>>

040 203 elapsed

040 208
LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed Tx: T1 or

041 153 backup sensor
(T4 or T7)
040 219
LIMIT: tT7>> elapsed

041 183

040 194

040 213 elapsed
tTx>> for
MEASI: T5 open circ. 2 of 3 LIMIT: 2 of 3
limit values with T1,2,3
040 209
elapsed 041 248
(T5 or T8)
040 252

041 193

040 195

040 163 elapsed

040 218

(T6 or T9)
040 253

041 243
19Z5210A_EN
3-285 Using backup sensors ("BackupTempSensor") with the '2-out-of-3' Limit Value Monitoring function
3-398 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
All functions associated with temperature sensors operate in a parallel mode. In this
way the '2-out-of-3' Limit Value Monitoring function, L I M I T : 2 o u t o f 3 w i t h T 4 , 5 , 6
may use temperature sensors from group 2 even though these backup sensors are
configured to group 1.
MEASI: T4 open circuit

040 208 LIMIT: tT4>>
elapsed,
LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed without
041 153 open circuit
MEASI: T5 open circuit tTx>> for

040 209 LIMIT: tT5>> 2 of 3 LIMIT: 2 of 3
elapsed, limit values with T4,5,6
LIMIT: tT5>> elapsed without elapsed 041 249

LIMIT: tT6>>
040 218
elapsed,
open circuit
041 173

040 219 LIMIT: tT7>>
elapsed,
MEASI: T8 open circuit tTx>> for

040 252 LIMIT: tT8>> LIMIT: 2 of 3
2 of 3
elapsed, limit values with T7,8,9
LIMIT: tT8>> elapsed without elapsed 041 250

LIMIT: tT9>>
040 253
elapsed,
open circuit
041 243
19Z5211A_EN
3-286 Limit Value Monitoring function '2-out-of-3' for temperature sensors T4 to T6 and T7 to T9. If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x
is set to 'Without' this scheme will also apply to temperature sensors T1 to T4.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-399

3 Operation
(continued)
Application example
A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1
to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a "PT 100" resistance
thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.
These temperature sensors, for example, can be distributed as follows:
On the stator there are three temperature sensors as the main sensors (group 1: T1,
T2, T3) and three backup sensors (group 2: T4, T5, T6) used by the '2-out-of-3' Limit
Value Monitoring function
One temperature sensor on each of the bearings is used for individual Limit Value
signaling
One main and one backup sensor inside the coolant are used by the thermal replica
in the Thermal Overload protection
RTD RTD Phase RTD

Main Temp. Sensor A B C Ambient temperature /
RTD Coolant temperature
Backup Temp. Sensor
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
Stator
RTD
RTD
Rotor
Bearing Bearing
19B5236A_EN
3-287 Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (L I M I T ) and the Thermal Overload protection
(THERM)
3-400 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.41 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P139 may be linked by logical 'OR' or 'AND' operations with the
option of additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . A s s i g n m . O u t p . n ,
where n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P139, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set via setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are latched.
The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured for
L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T )
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two functions
is configured, then this is interpreted as ‘Logic externally set’. If the input signals of the
two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a logic value of
‘1’), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional type test to
conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control application. In
particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the implementation of logic
linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device startup, during
operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-401

3 Operation
(continued)
3-288 Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a ‘triggering function’ that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
3-402 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-289 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-403

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number
equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed according to the sequence of their ordinal numbers. It should
be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is provided by the equation
with the highest ordinal number.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the Minimum Dwell operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-290 to 3-294 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating
modes.
Note: If the device is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all
outputs are set to the '0' logic level.
3-290 Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay
3-404 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-291 Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup
3-292 Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-405

3 Operation
(continued)
3-293 Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable
3-294 Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
3-406 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-295 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-407

3 Operation
(continued)
3.42 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

(Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10)
The P139 is designed to control up to 6 switchgear units. The Bay Panel type defines
the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
Defining a Bay Panel type

With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.

Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P139.
The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open’ / ‘Close' command control of the
switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.
Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
Binary outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and
the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this
configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs
and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear
units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P139 and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit
into the functional sequence of the P139 (processing of status signals only or controlling
and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example.
Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in
the function diagrams by function group "COMM1:" with a blank address [--- ---], it will
indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been
assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as ‘signal 1’ to ‘signal n’
are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.
3-408 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.42.1 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units
The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals
conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see: ‘Main Functions of the P139’)
are used for further processing. If no logic value of '1' is present at any of the two binary
signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the set
time period for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are
back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is
issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
The signal ‘Faulty position’ is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not
reached either their ’Open’ or ‘Closed’ position after the set time period for running time
monitoring and the delay time set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have
elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is
started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position,
the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of '1'.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-409

3 Operation
(continued)
3-296 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units
3-410 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.42.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
Local or remote control of

external devices
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The selection of the
control point is described in the section entitled "Configuration of the Bay Panel and of
the Measured Value Panels; Selection of the Control Point". Usually, remote control is
carried out via the communication interface, local control via the keys on the local control
panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured
appropriately (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or
D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l
determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P139 will issue the following logic
state signals:
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf

or
MAIN: Command from HMI
or
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data
memory:
DEVxx: Open cmd. received

DEVxx: Close cmd. received
Selection of the switchgear

unit to be controlled and
generating a switching
request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to
this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control panel using
the selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching
request. For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the
communication interface, the control commands ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the
switchgear unit to be controlled.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-411

3 Operation
(continued)
3-297 Generating a switching request
3-412 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling switching
commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P139 checks the interlocking conditions
defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted
or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function
can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a
switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the
conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.
3-298 Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-413

3 Operation
(continued)
Bay interlock for operation

with the station interlock
function
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a
communication link with the substation control level. If the P139 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an
automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay
interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching
request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will
then be a check - taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether
switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling
command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay
interlock is still present. Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be
carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the
bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be
considered.
3-299 Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock
3-414 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Linking protection
commands to switching
commands
For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals.
The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection
functions. The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly
without a check of the interlocking conditions.
3-300 Linking to the protection commands
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-415

3 Operation
(continued)
Issue of switching
commands
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . M o d e c m d . ) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to
time control.
When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter
A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'Autom. synchr. control' a 'Close' request
will automatically issue a 'Close' command for the circuit breaker after a ‘close enable'
was issued by the ASC.
However if A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'Autom. synchron. checkl' ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously
updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations have been set
accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may make decisions as to
which external device is to be given a switching command.
External termination control

If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control
process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then
be necessary to set the P139 at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary
signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination
contacts.
3-416 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-301 Issue of switching commands
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-417

3 Operation
(continued)
Time control of switching

commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is
started. The P139 expects a status signal - ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ to be issued by the
switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status signal for the
position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured
binary inputs on the P139, which can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression
mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in section 'Main
Functions of the P139'). For the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts
on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the
signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’
position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'No’) the switching command is terminated after the set
latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status signal is
received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Figure ).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'Yes’) the switching command is terminated, after the set
latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time
period for running time monitoring is active.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of '1'.
3-418 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-302 Monitoring of switching commands
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-419

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring without external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close
DEV01: Close
command
210 029 1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4
1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005
4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
19Z5201A_EN
3-303 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control
3-420 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring with external

run-back of command,
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
DEV01:Inp.asg.
end Close
210 016
1 10 ms
19Z5202A_EN
3-304 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-421

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the number of

CB operations permitted
The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific time
period) may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x o p e r . c a p . Associated with
this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . to which the
maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge
of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at

M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation.
Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals
D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .
The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value

of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality,
in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred
(i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.
3-422 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time control for direct

motor control
The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated via an
‘Open’ contact or a ‘Close’ contact. For bays with direct motor control of load
disconnecting switches, isolating links or grounding switches, the following modified
control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear units. The list
of Bay Panel types shows which bay types are defined for direct motor control. An
example for the connection of a bay with direct motor control is illustrated in Chapter 5
‘Installation and Connection’.
If a Bay Panel type with direct motor control is selected, a binary input for the status
signal of the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor relay and the
shunt windings will have to be configured. In the example illustrated in Figure 3-305, the
single-pole command C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 2 is defined for control of the motor
relay, the single-pole command C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 1 is defined for control of
the shunt windings and the single-pole signal S I G _ 1 : S i g n a l S 0 1 2 (debounced
and conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal to the motor
relay.
After triggering the motor relay, a set monitoring time period is started during which the
status signal must be issued by the motor relay. If the status signal is not received
during this time period the 'Close' command issued to the output relays, configured to
control the motor relay and the shunt windings, is terminated. In addition a signal is
transferred to the substation control level.
If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time period, the
running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously with this status
signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as with
electromechanically operated switchgear units.
If the operating mode external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'No’) the ‘Close’ command to the motor relay is terminated
after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status
signal is received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see
Figure 3-297). The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of the
‘Close’ command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control commands
'Open' or ‘Close’ are also terminated. The same is valid for the shunt windings.
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . is set to 'Yes’) the switching command to the motor relay is terminated
after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the
set time period for running time monitoring is active. The switching command to the
motor relay is always terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. The monitoring
time period is again started with the termination of the ‘Close’ command to the motor
relay and after it has elapsed the control commands 'Open' or ‘Close’ are also
terminated.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-423

3 Operation
(continued)
3-305 Control and monitoring of the motor relay
3-424 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
CMD_1: Command
C011
200 051
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2
CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4
1 10 ms
2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060
4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
19Z5203A_EN
3-306 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-425

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2
CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
DEV01: Inp.
asg.end Close
210 016
1 10 ms
2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060
19Z5204A_EN
3-307 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination
3-426 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.43 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)
Switching commands issued to switching units within the bay that are subject to control
actions are only enabled after interlock conditions have been checked. The definition of
interlock conditions is carried out in the interlocking logic by Boolean equations.
By selecting a Bay Panel type the bay interlock conditions to set switching units within
the bay to the “Closed” or “Open” position are defined automatically. Different conditions
are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock
(see Appendix, ‘List of Bay Types’). Such interlock conditions that are automatically
defined by selecting a Bay Panel type may be adapted at any time by the user according
to system requirements. The following signals acquired by the P139 may be linked
logically for the bay interlock:
Function block 1 and 2

Output signals from the programmable logic function
Switch gear state signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression
Single-pole signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression
There are max 32 equations each with 32 equation elements available to define interlock
conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’. The output
signal of an equation can be fed into a higher ordinal number equation as an input thus
leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-427

3 Operation
(continued)
3-308 Interlocking logic shown with example for equation 1
3-428 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3.44 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)
Commands may be transmitted to the P139 via the communications interface. When the
P139 receives such a command, and the remote control mode is enabled, an
appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal is issued.
The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command. The
following settings are possible:
Long command
Short command
Persistent command
If the operating mode long or short command has been selected the output relay will be
triggered for the time period set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.
The setting possibilities and the functional sequence is displayed in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
3-309 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Command C001
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-429

3 Operation
(continued)
3.45 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)
Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P139 via its
appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression
(see: ‘Main Functions of the P139’). This conditioned signal is then presented as
SIG_1: Logic signal Sxxx.
Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting the

operating mode. The following settings are possible:
Without function
Start/end signal
Transient signal
If setting "Without function" has been selected then no message is transmitted when the
signal state at the binary signal input changes. If setting "Start/end signal" has been
selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal
input changes. A requirement for transmission of the "Start signal" message is that the
logic "1" signal is present for the set minimum time period. If setting "Transient signal"
has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal state at the
binary signal input changes form logic "0" to logic "1".
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole
signals.
3-430 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
3-310 Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-431

3 Operation
(continued)
3.46 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)
The P139 features a binary counter that can count the positive pulse edges of a binary
signal present at an appropriately configured binary signal input. Such a binary signal
can be provided with debouncing.
Enable/disable the
counting function
The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.
Debouncing
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a timer
stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each positive pulse
edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The binary input signal will
be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time period.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the
same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be counted.
3-311 Debouncing signal flow

debouncing time period: 50 ms
3-432 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting function
A debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counter may be set to a
specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via the serial interfaces.
The counter value can be shown on the LC-display and read out via the PC interface or
the communications interface.
Transmitting the counter

value the communications
interface
The counter value is transmitted via the communications interface when a signal is
presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input, a trigger signal is issued by
a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle time stage. When the
counter value is transmitted at cyclic intervals, then transmission is time synchronized if
the ratio - 60/set cycle time - comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter value is
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
Counter value reset

The counter value may be reset by setting parameters or via an appropriately configured
binary signal input as well as by the general reset action.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 3-433

3 Operation
(continued)
COUNT: General
enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
1 COUNT: Enabled
[ 217 001 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: Device
online COUNT: Count 1
[ 003 030 ] [ 217 100 ]
1: Yes (= on)
m CT=m COUNT: Count 1

[ 217 100 ]
COUNT: Set +
counter 1 EXT Entprellung
[ 217 130 ] R
COUNT: Transmit
counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT: Transmit
1 counts
[ 217 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT: Transmit C
counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
COUNT: Cycle
C t.count transm COMM1: Count 1
[ 217 007 ]
[ --- --- ]
COUNT: Reset
USER
[ 217 003 ]
= 0 min
0
1 COUNT: Reset
[ 217 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT: Reset
EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN: General
Reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN: General
Reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z64ANA_EN
3-312 Binary integrated total
3-434 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

4 Design
4 Design
The P139 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations of
modules.
The P139 – like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30 system – is equipped with the
standard local control panel (LOC). The local control panel is covered with a tough film
so that the specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the
essential control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of a total of 17 LED
indicators is also incorporated. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged cover at
the bottom of the local control panel.
4.1 Designs
The P139 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The threaded
terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the front of the device
after unscrewing the crosshead screws on the sides (see Figure 4-1, c) and removing
the local control panel. The local control panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs
in the slots in the left side wall (see Figure 4-1, d). The flush-mounted case is
connected at the back of the case.
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting

cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control panel by inserting it in
the slots provided on the left.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4-1 Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for a 40 T device)
4-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

4 Design
(continued)
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Surface-Mounted Case
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änderungsmod .
147,5
177,5
184,5
213,4 257,1
242,6
260,2
4-2 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted case 40T
Aus-Kommando
War nung
Block./ Sö
t r ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod
.
147,5
177,5
184,5
434,8 257,1
464,0
481,6
4-3 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted case 84T
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 4-3

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.2 Flush Mounted Case
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod .
177,5
213,4 227,9
253,6
203,0
155,4
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
181,3
4-4 Dimensional drawing for 40 T flush-mounted case with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and
frame) (dimensions in mm)
Aus- Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Störung
Betr ieb
Änderungsmod .
101,6
177,5
213,4 227,9
253,6
242,6
260,2
6,4
101,6
186,5
224,5
242,6
4-5 Flush-mounted case 40T with instrument panel cut-out, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
4-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

4 Design
(continued)
Aus-Kommando
Warnung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod .
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
284,9
259,0
25,9
159,0
168,0
5,0
5,0
410,0
4-6 Dimensional drawing for 84 T flush-mounted case with panel opening flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)
Aus-Kommando
War nung
Bo
l ck./ Stör ung
Betr e
ib
Änderungsmod .
101,6
177,5
434,8 227,9
253,6
464,0
481,6
6,4
101,6
186,5
445,9
464,0
4-7 Flush-mounted case 84T with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Note: The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown in this
drawing) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 4-5

4 Design
(continued)
4.2.3 Device views for Connection of Detachable HMI
View of case 40T for connection of detachable HMI:
Aus-Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr e
ib
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
View of case 84T for connection of detachable HMI:
Aus- Kommando
War nung
Block./ Stör ung
Betr e
ib
ACHTUNG:
Anschluss nur für

abgesetztes Bedienfeld.
Kein Netzwerkanschluss!
Detachable HMI with panel opening:
Aus- Kommando
War nung
107,3
Block ./Stör ung

Betr ieb
Änder ungsmod.
177,5
213,4 20,7
46,3
197,5
192,5
148,0
168,0
3,0
181,3
4-8 Device and panel opening views for connection of detachable HMI
Note: Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
4-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

4 Design
(continued)
4.3 Modules
The P139 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table gives an
overview of the modules relevant for the P139.
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, {: optional, z: standard
equipment, : depending on order).
Type Item number Description Width 40 T 84 T

Index
A 9650 356 A ff Communication module (for RS 485 wire connection) 4T { {
A 9650 354 A ff Communication module (for glass fiber, ST connector) 4T { {
A 9650 355 A ff Communication module (for plastic fiber) 4T { {
A 9650 353 A ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4T { {
A 9651 427 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { {
SC connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9651 471 A ff Ethernet module (for 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber, 4T { {
ST connector and RJ45 wire)
A 9650 827 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 485) 4T { {
A 9650 828 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for glass fiber) 4T { {
A 9650 829 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (for plastic fiber) 4T { {
A 9650 830 B ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 (RS 232) 4T { {
B 0336 187 D ff * Bus module (digital) z
B 0336 188 C ff * Bus module (digital) z
B 0336 421 B ff * Bus module (analog) z z
L 9650 319 D ff * Local Control Module (for device version 40T without DHMI)
L 9650 257 D ff * Local Control Module (for device version 84T without DHMI)
L 9651 470 B ff * Local control module (for device version with DHMI)
L 9650 563 F ff * Front plate (for device version 40T with DHMI)
L 9651 920 A ff * Front plate (for device version 84T with DHMI)
N 0337 086 B ff Transient ground fault evaluation module 4T { {
P 9650 135 C ff Processor module (for P139 without DHMI) 4T z z
P 9651 428 B ff Processor module (for P139 with DHMI) 4T z z
T 9650 307 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 308 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 309 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (pin connection) 8T
T 9650 321 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring connection) 8T
T 9650 322 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (ring connection) 8T
T 9650 323 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (ring connection) 8T
T 9650 419 A ff CT/VT-Board (NCIT) 8T
V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V DC 4T

Standard variant (switching threshold 18 V)
V 9651 300 A ff Power supply module 24 V DC, switching threshold 73 V 4T
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 4-7

4 Design
(continued)
Type Item number Description Width 40 T 84 T

Index
V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 100 to 230 V AC, 4T

V 9651 301 A ff Power supply module 48 to 250 V DC / 4T

100 to 230 V AC, switching threshold 73 V



X 0337 612 A ff Binary I/O module (24 binary inputs), 4T { {
switching threshold 73 V
X 0337 377 E ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
X 9651 305 A ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs & 6 output relays), 4T { {
X 0336 973 D ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4T { {
X 9650 341 B ff Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with triacs) 4T { {
Y 0337 406 D ff Analog I/O module, 4T { {

Y 9651 307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold 73 V 4T { {
Y 9650 735 C ff Analog I/O module (RTD) / temperature p/c board 4T { {
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40 T or 84 T in width

(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm).
Location
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal blocks in
the P139 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection diagrams at the end
of Chapter 5.
4-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

5 Installation and Connection
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the "Warning" page at the beginning of this
manual, may work on or operate this device.
The instructions given in the "Protective and Operational Grounding" section should be
noted. In particular, check that the protective ground connection is secured with a tooth
lock washer, as per the diagram "Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal".
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the protective
grounding should be checked again.
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected at the
same time. (The selection for IEC : Eth e r n e t M e d i a should be noted.)
Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective earth) with a

cross section at least 1.5 mm² must be connected to the protective grounding
conductor terminal on the detachable HMI at one end and on the other end to the
protective grounding conductor terminal on the device’s case. Both the detachable
HMI and the device have to be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to the
detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be subjected to
dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable HMI next to
high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent induced currents that
would lead to electromagnetic interferences.
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P139 overcurrent and control devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons
and shipped with outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and
unpacking devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting
documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device from the
inside carton. The design revision level of each module included in the device when
shipped can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of
components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper

mechanical condition.
If the P139 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-1

(continued)
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P139 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of
the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the
P139 packaging.
P139 P139-XXXXXXX-307-41x-614 Diagram P139.40x xx.yy
Unom / NE,nom = 50 ... 130 V Inom = 1 / 5 A IN,nom = 1 / 5 IEP,nom = A fnom = 50/60 Hz

A
UH,nom = UN,nom = 24 ... 250 V DC CE

Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1 P139 type identification label
The P139 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this manual.
5-2 P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P139 has been designed to conform to DIN 57 435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P139.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,
3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-3

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P139 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P139 is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figure 5-2
shows such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2 Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case
The opening width

for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213mm (shown in this figure)
for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435mm
The other dimensions are the same for all cases.
5-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P139 is mounted on a cabinet door,
special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for
the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5 "Protective and

Operational Grounding"
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P139 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or –
for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame) is
used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity class of the
shock resistance test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of the shock
resistance test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases and for the detachable HMI can
be found in section “Dimensional Drawings“ in chapter 4.
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P139 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or the front
element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken down. The local
control panel is removed as described below:
Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180°up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
Remove the M3 screws (see Figure ).
Then remove the local control panel.
The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P by a plug-
in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the
connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Figure 5-3). Now insert the P139 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper
M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this,
replace the local control panel.
Note: If the control panel thickness ≥ 2 mm, the longer M3 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-5

(continued)
Beforeinstallation , loosen If panel thickness > 2 mm

theupper screws andinsert replacetheM3andM4
thedevice. screws by thelonger
screws provided.
Completely removethe
lower screws before
installation.
12Y6181 A_EN
5-3 Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
The P139 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with
angle brackets and frame, see figure 5-5)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
5-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-4, c and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see
Figure 5-5).
Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-4 Mounting the angle brackets
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-7

(continued)
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204 mm
Frame for the
80 mm
W idt h: 2 nted cas
e
s h-m ou
40T E flu
12Y6183 B_EN
5-5 Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame)
Example for a device in a 40 TE case.
The cover frame width

of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm
of the 84 TE case is: 486 mm
The cover frame height is

for all cases: 204 mm
The device has an increased mechanical robustness, if flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame, shown on this page) is used for
the flush-mounted cases.
5-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a second
sub-rack to form a 19" mounting rack (see Figure 5-6). The second sub-rack can be
another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel. Fit the
19" mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Figure 5-7.
5-6 Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19" mounting rack
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-9

(continued)
5-7 Installing the P139 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack
5-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.
19Y5220A_EN
5-8 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal
The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the
safety given by this set-up.
The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-11

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P139 overcurrent and control device must be connected in accordance with the
terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. The terminal
connection diagram is included in the supporting documents supplied with the device.
The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P139 are to be found in
Chapter 5.
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P139. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P139. Copper conductors having a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to
connect binary signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P139 power supply, it must be ensured
that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the nominal value
of the auxiliary system voltage.
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
5-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Connecting the time-

overcurrent protection
measuring circuits
The system current and voltage transformers must be connected in accordance with the
standard schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-9. It is essential that the grounding
configuration shown in the diagram be followed. If the CT or VT connection is reversed,
this can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
The P139 is generally fitted with four current-measuring inputs. Three-pole or two-pole
connection is possible to suit the individual power system and substation.
5-9 Standard schematic diagram for time-overcurrent protection
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-13

(continued)
Connecting the measuring

circuits for ground fault
direction determination
If the P139 is to function using ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values (the GFDSS function), then the T 4 current transformer must be connected to a
core balance current transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreen configuration. If
the metal shield of the cable is routed through the core balance transformer, the ground
wire must be fed through the core again before it is connected to ground. The cable
sealing end must be attached so that it is isolated from ground. This ensures that any
currents flowing through the shield will not affect measurement.
The steady-state ground fault direction determination requires either the three
phase-to-ground voltages or, alternatively, the neutral-point displacement voltage from
the open delta winding of a voltage transformer assembly as the measured voltage.
The phase voltages are drawn from the same transformers like the measured variables
for the time voltage protection. An additional voltage transformer (T 90) is available in
the P139 to connect an open delta winding. When setting the protection function, the
selected voltage needs to be taken into account.
Figure 5-10 shows the standard connection for ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values where the voltage measuring circuit is connected to an open delta
winding. With this connection configuration, ‘forward/LS’ is displayed if a ground fault
occurs on the line side. A reversed connection is possible for the system current or
voltage transformer if the appropriate setting is configured (see Chapter 7).
5-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Connection to Connection to
Holmgreen group Core balance CT
A
B BS
C
19Z5290A_EN
5-10 Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration and core balance transformers
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-15

(continued)
Connecting protective
signaling
Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission,
depending on the operating mode selected. Twisted pair cores should be used as pilot
wires. Two or four cores are required. If only two cores are available, there must be an
all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and transmitted signals. The
coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for half the loop voltage. Figure 5-11
shows connection with two cores and Figure 5-12 connection with four cores.
The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm. rel. break con. or
Transm. rel. make con. In the first case the break contact of the transmitting relay must
be wired, and in the second case the make contact must be wired. The figures show the
connection for the setting Transm. rel. break con.
5-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
5-11 Connection of protective signaling with two cores
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-17

(continued)
5-12 Connection of protective signaling with four cores
5-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-13). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-13 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring these
components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O modules (X)
varies (see Chapter 2 “Technical Data”). Once the user has selected a bay type, the
P139 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function
assignments for the control of switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary
inputs and output relays for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in
the Appendix to this operating manual.
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or end of this chapter).
This is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary inputs can be
made as desired.
Connection of switchgear
units having direct motor
control
In the case of bay types having direct motor control, one binary input is configured for
the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering and resetting the motor
relay. Configuration of appropriate output relays to trigger the armature and shunt
windings of motors on load disconnect switches, isolating links or grounding switches is
in accordance with the ‘List of Bay Types’ (see Appendix). A connection example for a
direct motor control is shown in Figure 5-14.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-19

(continued)
5-14 Connection example for a direct motor control,

bay type No. 89 (A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
5-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface.
An IRIG-B interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 Ω must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female

connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a

control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-21

(continued)
An RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be
established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master
could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication
master, e.g. P139, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P139 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data
transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex
transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must
be observed:
Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in the
immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to national
standards.
All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both
ends.
Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible.

A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-
wire data link is shown in Figure 5-15, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-16 as
an example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1
on the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:

The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P139. The two devices situated at
either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to terminate the data
transmission conductor. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in
the P139, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be
connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:

Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically
full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P139, are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of
slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped
electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave
device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver
terminated with a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In most Schneider Electric MiCOM Px3x
devices, and also in the P139, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface
hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor
order number see Chapter 13).
5-22 P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
P139
P139
5-15 2-wire data link
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-23

(continued)
P139
P139
5-16 4-wire data link
5-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
5.7 Location Diagrams
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A N T X X X V X
CH1 alt. -/4J 6I 6I 24I 4I
CH2 -/4V/5V 6O 6O 8O 6O
Y
alt . alt . alt.
9T
A alt. T Y
ETH A 3J 4I
CH2 CH3 6V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
5-17 Location diagram for P139 in 40 TE case

- pin-terminal connection (P139 -411)
- Transformer module: Ring terminal connection, other modules pin-terminal connection (P139 -412)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A N T X X X X V
CH1 alt. -/4J 6I 6I 24I 4I
CH2 -/4V/5V 6O 6O 6O 8O
Y
alt. 9T alt. alt.
A alt . T Y
ETH A 3J 4I
CH2 CH3 6V
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
5-18 Location diagram for P139 in 84 TE case

- Ring-terminal connection (P139 -413)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-25

5.8 Terminal Connection Diagrams
Transformer Type T NCIT Type T Power Supply Type V Binary Type X Binary Type X
module -/4J -/4V/5V module 3J/6V Module 4I / 8O module 6I 6O module 24I
Ring Pin Voltage measuring X044 Low- level Ring Pin Ring Pin
X041 X041 inputs X_1 X_1 Output Relays X_1 X_1 Output relays Ring Pin Signal inputs
X054 inputs
Option: 4 VA-G,1 +
U 1 1 1 1 X_1 X_1 V in
13 1 VAG
U51 2 2
5 - K_01 2 2 1 1
T5 # U_01
14 2 VBG 6 3 3 3 3 2 2
U_02
15 3 VCG T6 1 VB-G,1 +
U 4 4 4 4 K_1 3 3
16 4 T7 2 - U52 5 5 5 5 4 4
U_03
# U_04
17 5 VNG 3 6 6 K_02 6 6 K_2 5 5
T90 U_05
18 6 7 VC-G,1 + U 7 7 7 7 6 6
8 - U53 8 8 8 8 7 7
U_06
# U_07
Option: 9 9 9 K_03 9 9 8 8
11 7 K_3 9 9
U_08
Vref
12 8 T15 X045 X_2 X_2
X055 10 1 10 1
4 VA-G,2 +
U 11 2 K_04 11 2 K_4 X_2
V in
Current measuring 5 -
U54 12 3 K_05 12 3 10 1
# U_9
inputs 6 Vref / 13 4 K_06 13 4 11 2
X042 Option: 1 VB-G,2 +
U 14 5 K_07 14 5 12 3
U_10
U55 U_11
1 1 IA T1 2 - 15 6 15 6 K_5 13 4
# U_12
2 2 3 16 7 K_08 16 7 14 5
U_13
3 3 IB T2 7 VC-G,2 +
U 17 8 17 8 K_6 15 6
U56 U_14
4 4 8 - 18 9 16 7
# U_15
5 5 IC T3 9 Signal Inputs 17 8
6 6 18 9 18 9
U_16
UE
7 7 IN T4 X046 U_01 X_3 Signal inputs
8 8 X056 X_3 19 1 Vin
4 IA + U 19 1 U_1 X_3
U57 V in
5 - 20 2 20 2 Vin 19 1
# UE U_18
6 21 3 U_02 21 3 20 2
1 IB + U 22 4 22 4 U_2 21 3
U_18
U58 UE Vin U_19
2 - U_03 22 4
# U_20
3 23 5 UE 23 5 Vin U_3 23 5
U U_21
7 IC + 24 6 U_04 24 6 24 6
8 -
U59 25 7 U_4 25 7
U_22
# Vin
9
U_23
Power Supply 26 8
U_5 U_24
25 7 + UH 26 8 Vin 27 9
26 8 - U100 27 9
27 9 PE U_6
5-19 Terminal connection diagrams P139 (part 1 of 2)

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot. See also section 5.5 for the Protective and Operational Grounding.
5-26 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Analog Type Y RTD module Type Y Communication Type A

module 4I 9T module CH1 / CH2
Temperature Per order

Ring Pin
X_1 X_1 Measuring outputs X_1 meas. inputs Channel 1
1 1 1 U optical fiber link
2 2 K_01 2 T1 U81 X7
3 3 valid 3 # 1
X//Y U17
4 U
4 4
U 5 T2 U82 X8
5 5
# 6 # 1 X//Y U18
6 6 7 U
0..20 mA U_08 8 T3 U83
7 7 9 # or wire link
8 8 K_02 X9
valid X// Y
9 9 1
X_2 2 D2[ R]
X_2 1 3
U U19
10 1 U 2 T4 U84 4
11 2 3 # 5 D1[ T]
#
12 3 4 U
0..20 mA U_09 5 T5 U85 RS 485
6 #
7 U
Signal and 8 T6 U86 Channel 2
measuring inputs 9 # wire link only
13 4
Vin U_01
14 5 X10
X// Y
15 6 X_3 1
Vin U_02
16 7 1 U 2 D2[ R]
17 8 2 T7 U87 3
Vin U_03 U20
3 # 4
18 9 4 5 D1[ T]
Vin U_04 U
5 T8 U88
X_3 6 # RS 485
19 1 7 U
20 2
U
U_05 8 T9 U89 IRIG-B
21 3 0..20 mA
# 9 # time synchronization
22 4 U X11
23 5 PT100 U_06 1 # U21
24 6 # #
Communication Type A Communication Type A Binary Type X

module ETH / CH2 module CH3 module 6O
Per order Per order

Ring Pin
IEC 61850 COMM3 X_1 X_1 Output relays
optical fiber link ST optical fiber link 1 1
X7 X31 2 2 K_01
RX X/Y U17 1 3 3
X//Y U22
4 4
X8 X32 5 5
TX X/Y U18 1 6 6
X//Y U23
7 7
8 8 K_02
or or wire link 9 9
optical fiber link SC X33
X13 X// Y
1
RX
U26 2 D2[ R] X_2
3 10 1 1)
TX X/Y 4
U24
11 2
5 D1[ T] 12 3
13 4 1)
RS 485 14 5 K_03
15 6
and wire link or wire link
16 7
X12
X//Y 17 8
1
X//Y U25 X34
18 9
1
RJ45 M5[DCD]
2
D2[R] X_3
3
D1[T] 19 1 1)
COMM2 4
E U27 20 2 K_04
wire link 5
E2[G] 21 3
22 4 1)
X10 7 +UB
1
X//Y 23 5 K_05
24 6
2 D2[ R]
3
RS 232 25 7
U20 26 8 K_06
4
27 9
5 D1[ T]
RS 485
5-20 Terminal connection diagrams P139 (part 2 of 2)

Notes: ‘_’ is a placeholder for the slot. See also section 5.5 for the Protective and Operational Grounding.
1)
The binary (I/O) module X (6xO) is now optionally available with 4 static outputs, parallel to the make contacts K_02.2,
K_03.1, K_04, K_05.
The RTD module is equipped with a grounding bar providing connectors for the 9 cable shields.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 5-27

5-28 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614
6 Local Control Panel
Local control panel

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel. All data
required for operation of the protection device is entered from the local control panel,
and the data important for system management is read out there as well. The following
tasks can be handled from the local control panel:
Controlling switchgear units

Readout and modification of settings
Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and a
specific operating program.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The local control panel includes a LCD display with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels
(divided semi graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each), twelve function keys and
17 LED indicators.
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
C
HEALTHY G
EDIT MODE
O I L/R
6-1 View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators on case 40T and case 84T devices
6-2 P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels. Data
such as the switching status or the measured operating values is displayed at the panel
level and provides an up-to-date overview of the status of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected
event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree,
press the "READ" key . G
Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel (s) Event Panel
(state-dependent)
P432 Page H 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Fault 17:58:44 Record View
Signals 17:58:44 Ground fault 17:58:44
P432 Page B 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Overload 17:58:44
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
G
P432 Page A 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Meas. values 17:58:44 Events 17:58:54 Operat. data record.
BB1 MAIN: Voltage A-B prim.
20.04.98
BB2 M.c.b. trip V EXT 20.7 kV 05:21:32.331 ARC
Q Q PBB : Voltage B-C prim.
Enabled
1 2 PS 1 active 20.6 kV Start
PBB : Voltage C-A prim.
Q
PS 2 active 20.8 kV
0 23:58:17.501 MAIN
G
MAIN: Current IA prim. CB closed sig. EXT
Q Bay interlock. act. 416 A End
8 MAIN: Current IB prim. 21.04.98
Locked Subst. interl. act. 415 A
Remote 05:21:32.331 DEV01
Current IC prim.
1088 A ↑ 417 A Switch.device closed
Curr. IP,max prim. ↓ Start
↑↓ ↑↓
Gerätetyp
Control and Display Panels
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logical state signals
Parameter subset...
Control
Menu tree
6-2 Display panels and menu tree
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-3

(continued)
Display panels
The following display panels are available with the P139:
Bay Panel
Signal Panel
Measured Value Panels, which are called up according to system conditions
Event Panel
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a one line
diagram. If user-defined bay types are applied, resulting information may be sub-divided
into up to eight pages. A maximum of 28 physical and logic binary status may be
configured to one Signal Panel and, depending on the operating mode, acknowledged.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. Only the
Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and
its associated range of functions are actually available.
The Event Panel displays the most recent events, each with a time tag, such as the
opening of a switchgear unit.
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The
data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed
either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the
user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of
measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sub-
level is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as ‘OR’.
6-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Short description of keys

G
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ Keys /
Panel Level:
The effect of using the ‘Up’ and ‘Down’ keys differs between the individual panels.
Bay Panel: The ‘Up’/‘Down’ keys switch between the measured

values selected for this panel.
Signal Panel: The ‘Up’/‘Down’ keys switch between the pages of the
Measured Value Panel.
Event Panel: The ‘Up’/‘Down’ keys switch between the pages of the
Event Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys to navigate up and down through the menu tree in a
vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys in this mode to change
the setting value.
(‘Up’ key: the next higher value is selected.
‘Down’ key: the next lower value is selected.)
With list settings, press the ‘up’ and ‘down’ key to change the logic operator of the
value element.
‘Left’ and ‘Right’ Keys /

Panel Level:
Bay Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between the individual
Bay Panel pages.
Signal Panel: Pressing the 'Right'/'Left' keys switches between Bay Panel
and Measured Value Panel.
Measured Value Panel: Pressing the ‘Right’/Left’ keys switches between Signal
Panel and Event Panel.
Event Panel: Pressing the 'Right'/'Left' keys switches between Measured
Value Panel and Bay Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
Press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the menu tree in a horizontal
direction. If the unit is in input mode, the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys have a different
function.
Input mode:
Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the LED
indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys are pressed, the cursor
positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves one digit to the
right or left.
(‘Left’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
‘Right’ key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list setting, press the ‘left’ and ‘right’ keys to navigate through the list
of items available for selection.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-5

(continued)
ENTER Key
G
Panel Level:
By pressing the ENTER key at the Panel level, the user can go to the first menu tree
level.
Menu Tree Level:
To enter the input mode, press the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and leave the input mode. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
CLEAR Key C G
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Panel Level:
Bay Panel:
If the CLEAR key is pressed while selecting a switchgear unit on the Bay Panel then
the selection of the switchgear unit is canceled. The LED indicators are not reset in
this procedure.
Signal Panel:
A selected flashing signal may be acknowledged individually by pressing the CLEAR
key. This acknowledgement will switch the flashing signal to a static status but will
not cause the LED indicators to reset or clear measured event data.
Menu Tree Level:
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input
mode is exited.
G
READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
Local/Remote Key L/R

The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal input
has been configured for this function.
The local/remote key is the transfer switch between remote and local control (setting
R↔L), or between remote&local and local control (setting R&L ↔ L). If the
local/remote key is set to transfer from remote to local control then this can only take
place if the L/R password has been entered first. Switching from local control to
remote control occurs without checking for the password.
Page Key
Panel Level:
Pressing the page key shows the next panel.
Menu Tree Level:
When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited and the Bay Panel is
accessed.
6-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Selection Key
Bay Panel:
The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local control is
activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the switchgear
unit to be controlled. The selected external device will be marked by an asterisk (*) –
as long as no external device names are displayed. Otherwise the external device
name will flash and will be displayed in the status line.
Signal Panel:
The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet acknowledged) and will
also automatically switch to pages that might be available. When the last flashing
signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again will start with the first
flashing signal.
OPEN Key O
The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
Pressing the OPEN key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the ‘open’ status.
CLOSE Key I
The CLOSE key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
Pressing the CLOSE key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the ‘closed’ status.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-7

(continued)
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be
changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter
key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. An underscored
external device name in the Bay Panel indicates a selected switchgear unit. The
examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this
manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.2 Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the display is at the Panel Level. The Bay Panel is
displayed.
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Jumping from Panel Level to
Menu Tree Level 0 Example of a display after start-up of the X YYY 10:33:22
device. SS1
SS2
Note: Q1 Q2
When the device is delivered, it is set for a

dummy bay without switchgear units. Q0
Therefore only the name of the device appears
on the Bay Panel. The display shown in the Q9
example will not appear until a ‘real’ bay type Q8
has been selected. Locked

Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel

G
X YYY
Parameters
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
Jumping from Menu Tree

Level to Panel Level 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
jump to the Panel Level from any position No (=off)
within the menu tree.
1 Pressing the Page key. or

X YYY 10:33:22
SS1
SS2
Alternatively first press the ‘up’ key and hold it G
down while pressing the CLEAR key. + C
G
Q1 Q2
Note: Q0
It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and Q9
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data.
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC"), the display
will switch automatically to the Bay Panel.
6-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.3 Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
‘return time illumination’ (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed. Pressing
any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case the control
action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation of the
display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function ‘return time illumination’ is set
to ‘blocked’.
6.4 Control at Panel Level
At Panel Level, the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing the Page
key (in one direction only) or the ‘left’/’right’ keys (in both directions).
6.4.1 Bay Panel
Information displayed on
the Bay Panel
Figure 6-3 shows an example of a Bay Panel. The top line shows the device type on the
left and the current time of day on the right. Together with a customized Bay Type with
more than one Bay Panel page the top line will include a page marker in the center. The
page markers run from "Page A" (first page) to "Page H" (eighth page).
The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of the set
BayType. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent the
switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of switchgear units.
The user can switch between character sets 1, 2, and 3. Character set 3 is identical to
character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be replaced by a user-defined character
set – by using a special ancillary tool. The symbols of character set 2 are used in the
following description.
The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay interlock is
active. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or local control is
permitted. In the example shown here, remote control is activated. The two lines at the
bottom contain measured value data. The arrows to the right of the measured value
data indicate that additional measured values can be called up by pressing the ‘up’ or
’down’ keys.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-9

(continued)
X YYY 10:33:22
SS1
SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
6-3 Example of a Bay Panel
Representation of the external

devices with
External devices State Character set 1 Character set 2
Circuit breaker Off
On
‘In-motion’, ’Faulty’
Switch disconnector Off
On
Disconnector Off
On
Switch truck Off
On
Fuse Off
On
6-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)

Action
Measured value display in the
Bay Panel 0 Measured values are shown one at a time. X YYY 10:33:22
A configuration step determines whether the

SS1
SS2
measured value will also be displayed in bar Q1 Q2
chart form. The position of the bar chart can
also be set for horizontal or vertical display (the
setting applies to all measured values). The
Q0
arrows under the bar chart indicate that Q9
additional measured values can also be Locked

Q8
displayed. Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
G
1 By pressing the ‘up’ or ‘down’ key the next or
X YYY 10:33:25
measured value is displayed. In the example

SS1
SS2
shown, no bar chart display has been Q1 Q2
configured for the measured value.
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1000 A
Curr. IA prim.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-11

(continued)
Controlling switchgear
units
Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the unit has
been set for 'local control'. If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and
local control (R↔L), then the switch from 'remote' to 'local' operation requires a
password. When more than one Bay Panel page is used only joint 'local/remote'
switching is available.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and the
factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the
section 'Changing the Password') the following description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 Select the Bay Panel. X YYY 10:33:22
SS1
SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
L/R
1 Press the 'local/remote' key (L/R) to switch XX YYY 10:33:25
the device to local operation. The Bay Panel is
no longer displayed. The device type appears ********
in the first line and eight asterisks (*) appear in
the fourth line as a prompt to enter the
password.
2a Press the following keys in sequence:

G
XX YYY 10:33:27
‘left’
G
‘Down’ G
XX YYY 10:33:29
G
‘Right’ G
XX YYY 10:33:31
G
‘Up’ G
XX YYY 10:33:33
The display will change as shown in the
G
column on the right.

*
6-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. X YYY 10:33:25
If the correct password has been entered, the SS1

SS2
Bay Panel will re-appear. The third line from Q1 Q2
the bottom will display ‘Local’.
If an invalid password has been entered, the Q0
display shown above in Step 1 will appear. Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
C
2b This control step can be canceled at any X YYY 10:33:22
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the

SS1
SS2
ENTER key is pressed. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
3a Press the Selection key to select a X YYY 10:33:28
switchgear unit. Only switchgear units that are

SS1
SS2
electrically controllable can be selected. The Q1 Q2
external device designation for the selected
switchgear unit –‘Q0’, for example – is
displayed in flashing characters (underlined in
Q0
the example to the right) and also appears in Q9
the bottom line of the display. If the display of Locked

Q8
external device designations has been Local

1088 A
disabled, the selected switchgear unit will be Q0
marked by a flashing asterisk (*). The

designation of the selected external device
appears in the bottom line of the display.
3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear C

X YYY 10:33:28
unit, press the CLEAR key. Press the

SS1
SS2
Selection key to select a new switchgear unit. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-13

(continued)

Action
After selecting a switchgear unit, press the
keys “Open”
O
or
“Close”
to control the switchgear unit. Before this I
switching action is executed, compliance with

bay interlock conditions – if applicable – is
checked.
4a If the check of bay interlock conditions X YYY 10:33:33
determines that an operation can be carried

SS1
SS2
out, then the switch command is executed. Q1 Q2
The ‘in-motion’ (intermediate position) symbol
is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating.
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit X YYY 10:33:35
has elapsed, the resulting switching status is SS1

displayed. SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
4b If the check of interlock conditions X YYY 10:33:35
determines that switching is not allowed, then

SS1
SS2
the selected switchgear unit is no longer Q1 Q2
highlighted.
If the LED indicators have been configured
accordingly, the LED indicator for ‘Interlock
Q0
equations violated’ will be illuminated. Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
5 If no control action takes place within a set

time period after selection of a switchgear unit
or if the return time for illumination has
elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
6-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)

Action
L/R
6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to X YYY 10:33:38
remote control; this is accomplished without a

SS1
SS2
password prompt. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-15

(continued)
6.4.2 Signal Panel(s)
The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical binary
states that the device has available. The top line in the display shows the panel
designation 'Signals' and the current time of day. The following empty line separates the
heading from actual signals. This gives display capacity of up to seven signals to one
Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than seven signals have been
configured. As with all other panels, switching between pages is carried out
automatically, after the parameter panel hold-time (LOC: H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s )
has elapsed, or manually by pressing the ‘Up’/‘Down’ keys.
Each signal consists of two lines. The first line shows a status marker (square)
F clear Signal inactive / not powered or

J black Signal active / powered or
ÑFÒ flashing Signaling
and the associated function group. The second line shows the full text for this signal.
Automatic activation
When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set (L O C : A u t . a c t i v . S i g n . P a n e l )
each status change of signals, configured to a panel, is automatically switched from the
Bay Panel page or the Operation Panel/Event Panel (depending on the actual selection)
to the Signal Panel. Depending on the range of functions available in the device, the
displays of Overload Panels, Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a higher priority
and will be shown when an event has occurred. Using the Page key will make the
display jump to the other panels at any time.
Status display and

signaling
To differentiate between the states 'signal active / powered' and 'signal inactive / not
powered' shown on the Signal Panel the parameter (L O C : S t a t . i n d . S i g n . P a n e l ) is
used. This will distinguish between a clear/black square alone and the simultaneous
change over from normal display to highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the
status marker will remain unchanged!).
By using the parameter (L O C : I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ) the signaling of status

changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled. There is a difference between no
signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary, but, if so configured, the Signal Panel is
switched on at any status change), signaling by the flashing status marker ÑFÒalone
or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal display to highlighting of text
and the status marker). The flashing frequency is fixed and may not be changed.
6-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Each status change of signals, configured to a panel of the Bay Panel page can be set to
call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal lines flash when a
new event has occurred. The switching control will then automatically switch to the
page, which includes the first signal that has experienced a status change. After
pressing the Selection key this flashing signal is selected on the current page (signal
preceded by a flashing cursor “>“). The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing
the Selection key again. At this point it may occur that the display will automatically
jump to the next page. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the
Selection key again will start with the first flashing signal.
Depending on L O C : S i g n . c a u s . S i g n . P a n e l the cause of a flashing signal may

be set. Either each status change of the binary information or only "incoming" edges for
transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. The status change is generally shown as
"storing" i.e. the flashing signal will remain until it has been acknowledged.
Acknowledging flashing
signals
Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the
CLEAR key C . This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only acknowledge
the display. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed and a static status
display will appear. Then the display will automatically jump to the next flashing signal.
This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing signals by multiple pressing of the
CLEAR key. As long as the Selection key is pressed and no resetting has occurred
the current page will be continuously displayed (no automatic switching to the next
page). The selection will remain active until the time set in L O C : R e t u r n t i m e
s e l e c t has elapsed. When the time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page.
During an active selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous
page by pressing the 'up’ or 'down' keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the
Event Panel).
Status change signaling

In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device has two
internal logic signals available.
As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been
acknowledged, L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l s t a t . will show the status change of the
Signal Panel as a static signal. This signal is made available in the selection tables for
the function groups LED, OUTP, LOGIC, PC, COMM1 and COMM2.
The second internal logic signal L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l f l a s h . shows the status

change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about 0.5 Hz.
This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function groups LED,
OUTP and LOGIC. It is generated independent of the operating mode as set in
L O C : I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ; for example a LED configured to this signal will also be
triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to "without signaling".
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-17

(continued)
Description Display
1 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0
display by status markers (squares) I N P :

S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T
2 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0
display by status markers (squares) and I N P :

highlighting of lines S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T
3a Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers.
Cursor “>” is flashing
3b Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers and highlighting of
text.
Cursor “>” and highlighted text are flashing
6-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.4.3 Measured Value Panels
Measured Value Panels

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled ‘Setting a List Parameter’ for instructions regarding selection. The
measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or placeholder in the list
of selected measured values. If the M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been
selected for a given panel, then that panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key C , for example.

Action
0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Meas. values 16:57:33
type of measured values being displayed. In Voltage A-B prim.

this example, the display shows measured 20.7 kV
operating values (abbreviated as Voltage B-C prim.
'Meas. values'). The time of day is shown at 20.6 kV
Voltage C-A prim.
the upper right of the display. 20.8 kV
Up to six selected measured values can be Current A prim.
displayed on the Panel simultaneously. 415 A
Current B prim.
416 A
Current C prim.
417 A
1 If more than six measured values have been or

Meas. values 16:57:35
selected, they can be viewed one page at a Voltage A-B norm.

time by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys. The 0.7 Vnom
device will also show the next page of the Voltage B-C norm.
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time 0.6 Vnom
Voltage C-A norm.
for Panels (setting in menu tree: 0.8 Vnom
"Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed. Current A norm.
1.5 Inom
Current B norm.
1.6 Inom
Current C norm.
1.7 Inom
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-19

(continued)
6.4.4 Event Panel
The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation, each with the complete time
tag (date and time of day). A maximum of three signals are displayed. The Event Panel
is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree: "Oper/Rec/OP_RC").

Action
0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Events 16:57:33
panel designation and the current time of day. 20.04.98

Below this line, the signals are shown in 05:21:32.331 MAIN
chronological order. The arrows at the bottom Trip command
of the display area indicate that additional Start
signals can also be displayed. 05:21:35.501 MAIN

Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start
1 Pressing the ‘up’ or ‘down’ keys will display or

Events 16:57:35
the signals one at a time.

05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/Faulty
Start
08:10:59.688 MAIN
Blocked/Faulty
End
6-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and
Function Groups
All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three main folders
‘Settings’, ‘Measurements & Tests’ and ‘Fault & Event Records’, which form the first
folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the entire folder structure
consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
plane 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-4 Basic menu tree structure
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-21

(continued)
6.5.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals, and measured
values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode the settings,
signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain text descriptions. In
either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch of the menu tree as
well as the display panel headers are displayed in plain text in both modes. Bay Panel
displays are also always in plain text. In the following examples, the display is shown in
plain text mode only.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Device on-line
text mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C

+
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key and or 0
either the ‘left’ key or the ‘right’ key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
6-22 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.5.3 Parameter Change Enable
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated value
by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This safeguard
prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.

Global change-enabling
function
To activate the global change-enabling function, set the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter
to ‘Yes’ (menu tree: ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes – with the exception of specially protected control actions (see section
‘Password-Protected Control Actions’) – are enabled without entering the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
Password input prior to any setting change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The following example is based on the factory-
set password. If the password has been changed by the user (see section 'Changing the
Password'), the following description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/LOC’, select Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
the ‘Param. change enabl.’ parameter. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

G

appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: G

Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
‘left’
G
No
*
‘Right’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
G
No
*
‘up’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
G
No
*
‘down’. G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The display will change as shown in the Param. change enabl.
G
column on the right. No

*
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Param. change enabl.
indicates that the setting can now be changed No
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-23

(continued)

Action
3 Change the setting to ‘Yes’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
G
Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again.
G
The LED Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further setting changes.
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-enabling
function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single setting change
only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-enabling function is
preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling function has been
activated.
6-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time (menu
tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by either pressing
the Page key or by first pressing the ‘Up’ key and then holding it down and also pressing
the CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the ‘up’ key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be changed.
With some settings it is additionally required that the device is switched to "offline" (Menu
tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN: Device on-line). Such settings include the configuration
settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The
following entries in the "Change" column of the address list (see appendix) indicate
whether values can be changed or not:
"on": The value can be changed when the device is switched to "on-line".
"off": The value can only be changed when the device is switched to "offline".
"-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is delivered with the factory-setting to "offline".
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-25

(continued)
6.5.4 Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example, the change-enabling function Yes
is activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired setting by pressing the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
keys.
G
50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the ‘left’ or ’right’ keys to move the

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
cursor to the left or right.
G
50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
by pressing the ‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In the
G
50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
5 Press the ENTER key.

G
The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting for a value
change.
C
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further setting can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-26 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter
Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements that will be
displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number ’m’ that can be
selected out of the total number ’n’ of the set is given in the address list in the ’Remarks’
column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an ‘OR’ operator. Other
operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function
group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary input
signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For
the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.

Action
0 Select a list setting (in this example, the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
‘Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN’ in the menu tree). The
down arrow (È) indicates that a list setting has
been selected.
1 Press the ‘down’ key.

G
The first function and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

the first selected signal will appear in the third
G
#01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip zone 1
‘#01’ in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If 'MAIN: Without function’ appears
as the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has yet been made.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
by pressing the ‘right’ and ’left’ keys. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
G
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip zone 2
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
pressing the ‘right’ and ‘left’ keys in the input
G
#02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4
5 Select the operator or the class using the

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
‘up’ and ’down’ keys. In this particular case,
G
OR #02 DIST
only the ‘OR’ operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-27

(continued)

Action
G
The LED indicator Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the ‘OR’

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the ‘up’ key to exit the list at any point

G
Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
in the list.
G
C
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
Deleting a list setting

If ‘MAIN: Without function’ is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6-28 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.5.6 Memory Readout
Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does not
necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even switching the device to
"offline". Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/OP_RC’: Operating data memory

In the menu tree ‘Oper/Rec/MT_RC’: Monitoring signal memory
Event memories
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/FT_RC’: Fault memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/OL_RC’: Overload memories 1 to 8
In the menu tree ‘Events/Rec/GF_RC’: Ground fault memory 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-29

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Entries in the operating
data memory are displayed on the Event Panel.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the operating

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
data memory. The latest entry is displayed.
G
Enabled USER
No
2 Press the ‘left’ key repeatedly to display the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
entries one after the other in chronological G
Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the ‘left’
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the ‘right’ key to display the previous

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.97 11:33 ARC
entry.
G
Enabled USER
No
4 Press the ‘up’ key at any point within the

G
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
operating data memory to return to the entry
G
point.
6-30 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an ‘overflow’ signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the monitoring

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed.
G
Checksum error param
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to display

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
the entries one after the other in chronological
G
Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the ‘overflow’
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the ‘left’ key to display the previous

G
Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
entry.
G
Checksum error param
4 If the ‘down’ key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred G
First: 13:33:59.744
Currently: The fault is still being detected Active: Yes
G
(Yes) or is no Reset: No
longer detected (No) by the self- Number: 5
monitoring function.
Reset: The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and
has been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.

G
Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
G
point.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-31

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories (records)
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the ‘down’ key to enter the fault

G
Fault recording 1
FT_RC
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In
G
Event
this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the ‘right’ key repeatedly to see first

G
Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary
G
Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the time, measured from
the onset of the fault, at which the value was
measured or the binary signal started or G
Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the ‘right’ key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the ‘right’ key again will
have no effect.
G
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
G
Record. in progress
End
3 Press the ‘left’ key to see the previous

G
Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
measured value or the previous signal.
G
Record. in progress
Start

G
Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point.
G
01.01.99 10:00:33
6-32 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
6.5.7 Reset
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault – provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after injection testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate setting.
The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an example. In
this example the global change-enabling function has already been activated.

Action
0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

display shows the number of faults since the Reset recording
last reset, 10 in this example. 10
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Reset recording
10
Don't execute
2 Press the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys to change the

G
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
setting to ‘Execute’.
G
Reset recording
10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator

G
Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in Reset recording
line 3 is reset to ‘0’. 0
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C

Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
recordings after leaving the standard control Reset recording
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE 10
is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED

indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be
extinguished, and the fault recordings remain
stored in the device unchanged. Any setting
can be selected again for a value change by
pressing the keys.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-33

(continued)
6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Some actions initiated from the local control panel (e.g. a manual trip command for
testing purposes) can only be carried out after entering a password, and only if the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled 'Enabling
Parameter Changes'), so as to prevent any unwanted operations.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the global
change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a pre-defined
sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If the password has
been changed by the user (see section 'Changing the Password'), the following
description will apply accordingly.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN’, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
select the parameter ‘Man. trip cmd. USER’. Don't execute
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) G

Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence:

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
‘left’
G
Don't execute
*
‘Right’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘up’ G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Don't execute
*
‘down’. G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
The display will change as shown in the Man. trip cmd USER
G
column on the right. Don't execute

*
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man. trip cmd. USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the ‘up’ or ’down’ keys.
3 Change the setting to ‘Execute’.

G
Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
G
Execute
6-34 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)

Action
4 Press the ENTER key again.
G
The LED Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The Don't execute
unit will execute the command.
C
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will go out.
6.5.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’ keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
3
G
1 2
G
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-35

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
‘Password’ setting. ********
G
Eight asterisks (*) Par/Conf/LOC
Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys G

Par/Conf/LOC
to enter the valid password. The display will Password
G
change as shown in the column on the right. ********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Par/Conf/LOC

indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The Password
third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) _
as the prompt for entering a new password.
4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
example is done by pressing the UP key
G
*
followed by the DOWN key.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
G
Password
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

appear in the third line, and a cursor Password
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user **
_
to enter the new password again.
6-36 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the password.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
G
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again.
G
If the Par/Conf/LOC
Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
C
8 The change in password can be canceled at Par/Conf/LOC
Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see section ‘Enabling Parameter
Changes’).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-37

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

G
beginning of device startup, press the four
G
TEST
directional keys (‘left’, ‘right’, ‘up’ and ‘down’) at
the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during

G
Password
startup, the password is displayed.
G
1234
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
6-38 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Changing and displaying

the L/R password
In order to enable local control the L/R password has to be entered.

Action
0 In the menu tree ‘Par/Conf/LOC’, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
‘Password L/R’ setting. ********
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the ‘left’, ’right’, ‘up’ and ’down’ keys

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
to enter the valid general password. The
G
********
display will change as shown in the column on *
the right.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G
********
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The red LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be 1423
illuminated. The current Password L/R will
appear in the third line.
4 Enter the new password, which in this

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
example is done by pressing the UP key
G
*
followed by the DOWN key.
G
Par/Conf/LOC
G
Password L/R
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new Password L/R again.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 6-39

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the new Password L/R.

G
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
G
**
*
G
Par/Conf/LOC
G
Password L/R
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again.
G
If the new Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
Password L/R has been re-entered correctly, ********
the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished and the display appears as
shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
7b If the new Password L/R has been re- Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
entered incorrectly, the red LED indicator **
labeled EDIT MODE remains illuminated and _
the display shown on the right appears. The
new Password L/R needs to be re-entered. It
is also possible to cancel the change of the
Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
C
8 The change of the Password L/R can be Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
canceled at any time before Step 7 by pressing ********
the CLEAR key. If this is done, the original
Password L/R continues to be valid.
6-40 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameter
The P139 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located
in the folder titled ‘Parameters’ in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The 'Address List' in the Appendix lists all parameters, along with setting ranges and step
sizes or selection tables.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration of settings that in most cases
correspond to the default settings given in the Address List. If the factory settings differ
from the default settings, then this is indicated below at the appropriate points.
The default settings given in the Address List are activated after a cold restart.
The P139 is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note:
In the following tables (except for function group DVICE) an indication for the localization
of the corresponding function description is shown in the right hand side column.
"Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a
figure subtitle or accompanying text, "Page: 3-xxx" to a page.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P139. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P139 is modified.
Device DVICE: Device type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW version communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: DM IEC 61850 version 002 059
Software version of the communication software based on the device's

protocol per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version 002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model 002 121
Using the ‘text replacement tool’ provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier ‘0’ (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number 002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
DVICE: PCS Order No. 001 200
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
7-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 000 003
Order extension numbers for the device.

DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 050
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.

The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given
time.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 193
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: MAC address module A 104 061
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This
address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
Item number of module L in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module L 086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module L.

DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
Item number of module B in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version module B (a) 086 189
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
7-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Customer ID data 1 000 040
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
DVICE: Location 001 201
Reference input for the device’s location as selected by user.

DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1 000 048
DVICE: Device password 2 000 049

instructions.
DVICE: SW version DHMI 002 131
DVICE: SW version DHMI DM 002 132
Internal software version numbers.
Local control panel LOC: Local HMI exists 221 099
When set to 'Yes' it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Local control panel LOC: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.

LOC: Decimal delimiter 003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.

LOC: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Password L/R 221 040
The password used to change the setting from 'Remote' to 'Local' control
can be defined here. (Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote'control occurs
without checking the password.)
LOC: Displ. ext.dev.desig 221 032 Fig. 3-2
This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be

displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Display L/R 221 070 Fig. 3-2
This setting defines whether the control site – 'Local' or 'Remote' – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071 Fig. 3-2
This setting defines whether the 'Locked' or 'Unlocked' status shall be

displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Designation busbar 1 221 033 Fig. 3-2
Setting the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.

LOC: Designat. bus sect.1 221 035 Fig. 3-2
LOC: Designat. bus sect.2 221 036 Fig. 3-2
Setting the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.

LOC: Character set 221 038 Fig. 3-2
The user can choose between several character sets to represent

switchgear and their switching states on the Bay Panel. The symbols
assigned to the character sets are shown in Chapter 6: Local Control Panel.
Note:
Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory default setting,
but can be replaced by an user-defined character set, by applying an
accessory tool to the operating program.
7-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208 Fig. 3-8
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches

between remote / local control (L↔R) or between 'Remote' and 'Local'
control / 'Local' control (R&L↔L).
LOC: Fct. reset key 005 251 Fig. 3-86
Selection of specified counters or event logs that are reset by pressing the
RESET key on the local control panel.
LOC: Fct. read key 080 110
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 030 238
LOC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 030 239
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by

repeated reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel 053 007 Fig. 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel 053 005 Fig. 3-7
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

LOC: Fct. Grd.Fault Panel 053 004 Fig. 3-6
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003 Fig. 3-5
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Signal Panel 221 072 Fig. 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Aut.activ.Sign.Panel 221 073 Fig. 3-3
Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of

state of a configured signal.
LOC: Stat.ind.Sign.Panel 221 074 Fig. 3-3
Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Indicat.Sign.Panel 221 075 Fig. 3-3
Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge

command.
LOC: Sign.caus.Sign.Panel 221 078 Fig. 3-3
Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals

only).
LOC: Fct.asg. num. displ. 221 041 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in

numerical form.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
LOC: Fct. asg. bar displ. 221 042 Fig. 3-2
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar

form.
Note:
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for
display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured values
that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart
form! In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the
selection list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured
value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list
for numerical measured values.
Example:
Current IB is to be displayed. In this case, either the primary current IB or

the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The per-
unit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for
the bar chart display.
LOC: Bar display type 221 039 Fig. 3-2
Deactivation of the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar
chart to display measured values on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Scal. bar display I 221 044 Fig. 3-2
Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Scal. bar display V 221 045 Fig. 3-2
Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Display bar scale 221 046 Fig. 3-2
Setting this window can deactivate the scalable bar chart.

LOC: Hold-time for Panels 031 075 Fig. 3-4
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
LOC: Autom. return time 003 014 Fig. 3-4
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
LOC: Return time select. 221 030 Fig. 3-2
time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
LOC: Return time illumin. 003 023
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and
any switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled.
PC link PC: Name of manufacturer 003 183 Fig. 3-9
Setting the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
7-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
PC: Bay address 003 068 Fig. 3-9
PC: Device address 003 069 Fig. 3-9
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate 003 081 Fig. 3-9
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity bit 003 181 Fig. 3-9
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P139.
PC: Spontan. sig. enable 003 187 Fig. 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. spontan.sig. 003 189 Fig. 3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 084 Fig. 3-9
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 185 Fig. 3-9
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta V 003 055 Fig. 3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig. 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta P 003 059 Fig. 3-9
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta f 003 057 Fig. 3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs

by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 155 Fig. 3-9
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig. 3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-out 003 188 Fig. 3-9
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module B.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Function group COMM1 056 026
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration.

If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER 003 170 Fig. 3-16
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.

COMM1: Basic IEC870-5enable 003 215 Fig. 3-10
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 enable 003 216 Fig. 3-10
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable 003 217 Fig. 3-10
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable 003 220 Fig. 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 enable 003 231 Fig. 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER enable 103 040 Fig. 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat. protocol 003 167 Fig. 3-10
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178 Fig. 3-11
The user may select between two variants of the 103

protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is

enabled.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant 003 214 Fig. 3-14
The user may select between two variants of the

MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state 003 165 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
Setting for the line idle state indication.
COMM1: Baud rate 003 071 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
Baud rate of the communication interface.
7-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Parity bit 003 171 Fig: 3-11,

3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P139.
COMM1: Dead time monitoring 003 176 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
The P139 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling 003 202 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM1: Octet comm. address 003 072 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s was:
ILSA: Bay address
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 003 240 Fig. 3-15
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C OMM1 : Oc te t co mm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on 003 166 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13,
3-14, 3-15,
3-16
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Name of manufacturer 003 161 Fig: 3-11,

3-12, 3-13
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet address ASDU 003 073 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for C O M M 1 : Oc te t ad dress ASDU :
ILSA: D e vice address .
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable 003 177 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. 003 179 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication
interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 074 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 175 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta V 003 050 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig: 3-11,

3-12, 3-13
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta P 003 054 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta f 003 052 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 150 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
COMM1: Delta t (energy) 003 151 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted
via the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Contin. general scan 003 077 Fig: 3-11,
3-12, 3-13
A continuous or background general scan means that the P139 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication
interface during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures
that there will be data consistency with a connected control system. The
time to be set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Comm. address length 003 201 Fig. 3-12
Setting the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is
enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200 Fig. 3-12
Setting the length of the higher-order communication address.

enabled.
COMM1: Cause transm. length 003 192 Fig. 3-12
Setting the length of the cause of transmission.

enabled.
COMM1: Address length ASDU 003 193 Fig. 3-12
Setting the length of the common address for identification of telegram

structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig. 3-12
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification
of telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. 003 196 Fig. 3-12
Setting the length of the address for information objects.

enabled.
COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197 Fig. 3-12
Setting the length of the higher-order address for information objects.

enabled.
COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type 003 195 Fig. 3-12
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
enabled.
COMM1: Time tag length 003 198 Fig. 3-12
Setting the time tag length.

enabled.
7-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. 003 190 Fig. 3-12
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion 003 191 Fig. 3-12
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ. signal 003 199 Fig. 3-12
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

enabled.
COMM1: Balanced operation 003 226 Fig. 3-12
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
enabled.
COMM1: Direction bit 003 227 Fig. 3-12
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
enabled.
COMM1: Time-out interval 003 228 Fig. 3-12
Setting the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
enabled.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds 003 210 Fig. 3-14
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. 003 211 Fig. 3-14

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. 003 212 Fig. 3-14

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
measured value is given to the register no. 30301, the second to the
register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. 003 213 Fig. 3-14

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig. 3-14
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom.event confirm. 003 249 Fig. 3-14
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig. 3-14
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig. 3-15
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig. 3-15
Setting the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig. 3-15
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig. 3-15
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig. 3-15
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
7-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig. 3-15
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs 003 232 Fig. 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs 003 233 Fig. 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count. 003 234 Fig. 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. 003 235 Fig. 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp 003 236 Fig. 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) 003 250 Fig. 3-15
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master
for each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting
deadband'.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig. 3-15
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command selection 103 042 Fig. 3-16
Selection of commands to be issued via the Courier protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Signal selection 103 043 Fig. 3-16
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Meas. val. selection 103 044 Fig. 3-16
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Parameter selection 103 045 Fig. 3-16
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.

COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig. 3-16
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
7-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)

COMM2: General enable USER 103 170 Fig. 3-18

COMM2: Line idle state 103 165 Fig. 3-18
Setting for the line idle state indication.

COMM2: Baud rate 103 071 Fig. 3-18
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity bit 103 171 Fig. 3-18
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P139.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring 103 176 Fig. 3-18
The P139 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. time polling 103 202 Fig. 3-18
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Positive ackn. fault 103 203
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively

after transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
COMM2: Octet comm. address 103 072 Fig. 3-18
COMM2: Name of manufacturer 103 161 Fig. 3-18

COMM2: Octet address ASDU 103 073 Fig. 3-18
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable 103 177 Fig. 3-18
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. 103 179 Fig. 3-18
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication

interface 2.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 103 074 Fig. 3-18
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the

communication interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. 103 175 Fig. 3-18

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V 103 050 Fig. 3-18
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig. 3-18
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta P 103 054 Fig. 3-18
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta f 103 052 Fig. 3-18
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 103 150 Fig. 3-18

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig. 3-18
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
COMM3: General enable USER 120 030 Page: 3-26

COMM3: Baud rate 120 038 Page: 3-26
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source address 120 031 Page: 3-26
Address for send signals.

COMM3: Receiving address 120 032 Page: 3-26
Address for receive signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1 121 001 Page: 3-26
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 2 121 003
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1 120 001 Page: 3-26
COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 2 120 004
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1 120 002 Page: 3-27
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 2 120 005
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
COMM3: Oper. mode receive 5 120 014 Page: 3-27
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3: Default value rec. 1 120 060 Page: 3-28

COMM3: Default value rec. 2 120 061
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3: Time-out comm.fault 120 033 Fig. 3-21
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com mu nic a ti ons fau l t
and SFM ON : Co mm un ic .fa ul t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault 120 034 Page: 3-28
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
COMM3: Time-out link fail. 120 035 Fig. 3-21
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this

timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO MM 3 : Co mm . l ink fa i lur e
and SFM ON : Co mm .l ink fai l .COM M3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3: Limit telegr. errors 120 036 Page: 3-30
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l .e r r .) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.
7-22 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Function group IEC 056 059
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
IEC: General enable USER 104 000
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable configuration 104 058 Page: 3-35
This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain

consistency of all parameters in function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE,
they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is
sent to the device, the actual state of the previously changed parameter
setting of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data
model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically
with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.
IEC: Ethernet media 104 056
Selecting the physical communication channel on the Ethernet module from

either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering
option) connection.
IEC: IED name 104 057
Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as
device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical
Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous.
All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.
IEC: TCP keep-alive timer 104 062
This defines a "heart-beat" time interval used to actively monitor a

communication link to a logged-on client.
IEC: IP address 104 001
IEC: IP address 1 104 002
IP address for the device (IED has server function).

Note:
In the S&R 103 operating program, the complete IP address is displayed at
IEC : IP add ress . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: Subnet mask 104 005
IEC: Subnet mask 1 104 006
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note:
IEC : Sub net m ask . The device’s front panel display only displays the IP
address distributed to these four data model addresses.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Gateway address 104 011
IEC: Gateway address 1 104 012
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway of a

communication link to a client outside of the local network.
Note:
IEC : Ga tewa y add ress. The device’s front panel display only displays
the IP address distributed to these four data model addresses.
IEC: SNTP operating mode 104 200
Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server
transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each
device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization
signal after its own cycle time.
IEC: SNTP poll cycle time 104 201
Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode
is set to Request from Server.
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 104 202
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 1 104 203
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
IEC : SNT P ser ver 1 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 104 210
IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

Note:
IEC : SNT P ser ver 2 IP. The device’s front panel display only displays
IEC: Diff. local time 104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation
(IED).
IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207
Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time 104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time

is wanted.
7-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 220
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 221
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m 104 222
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t are the values 'first', 'second', 'third',
'fourth', and 'last'. For I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d the seven weekdays
are available so that for example a setting like "on the last Sunday in March"
may be used.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + 104 223
This defines the time difference and the time of day (on the specific
changeover day) when the clock is to be switched to daylight saving time.
The time is given in the number of minutes after midnight, e.g. when the
clock changeover to 3:00 AM always occurs at 2:00 AM, then the value to
be entered at I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is 120 [minutes] and at
I E C : D i f f . d a y l . s a v . t i m e it is 60 [minutes].
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 225
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 226
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 227
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ 104 228
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover
from daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for
the clock changeover to daylight saving time.
IEC: Update Measurements 104 229
Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report

Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP 104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater
than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for
each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d I P
IEC: Dead band IN 104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d IN
IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is
greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula:
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d VP P
IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is
step size measured value • s e tti ng IEC : Dead band VPG
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Dead band f 104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d f
IEC: Dead band P 104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d P
IEC: Dead band phi 104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for all φ Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t ti ng I EC : D ea d ba nd p hi
IEC: Dead band Z 104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e t ti ng I EC : D ea d ba nd min / ma x
IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB).
Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d ASC
IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values,
which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients.
The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this
formula:
step size measured value • s e t ti n g I EC : D e a d b a n d tem p .
IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks
(RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which
is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter
step size measured value • s e t ti ng I EC : D ea d ba nd 2 0m A
7-26 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC: Update cycle energy 104 060
Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB
transmission with setting to blocked!
IEC: DEV control model 221 081
Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices.

Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety
is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Function group GOOSE 056 068 Page: 3-35
Substation Event
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GOOSE: General enable USER 106 001 Page: 3-35
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE: Multic. MAC address 106 003
Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving

clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard
according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE
may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the
number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).
GOOSE: Application ID 106 004 Fig. 3-22
Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: Goose ID 106 002 Fig. 3-22
Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with
32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the
maximum of 10 monitored external devices
GOOSE: VLAN Identifier 106 006 Fig. 3-22
VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN
identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages,
if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC
addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the
network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.
GOOSE: VLAN Priority 106 007 Fig. 3-22
VLAN priority of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Reference 106 008 Fig. 3-22
DataSet Reference of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: DataSet Cfg.Revision 106 009 Fig. 3-22
Display of the 'DataSet Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is

sent from this device (IED).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011 Fig. 3-22
GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 013
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured
Dataset of GOOSE.
7-28 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual binary GOOSE input.
GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 001
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual binary GOOSE input.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)

for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a
chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device
(IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data
object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then
only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index
indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
7-30 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index
indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Input 1 default 107 005 Page: 3-37
GOOSE: Input 2 default 107 015
Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the
opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006 Page: 3-36
GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 016
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical

state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will
receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was
received with the Dataset of GOOSE
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000
7-32 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for

the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the
virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned
external devices.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED)

for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including
the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite
side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path
is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are
to be entered.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003
7-34 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element
in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this

device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute
element in the data object is to be evaluated.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005
Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to
default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a
GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether.
7-36 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Function group GSSE 056 060 Page: 3-38
Status Events
Cancelling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are
only active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if
the parameters of this function group have been activated through the
parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device
off-line/on-line.
GSSE: General enable USER 104 049 Page: 3-38
Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. cycle 104 052
Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition
cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with
this formula:
Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]
The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state
change of a GSSE bit pair.
GSSE: Max. cycle 104 053
Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to
calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated
value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max.
value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value
time.
GSSE: Increment 104 054
Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the
repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.
GSSE: Operating mode 104 055
In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC

address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed.
In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices
have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have
logged-on successfully, are read and processed.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Output 1 bit pair 104 101 Page: 3-38
GSSE: Output 2 bit pair 104 104
Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual
GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted
consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are
used by this device (IED) during a send operation.
7-38 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 104 102 Page: 3-38
GSSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 104 105
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GSSE

outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as
configured above.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 bit pair 105 001 Page: 3-38
GSSE: Input 2 bit pair 105 006
Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A
GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of
which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).
7-40 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002 Page: 3-38

GSSE: Input 2 IED name 105 007
IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 default 105 003
Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole
GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored
communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite
side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
7-42 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 105 004 Page: 3-38
GSSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 105 009
Function assignment of the virtual GSSE input to a binary logical state

signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the
protection or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive
the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with
GSSE
IRIG_B IRIGB: Function group IRIGB 056 072
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration.

IRIGB: General enable USER 023 200 Fig. 3-23
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary input
The P139 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the system. The
number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about
the configuration options for all binary inputs.
The P139 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this
slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are
automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function can be
assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from several
control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs U C01 to
U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether automatic
configuration occurs, is defined in the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O .)
Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 – pin type or ring type cable
socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
a 06 12
BSb 07 14
BSc 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-assignment – is
given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A
and B as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for
functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an
error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in
the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the
device. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will
not be activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence (active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal.
7-44 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-24
Input filter which is activated when either the mode "active ‘high’, filtered" or
active ‘low’, filtered" has been selected. In order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this
parameter to 6 [steps]. For further information see Chapter 3.
INP: Fct. assignm. U 301 152 217 Fig: 3-24,
3-255, 3-258,
3-259
INP: Fct. assignm. U 302 152 220
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
7-46 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Oper. mode U 301 152 218 Fig. 3-24

INP: Oper. mode U 302 152 221
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
7-48 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data input MEASI: Function group MEASI 056 030
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.

MEASI: General enable USER 011 100 Fig. 3-25
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.

MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig. 3-27
Setting the minimum current that must flow in order for the P139 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
MEASI: IDC< open circuit 037 191 Fig. 3-28
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P139 will issue an ‘open
circuit’ signal.
MEASI: IDC 1 037 150 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 2 037 152 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 3 037 154 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 4 037 156 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 5 037 158 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 6 037 160 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 7 037 162 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 8 037 164 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 9 037 166 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 10 037 168 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 11 037 170 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 12 037 172 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 13 037 174 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 14 037 176 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 15 037 178 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 16 037 180 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 17 037 182 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 18 037 184 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 19 037 186 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: IDC 20 037 188 Fig. 3-28
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that
has been set accordingly.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig. 3-28
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig. 3-29
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 037 193 Fig. 3-29
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.

MEASI: Type of TempSensors 004 254
Selection of the temperature sensor type (PT 100, NI 100 or NI 120).
7-50 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
binary outputs.
The P139 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at that slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden
in the menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating of the
binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter 'Technical Data'). One signal can also be
assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact
multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B! (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t
I / O .) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 – pin type or ring type
cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
a 06 12
BSb 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-assignment – is
given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A
and B are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays of slots A
and B are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be cancelled.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 301 151 045 Fig. 3-33

OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 302 151 048
7-52 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to output relays.

OUTP: Oper. mode K 301 151 046 Fig. 3-33
OUTP: Oper. mode K 302 151 049
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
Measured data output MEASO: Function group MEASO 056 020
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.

settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
MEASO: General enable USER 031 074 Fig. 3-35
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.

MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD 053 002 Fig. 3-39
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
7-54 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time output BCD 010 010 Fig. 3-39
Setting the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in
BCD form.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140 Fig. 3-39
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141 Fig. 3-39
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 037 142 Fig. 3-39
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 037 143 Fig. 3-39
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.

For measured values in the range "measured values to be issued" the output value
should change linearly with the measured value.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. BCD" ...

in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
with:
Display values Range

BCD display values "BCD-Out min. value" ...
for measured values in the range ... "BCD-Out max. value"
"measured values to be issued"
BCD display values "BCD-Out min. value"

for measured values = Mx,min.
BCD display values "BCD-Out max. value" ...

for measured values = Mx,max.
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 053 000 Fig. 3-41

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.

MEASO: Hold time output A-1 010 114 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Hold time output A-2 010 115
Setting the time period for output of the selected measured value.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 037 104 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 037 105 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 037 106 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 037 107 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 037 108 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 037 109 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 037 110
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 037 111
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2 037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the
variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1

Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Knee point for characteristic Description

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
in the data model
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-56 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 037 113
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 037 114
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 037 115
Display values Designation in the data model

Output current range "An-Out min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "An-Out max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "An-Out min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "An-Out max. val. Ax" ...
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee
with:
Mx,min. ... Mx,max. : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1 037 120 Fig. 3-41
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P139 has a total of 23 LED indicators (for the case 40T and case 84T devices) for
parallel display of binary signals. The case 24T device variant is fitted 10 LED
indicators. LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled "HEALTHY" and signals
the operational readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators
H 2 and H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled "OUT OF SERVICE" and signals
a blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled "ALARM" and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the "EDIT MODE".
Section 6.1 describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory setting for LED
indicator H 4. At this point it is specifically emphasized that for the case 40T and case
84T devices there is no permanent association between the freely configurable function
keys and the LED indicators H 18 to H 23 situated directly next to these function keys.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators (H 4 – H 16, H 18 – H 23 on the case 40T and case
84T devices) the colors red and green can be independently assigned with functions.
The third color amber results as a mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions
assigned to the LED indicator are simultaneously present.
LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green 085 184
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.

The function M A I N : H e a l t h y is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell. 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The function M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell. 085 004

The function S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) is permanently assigned.
LED: Fct.assig. H17 red 085 185

The function L O C : E d i t m o d e is permanently assigned.
7-58 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Fct.assig. H 4 red 085 007
LED: Fct.assig. H10 red 085 025 Fig. 3-42

LED: Fct.assig. H10 green 085 075 Fig. 3-42
LED: Fct.assig. H11 green 085 078
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.

LED: Operating mode H 1 085 182 Fig. 3-42
The operating mode E S u p d a t i n g is permanently assigned.

LED: Operating mode H 2 085 002



LED: Operating mode H 10 085 026 Fig. 3-42

Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)
Main function MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 003 169 Fig. 3-87
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Type of bay 220 001 Fig. 3-45
Configuration of a bay type.

MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062 Fig. 3-46
If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type No.
will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number '0'
will be displayed.
MAIN: Prim.Source TimeSync 103 210 Fig.*: 3-84
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync 103 211 Fig.*: 3-84
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available
are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
The backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by
the primary source after M AIN : Ti me s ync . ti me -ou t has elapsed.
MAIN: Time sync. time-out 103 212 Fig.*: 3-84
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary

source.
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160 Fig.*: 3-126
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
The figure shown illustrates an overview of the assignment.
7-60 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling a protection
or control function
The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by
including the relevant protection or control functions in the device configuration and
cancelling all others (removing them from the device configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control function:
The protection or control function in question must be disabled.

None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled may be
assigned to a binary input.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to a binary
output or an LED indicator.
No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting.
None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to other signals
by way of an ‘m out of n’ parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value

belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: ‘LIMIT’).
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008
protection
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Function group IDMT1 056 009
protection 1
Cancelling function group IDMT1 or including it in the configuration.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT2: Function group IDMT2 056 013
protection 2
Cancelling function group IDMT2 or including it in the configuration.
Short-circuit direction SCDD: Function group SCDD 056 021
determination
Cancelling function group SCDD or including it in the configuration.
If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Function group SOTF 056 003
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration.

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)
Protective signaling PSIG: Function group PSIG 056 004
Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration.

Auto-reclosing control ARC: Function group ARC 056 005
Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration.

Automatic synchronism check ASC: Function group ASC 056 006
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration.

Ground fault direction GFDSS: Function group GFDSS 056 012
determination using
steady-state values
Cancelling function group GFDSS or including it in the configuration.
Transient ground fault TGFD: Function group TGFD 056 019
Cancelling function group TGFD or including it in the configuration.
Motor protection MP: Function group MP 056 022
Cancelling function group MP or including it in the configuration.

Thermal overload protection THERM: Function group THERM 056 023
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration.

Unbalance protection I2>: Function group I2> 056 024
Cancelling function group I2> or including it in the configuration.

Time-voltage protection V<>: Function group V<> 056 010
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration.

7-62 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Function group f<> 056 033
protection
Cancelling function group f<> or including it in the configuration.
Power directional protection P<>: Function group P<> 056 045
Cancelling function group P<> or including it in the configuration.

Circuit breaker failure CBF: Function group CBF 056 007
protection
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Function group CBM 056 062
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration.

Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: Function group MCMON 056 015
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration.

Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Function group LIMIT 056 025
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration.

Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC 056 017
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.

External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047
DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the

configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032
Setting the function type of the command.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
7-64 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
Setting the information number of the command.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004 Fig. 3-309
CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009
Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.

If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007 Fig. 3-310
SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015
Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration.

If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden..
7-66 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary counts COUNT: Function group COUNT 217 047
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the

7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
PC link PC: Command blocking 003 182 Fig. 3-9
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC

interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. 003 086 Fig. 3-9
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. USER 003 172 Fig. 3-10
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 1.
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER 003 076 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Command block. USER 103 172 Fig. 3-18
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

communication interface 2.
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER 103 076 Fig. 3-18
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Fig. 3-33
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main function MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Fig. 3-61
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked 'No (=off)' in the
Address List can only be changed when protection is disabled.
MAIN: Test mode USER 003 012 Fig. 3-88
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom 010 030 Fig. 3-240
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.

MAIN: Phase sequence 010 049 Fig: 3-136,
3-145, 3-226
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.(Alternative terminology:
Setting the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise.)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Time tag 221 098 Page: 3-79
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time
tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse
edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating
data memory are made in chronological order or not.
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001 Fig: 3-48,
3-111, 3-270
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 018 Fig. 3-50
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002 Fig: 3-53,
3-111
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim. 010 027 Fig. 3-54
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. 010 100 Fig. 3-55
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Inom prim. NCIT 010 037
Setting the primary nominal current of the non-conventional instrument

transformer (NCIT) for measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom prim. NCIT 010 039
Setting the primary nominal current of the NCIT for measurement of residual
current.
MAIN: Vnom prim. NCIT 010 038
Setting the primary nominal voltage of the NCIT for measurement of phase-
to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,1 NCIT 010 180
MAIN: Ph. err. VBG,1 NCIT 010 181
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,1 NCIT 010 182
Setting the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-ground
voltage in voltage measuring channel 1 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,2 NCIT 010 192
MAIN: Ph.e.VBG/Vref,2 NCIT 010 193
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,2 NCIT 010 194
Setting the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-ground
voltage (or for the reference voltage Vref, with ASC activated) in voltage
measuring channel 2 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Channel select. NCIT 010 187
Activating voltage measuring channel 1 or 2 of the NCIT. The setting

'Without' (voltage measuring channel) is also possible.
7-68 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inom device 010 003 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom device 010 026 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009 Fig. 3-47
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec. 010 028 Fig. 3-47
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. 031 052 Fig. 3-47
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP 010 004 Fig. 3-47
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be 'Standard', if the P139’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the
direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or –
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘Forward’
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN 010 019 Fig. 3-47
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on

the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be 'Standard', if the P139’s 'Forward'
decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection
direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according to
Chapter 5 – if the ‘Forward’ decision is to be in the busbar direction, then
the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
MAIN: Meas. direction P,Q 006 096 Fig. 3-56
This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured
operating values:
MAIN: Active power P prim. (004 050)
MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. (004 052)
MAIN: Active power P p.u. (004 051)
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. (004 053)
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP 011 030 Fig. 3-48
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured

operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN 011 031 Fig. 3-50
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V 011 032 Fig. 3-53
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured

operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG 011 033 Fig. 3-54
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref 011 034 Fig. 3-55
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism
check is displayed.
MAIN: Op. mode energy cnt. 010 138
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy

output. 1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately).
2nd procedure: Data acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del 010 113 Fig. 3-49
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 005 248 Fig. 3-86
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 1 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 2 005 249 Fig. 3-86
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if

M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t 2 U S E R is enabled.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 021 021 Fig. 3-66
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 021 022 Fig. 3-66
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 2 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Fig. 3-67
Selection of signals whose appearance will result in a ‘Blocked/faulty’ signal

and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled ‘OUT OF SERVICE’.
Signals that lead to a blocking of the device are not configurable and always
result in the above signal and indication.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Fig. 3-76
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 021 001 Fig. 3-76
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 021 002 Fig. 3-76
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2.

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 021 003 Fig. 3-76
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 021 004 Fig. 3-76
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.
7-70 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 021 023 Fig. 3-76
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2 021 024 Fig. 3-76
Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time 015 067 Fig. 3-69
Setting for the duration of the close command.

MAIN: Sig. asg. CB open 021 017 Fig. 3-268
Definition of the binary signal used by the P139 to evaluate the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB closed 021 020 Fig. 3-68
Definition of the binary signal used by the P139 to evaluate the 'CB closed'
position signal.
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203
Setting the debouncing time.

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204
Setting the chatter monitoring time.

MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202 Fig. 3-43
MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230 Fig: 3-301,
3-309
Setting the command duration for a long command.
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231 Fig: 3-301,
3-309
Setting the command duration for a short command.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061 Fig. 3-297
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to
control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079 Page: 3-409
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal
continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from
the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status
signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063 Page: 3-416
This setting defines whether there is an intervention in the control process

of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts.
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057 Fig. 3-80
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output

enable.
MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007 Fig. 3-80
Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control

commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008 Fig. 3-8
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065 Fig. 3-46
When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to
control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010 Fig. 3-79
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external

protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012 Fig. 3-79
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form
the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013 Fig. 3-79
Definition of the binary signal used by the P139 to signal the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050 Fig. 3-79
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an

external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024 Fig. 3-79
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052 Fig. 3-70
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group

signal).
7-72 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via USER 003 100 Fig. 3-89
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local

control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER 003 060 Fig. 3-89
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.

PSS: Keep time 003 063 Fig. 3-89
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
Self-monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Fig. 3-90
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals

'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
SFMON: Mon.sig. retention 021 018 Page: 3-140
This setting determines how long monitoring signals remain in the

monitoring signal memory before a reset occurs.
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Line length 010 005 Fig. 3-112
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Line reactance 010 012 Fig. 3-112
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Angle kG 012 036 Fig. 3-109
Angle setting of the complex ground factor kG .
Z0 − Z L
kG =
3⋅ Z L
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z L : positive-sequence impedance
X0 − XL X
angle kG = arc tan − arc tan L
R0 − RL RL
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance
RL : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X L : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)
FT_DA: Abs. value kG 012 037 Fig. 3-109
Setting the absolute value of the complex ground factor kG.
Z0 − ZL
kG =
3 ⋅ ZL
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z L : positive-sequence impedance
(X 0 − X L )2 + (R0 − RL )2
kG =
3 ⋅ RL + X L
2 2
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

RL : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X L : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
FT_DA: Start data acquisit. 010 011 Fig. 3-108
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault
data should take place.
FT_DA: Output fault locat. 010 032 Fig. 3-108
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger 003 085 Fig. 3-114
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data
acquisition.
FT_RC: I> 017 065 Fig. 3-114
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase currents that will
trigger fault recording and fault data acquisition.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time 003 078 Fig. 3-116
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time 003 079 Fig. 3-116
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a
fault (post-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Max. recording time 003 075 Fig. 3-116
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault
and post-fault recording times.
7-74 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Main function MAIN: Syst.IN enabled USER 018 008 Fig. 3-62
Enable/disable the DTOC and IDMTx residual current stages.

(IDMTx: IDMT1, IDMT2)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: General enable USER 022 075 Fig. 3-117
protection
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: General enable USER 017 096 Fig. 3-128
protection
IDMT2: General enable USER 017 052
Enable/disable the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Short-circuit direction SCDD: General enable USER 017 070 Fig. 3-142
determination
Enable/disable the short-circuit direction determination.
Switch on to fault protection SOTF: General enable USER 011 068 Fig. 3-152
Enable/disable the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.

SOTF: Operating mode 011 061 Fig. 3-152
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is
running, a general starting will lead to a trip command ("trip with starting") or
if the measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone
extension factor D IST : kze H SR PSx ("trip with extension").
SOTF: Manual close timer 011 060 Fig. 3-152
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
Protective signaling PSIG: General enable USER 015 004 Fig. 3-153
Enable/disable the protective signaling.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: General enable USER 015 060 Fig. 3-159
Enable/disable the auto-reclosing control.

ARC: Sig.asg.trip t.GFDSS 015 105 Fig. 3-165
Selection of the GFDSS starting to trigger the auto-reclosing control

function.
ARC: Fct.assgn. tLOGIC 015 033 Fig. 3-169
Function assignment to tLOGIC.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: General enable USER 018 000 Fig. 3-177
Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.

ASC: Transm.cycle,meas.v. 101 212 Fig. 3-186
Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)
Ground fault direction GFDSS: General enable USER 016 060 Fig. 3-185
determination using
steady-state values
Enable/disable the ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values.
GFDSS: Operating mode 016 090 Fig. 3-185
This setting specifies whether steady-state power evaluation or steady-state

current evaluation will be performed.
Transient ground fault TGFD: General enable USER 016 040 Fig. 3-202
Enable/disable the transient ground fault direction determination.
Motor protection MP: General enable USER 017 059 Fig. 3-209
Enable/disable the motor protection function.

MP: Hours_Run > 025 156
Setting the maximum hours for running time.
Thermal overload protection THERM: General enable USER 022 050 Fig. 3-219
Enable/disable the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Relative replica 022 064 Fig. 3-223
THERM: Absolute replica 022 065 Fig. 3-223
Setting the operating mode of thermal overload protection: 'Relative replica'

or 'Absolute replica'. Please note that 'Relative replica' or 'Absolute replica'
are mutually exclusive.
Unbalance protection I2>: General enable USER 018 090 Fig. 3-225
Enable/disable the unbalance protection function.
Time-voltage protection V<>: General enable USER 023 030 Fig. 3-227
Enable/disable the time-voltage protection function.
Over-/underfrequency f<>: General enable USER 023 031 Fig. 3-236

protection
Enable/disable the over-/underfrequency protection function.
f<>: Selection meas. volt 018 202 Fig. 3-237
Setting for the voltage that is used for frequency measurement.

f<>: Evaluation time 018 201 Fig. 3-238
Setting the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
f<>: Undervolt. block. V< 018 200 Fig. 3-238
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below
this threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Power directional protection P<>: General enable USER 014 220 Fig. 3-241
Enable/disable the power directional protection function.
7-76 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Circuit breaker failure CBF: General enable USER 022 080 Fig. 3-255
protection
Enable/disable the circuit breaker failure protection function.
CBF: Start with man. trip 022 154 Fig. 3-259
Setting that a manual trip signal will also be used as a start criterion.
CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux. 022 159 Fig. 3-259
Selection of trip signals - assigned to Gen. trip command 1 - for which, in

addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts
are evaluated.
CBF: I< 022 160 Fig: 3-257,
3-259, 3-263,
3-264
Setting the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
CBF: t1 3p 022 165 Fig. 3-260
Setting 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.

CBF: t2 022 166 Fig. 3-260
Setting 2nd CBF timer stage.

CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1 022 167 Fig. 3-261
Setting 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.

CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2 022 168 Fig. 3-261
Setting 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.

CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1 022 169 Fig. 3-261
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2 022 170 Fig. 3-261
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBF: Delay/starting trig. 022 155 Fig. 3-262
The signal CBF : Tr ip s ig na l is issued when this timer stage’s time

duration has elapsed.
CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB 022 171 Fig. 3-263
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal
from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are
recognized through the current criterion (see section "Fault behind CB
protection").
CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv 022 172 Fig. 3-264
Setting the delay time period to bridge circuit breaker operate times during
CB synchronization supervision.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-77

7 Settings
(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: General enable USER 022 010 Fig. 3-265
Enable/disable circuit breaker monitoring.

CBM: Blocking USER 022 150 Fig. 3-273
Setting a temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection

injection testing.
CBM: Sig. asg. trip cmd. 022 152 Fig. 3-267
Using the setting for external devices the trip command issued by the
control function may be linked to the trip command 1 issued by the
protection by assigning the trip command issued by the control function by
this parameter.
CBM: Operating mode 022 007 Fig. 3-270
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To

evaluate all trip commands issued by the protection device "with Trip cmd.
only" must be selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands
the additional CB auxiliary contact "CB sig.EXT or trip" is used.
CBM: Inom,CB 022 012 Fig. 3-270
Setting the CB nominal current.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB 022 013 Fig. 3-270
Setting the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.

CBM: Med. curr. Itrip,CB 022 014 Fig. 3-270
Setting the average CB disconnection current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB 022 015 Fig. 3-270
Setting the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection

current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.

CBM: Max. curr. Itrip,CB 022 016 Fig. 3-270
Setting the maximum CB disconnection current.

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB 022 017 Fig. 3-270
Setting the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum CB

disconnection current.
CBM: No. CB operations > 022 019 Fig. 3-272
Setting the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.

CBM: Remain No. CB op. < 022 020 Fig. 3-271
Setting the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at

CB nominal current.
CBM: ΣItrip> 022 022
Setting the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection current

values.
CBM: ΣItrip**2> 022 081
Setting the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection current

values to the second power.
CBM: ΣI*t> 022 096
Setting the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection current values
7-78 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
CBM: Corr. acquis. time 022 018 Fig. 3-270
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB

auxiliary contacts.
Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: General enable USER 014 001 Fig. 3-275
Enable/disable the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

MCMON: Op. mode Idiff> 017 028 Fig. 3-275
Adaptation of measuring-circuit monitoring to the system current

transformers.
MCMON: Idiff> 017 024 Fig. 3-275
Setting the operate value of measuring-circuit monitoring.

MCMON: Op. mode Vmin< monit 018 079 Fig. 3-276
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.

MCMON: Vmin< 017 022 Fig. 3-276
Setting the operate value for the voltage trigger Vmin< of measuring circuit
monitoring.
MCMON: Operate delay 017 023 Fig. 3-275
Setting the time delay for current and voltage monitoring.

MCMON: Phase sequ. monitor. 018 019 Fig. 3-276
Enable/disable the phase sequence monitoring function.

MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER 014 013 Fig. 3-277
Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference

voltage Vref.
MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref 014 012 Fig. 3-277
Setting for the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference
voltage Vref.
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: General enable USER 014 010 Fig. 3-278
Enable/disable the limit value monitoring function.

LIMIT: I> 014 004 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I>> 014 020 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI> 014 031 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>> 014 032 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I< 014 021 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-79

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: I<< 014 022 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI< 014 033 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<< 014 034 Fig. 3-278
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG> 014 023 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>> 014 024 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG> 014 035 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG>> 014 036 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG< 014 025 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<< 014 026 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG< 014 037 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<< 014 038 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP> 014 027 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>> 014 028 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP> 014 039 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>> 014 040 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
7-80 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: VPP< 014 029 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP<< 014 030 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP< 014 041 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP<< 014 042 Fig. 3-279
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG> 014 043 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>> 014 044 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG> 014 045 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>> 014 046 Fig. 3-280
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: Vref> 042 144 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V, i.e. ordering option Vnom
= 50 to 130 V {5 poles} for ASC).
LIMIT: Vref>> 042 145 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref> 042 148 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
LIMIT: tVref>> 042 149 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
LIMIT: Vref< 042 146 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: Vref<< 042 147 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref< 042 150 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref<< 042 151 Fig. 3-282
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-81

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig. 3-281
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig. 3-283
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
7-82 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T1> 014 120 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: T2> 014 130
LIMIT: T3> 014 140
LIMIT: T4> 014 150
LIMIT: T5> 014 160
LIMIT: T6> 014 170
LIMIT: T7> 014 180
LIMIT: T8> 014 190
LIMIT: T9> 015 130
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: T1>> 014 121 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: T2>> 014 131
LIMIT: T3>> 014 141
LIMIT: T4>> 014 151
LIMIT: T5>> 014 161
LIMIT: T6>> 014 171
LIMIT: T7>> 014 181
LIMIT: T8>> 014 191
LIMIT: T9>> 015 131
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn>> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1> 014 122 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: tT2> 014 132
LIMIT: tT3> 014 142
LIMIT: tT4> 014 152
LIMIT: tT5> 014 162
LIMIT: tT6> 014 172
LIMIT: tT7> 014 182
LIMIT: tT8> 014 192
LIMIT: tT9> 015 132
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1>> 014 123 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: tT2>> 014 133
LIMIT: tT3>> 014 143
LIMIT: tT4>> 014 153
LIMIT: tT5>> 014 163
LIMIT: tT6>> 014 173
LIMIT: tT7>> 014 183
LIMIT: tT8>> 014 193
LIMIT: tT9>> 015 133
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn>> for temperature

sensor Tn.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-83

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T1< 014 124 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: T2< 014 134
LIMIT: T3< 014 144
LIMIT: T4< 014 154
LIMIT: T5< 014 164
LIMIT: T6< 014 174
LIMIT: T7< 014 184
LIMIT: T8< 014 194
LIMIT: T9< 015 134
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: T1<< 014 125 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: T2<< 014 135
LIMIT: T3<< 014 145
LIMIT: T4<< 014 155
LIMIT: T5<< 014 165
LIMIT: T6<< 014 175
LIMIT: T7<< 014 185
LIMIT: T8<< 014 195
LIMIT: T9<< 015 135
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn<< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1< 014 126 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: tT2< 014 136
LIMIT: tT3< 014 146
LIMIT: tT4< 014 156
LIMIT: tT5< 014 166
LIMIT: tT6< 014 176
LIMIT: tT7< 014 186
LIMIT: tT8< 014 196
LIMIT: tT9< 015 136
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1<< 014 127 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: tT2<< 014 137
LIMIT: tT3<< 014 147
LIMIT: tT4<< 014 157
LIMIT: tT5<< 014 167
LIMIT: tT6<< 014 177
LIMIT: tT7<< 014 187
LIMIT: tT8<< 014 197
LIMIT: tT9<< 015 137
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn<< for temperature

sensor Tn.
7-84 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Logic LOGIC: General enable USER 031 099 Fig. 3-289
Enable/disable the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig: 3-288,
3-295
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig. 3-295
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 030 000 Fig: 3-169,
3-289
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 030 004 Fig. 3-169
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 030 008
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.11 030 040
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-85

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 030 001 Fig: 3-169,

3-289
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 030 005 Fig. 3-169
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 030 009
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
7-86 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 030 002 Fig. 3-289

LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 030 006
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-87

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 030 003 Fig. 3-289

Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the ‘minimum time’ operating mode.
7-88 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 000 Fig. 3-295
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 002
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-89

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig. 3-295
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 019
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000
CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005
7-90 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of the command designation.

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002 Fig. 3-309
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007
Selection of the command operating mode.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-91

7 Settings
(continued)
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008
Selection of the signal designation.

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001 Fig. 3-310
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009
7-92 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of the signal operating mode.

SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003 Fig. 3-310
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-93

7 Settings
(continued)
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002 Fig. 3-310
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S013 226 098
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S014 226 106
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S015 226 114
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S016 226 122
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S017 226 130
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S018 226 138
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S019 226 146
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S020 226 154
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S021 226 162
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S022 226 170
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S023 226 178
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S024 226 186
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S025 226 194
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S026 226 202
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S027 226 210
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S028 226 218
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S029 226 226
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S030 226 234
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S031 226 242
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S032 226 250
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S033 227 002
7-94 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S034 227 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S035 227 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S036 227 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S037 227 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S038 227 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S039 227 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S040 227 058
The logic '1' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.
Binary counts COUNT: General enable USER 217 000 Fig. 3-288
Enable/disable the counting function.

COUNT: Iec61850 pulsQty 221 096
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850.
According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value * pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal * pulsQty).
COUNT: Cycle t.count transm 217 007 Fig. 3-288
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets
Measured data input MEASI: BackupTempSensor PSx 004 243 004 244 004 245 004 246 Fig. 3-285
Selection of backup temperature sensor groups for parameter subset PSx.
Main function MAIN: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.

MAIN: Hld time dyn.par.PSx 018 009 001 211 001 212 001 213 Fig. 3-63
Setting the hold time of the "dynamic parameters". After switching to the
"dynamic" thresholds, the latter will remain active in place of the "normal"
thresholds during this period.
MAIN: Bl.tim.st.IN,neg PSx 017 015 001 214 001 215 001 216 Fig. 3-73
This setting defines whether a blocking of the residual current stages should
take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current startings.
MAIN: Gen. start. mode PSx 017 027 001 219 001 220 001 221 Fig: 3-74,
3-121, 3-124,
3-136, 3-138
This setting defines whether the triggering of the residual current stages IN>,
Iref,N>, IN>> or IN>>> as well as the negative-sequence current stage Iref,neg>
should result in the formation of the general starting signal. If the setting is
'W/o start. IN, Ineg' then the associated time delays tIN>, tIref,N>, tIN>>, tIN>>>,
tIref,neg> are automatically excluded from the formation of the trip command.
MAIN: Op. rush restr. PSx 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090 Fig. 3-64
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.

MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093 Fig. 3-64
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-95

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: I>lift rush restrPSx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087 Fig. 3-64
Setting for the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: Suppr.start.sig. PSx 017 054 001 222 001 223 001 224 Fig. 3-73
Setting of the timer stage for the suppression of the phase-selective

startings and of the residual and negative-sequence system starting.
MAIN: tGS PSx 017 005 001 225 001 226 001 227 Fig. 3-74
Setting the time delay of the general starting signal.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Enabled PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098 Fig. 3-117
protection
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: I> PSx 017 000 073 007 074 007 075 007 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Chapter 'Technical Data').
DTOC: I> dynamic PSx 017 080 073 032 074 032 075 032 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(phase current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
stage M AIN: H ol d- time d yn . par am . is elapsing.
DTOC: I>> PSx 017 001 073 008 074 008 075 008 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
DTOC: I>> dynamic PSx 017 084 073 033 074 033 075 033 Fig. 3-118
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage in dynamic
mode (phase current stage). This operate value is effective only while the
timer stage M AIN : Ho ld -ti me d yn . p ara m . is elapsing.
DTOC: I>>> PSx 017 002 073 009 074 009 075 009 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
DTOC: I>>> dynamic PSx 017 085 073 034 074 034 075 034 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(phase current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
7-96 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tI> PSx 017 004 073 019 074 019 075 019 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage.

DTOC: tI>> PSx 017 006 073 020 074 020 075 020 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage.

DTOC: tI>>> PSx 017 007 073 021 074 021 075 021 Fig. 3-118
Setting the operate delay of the third overcurrent stage.

DTOC: Ineg> PSx 072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 Fig. 3-120
Setting the operate value Ineg> dynamic

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
This operate value is effective only while the timer stage M A I N : H o l d -
t i m e d y n . p a r a m . is elapsing.
DTOC: Ineg>> PSx 072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 Fig. 3-120
Setting the operate value Ineg>> dynamic

DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx 072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 Fig. 3-120
Setting the operate value Ineg>>> dynamic

DTOC: tIneg> PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negative-
sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>> PSx 072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>

DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx 072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025 Fig. 3-120
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>

DTOC: Eval. IN>,>>,>>> PSx 072 128 073 128 074 128 075 128 Fig. 3-122
As of software version -602. (SW -601: see next entry.)

This setting determines which current will be monitored: The current
calculated by the P139 or the residual current IN>, IN>>, IN>>> measured
at the T 4 current transformer. IN>>>> operates only with the calculated
measured variables.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-97

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: IN> PSx 017 003 073 015 074 015 075 015 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN> dynamic PSx 017 081 073 035 074 035 075 035 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the dynamic first overcurrent stage (residual
current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer stage
M A IN : H o ld - t i me d y n . p ar a m . is elapsing.
DTOC: IN>> PSx 017 009 073 016 074 016 075 016 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN>> dynamic PSx 017 086 073 036 074 036 075 036 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(residual current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
DTOC: IN>>> PSx 017 018 073 017 074 017 075 017 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN>>> dynamic PSx 017 087 073 037 074 037 075 037 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the dynamic third overcurrent stage (residual
DTOC: IN>>>> PSx 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN>>>> dyn. PSx 072 036 072 105 072 202 072 219 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate value of the dynamic fourth overcurrent stage (residual
DTOC: tIN> PSx 017 008 073 027 074 027 075 027 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
7-98 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tIN>> PSx 017 010 073 028 074 028 075 028 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 017 019 073 029 074 029 075 029 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate delay of the third overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx 072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030 Fig. 3-123
Setting the operate delay of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx 017 055 073 042 074 042 075 042 Fig. 3-125
Setting the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
DTOC: tIN,interm. PSx 017 056 073 038 074 038 075 038 Fig. 3-125
Setting the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground faults.
DTOC: Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx 017 057 073 039 074 039 075 039 Fig. 3-125
Setting the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Enabled PSx 072 070 073 070 074 070 075 070 Fig. 3-128
protection IDMT2: Enabled PSx 076 042 076 043 076 044 076 045
This setting defines the parameter subset in which IDMTx protection is

enabled.
IDMT1: Iref,P PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Iref,P PSx 076 236 076 237 076 238 076 239
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).

IDMT1: Iref,P dynamic PSx 072 003 073 003 074 003 075 003 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Iref,P dynamic PSx 076 030 076 031 076 032 076 033
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (phase current system). This
operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN : Ho ld -ti me
d yn . pa ram. is elapsing.
IDMT1: Characteristic P PSx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Characteristic P PSx 071 004 071 005 071 006 071 007
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,P PSx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Factor kt,P PSx 078 250 078 251 078 252 078 253
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current
system).
IDMT1: Min. trip time P PSx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Min. trip time P PSx 071 044 071 045 071 046 071 047
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). As a rule, this
value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
IDMT1: Hold time P PSx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Hold time P PSx 071 028 071 029 071 030 071 031
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (phase current
system).
IDMT1: Release P PSx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Release P PSx 071 016 071 017 071 018 071 019
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-99

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT1: Iref,neg PSx 072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051 Fig. 3-133
IDMT2: Iref,neg PSx 076 250 076 251 076 252 076 253
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT1: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 072 004 073 004 074 004 075 004 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 076 034 076 035 076 036 076 037
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (negative-sequence current

system). This operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN :
Ho ld - ti me d yn . pa ram. i s e l a p s i n g .
IDMT1: Character. neg. PSx 072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Character. neg. PSx 071 008 071 009 071 010 071 011
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,neg PSx 072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Factor kt,neg PSx 079 250 079 251 079 252 079 253
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT1: Min.trip time negPSx 072 078 073 078 074 078 075 078 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Min.trip time negPSx 071 048 071 049 071 050 071 051
Setting the minimum trip time (negative-sequence current system). As a

rule, this value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
IDMT1: Hold time neg PSx 072 072 073 072 074 072 075 072 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Hold time neg PSx 071 032 071 033 071 034 071 035
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT1: Release neg. PSx 072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060 Fig. 3-136
IDMT2: Release neg. PSx 071 020 071 021 071 022 071 023
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
IDMT1: Evaluation IN PSx 072 075 073 075 074 075 075 075 Fig. 3-137
IDMT2: Evaluation IN PSx 071 040 071 041 071 042 071 043
This setting determines which current will be monitored: The current

calculated by the P139 or the residual current measured at the T 4 current
transformer.
IDMT1: Iref,N PSx 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Iref,N PSx 077 250 077 251 077 252 077 253
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).

IDMT1: Iref,N dynamic PSx 072 005 073 005 074 005 075 005 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Iref,N dynamic PSx 076 038 076 039 076 040 076 041
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (residual current system).

This operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN : Ho ld -
ti m e d yn . pa ram . i s e l a p s i n g .
IDMT1: Characteristic N PSx 072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Characteristic N PSx 071 012 071 013 071 014 071 015
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT1: Factor kt,N PSx 072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Factor kt,N PSx 071 000 071 001 071 002 071 003
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current
system).
7-100 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT1: Min. trip time N PSx 072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Min. trip time N PSx 071 052 071 053 071 054 071 055
Setting the minimum trip time (residual current system). As a rule, this
value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (IN>).
IDMT1: Hold time N PSx 072 073 073 073 074 073 075 073 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Hold time N PSx 071 036 071 037 071 038 071 039
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (residual current
system).
IDMT1: Release N PSx 072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Release N PSx 071 024 071 025 071 026 071 027
Setting for the release characteristic (residual current system).
Short-circuit direction SCDD: Enabled PSx 076 235 077 235 078 235 079 235 Fig. 3-142
determination This setting defines the parameter subset in which short-circuit direction
determination is enabled.
SCDD: Trip bias PSx 017 074 077 236 078 236 079 236 Fig. 3-146
This setting determines whether an overcurrent direction determination in

forward direction shall be formed when the direction determination of the
phase current and residual current stage is blocked.
SCDD: Direction tI> PSx 017 071 077 237 078 237 079 237 Fig. 3-146
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tI> trip signal
in the DTOC phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or
non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx 017 072 077 238 078 238 079 238 Fig. 3-146
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tI>> trip signal
in the DTOC phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or
non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
SCDD: Direct. tIref,P> PSx 017 066 077 239 078 239 079 239 Fig. 3-146
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,P> trip
signal in the IDMT1 phase current stage will be issued for forward,
backward or non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has
been set accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping
time.
SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx 017 073 077 240 078 240 079 240 Fig. 3-150
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIN> trip
signal in the DTOC residual current stage will be issued for forward,
time.
SCDD: Direction tIN>> PSx 017 075 077 241 078 241 079 241 Fig. 3-150
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIN>> trip
signal in the DTOC residual current stage will be issued for forward,
time.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-101

7 Settings
(continued)
SCDD: Direct. tIref,N> PSx 017 067 077 242 078 242 079 242 Fig. 3-150
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,N> trip
signal in the IDMT1 residual current stage will be issued for forward,
time.
SCDD: Charact. angle G PSx 017 076 077 243 078 243 079 243 Fig. 3-149
Setting the characteristic angle for the residual current stage in

correspondence to the measuring relation. Using this setting, a wide range
of conditions in dependence of the system neutral grounding impedance
can be accommodated, including the following:
System neutral with relatively high resistance αG = 0°
System neutral with relatively low resistance αG - 45°
System neutral effectively grounded αG= - 75°
System neutral reactance-grounded αG= - 90°
System with isolated neutral αG= + 90°
SCDD: VNG> PSx 017 077 077 244 078 244 079 244 Fig: 3-148b
Setting the operate value VNG>. This setting value is an enabling criterion
of the base point release of short-circuit direction determination.
In choosing this setting, the set nominal voltage M AIN : VNG ,nom V.T .
sec . should be taken into account.
SCDD: Evaluation VNG PSx 071 056 071 057 071 058 071 059 Fig: 3-148a
User may select between "measured" and "calculated" (standard default).

SCDD: Block. bias G PSx 017 078 077 245 078 245 079 245 Fig. 3-150
This setting defines whether the trip bias of the residual current stage
should be blocked in the event of a phase current starting.
SCDD: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx 010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118
In the event of a three-phase fault in the phase current stage, the measured
voltage VABmeas is compared with the selected operate value, Vop.Val., of
the voltage memory. If VABmeas < Vop.Val. then the SCDD function will
not use VABmeas but will revert to the voltage memory, if it has been
enabled.
Protective signaling PSIG: Enabled PSx 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017 Fig. 3-153
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is

enabled.
PSIG: Tripping time PSx 015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023 Fig. 3-155
Setting the time delay of protective signaling.

PSIG: Release t. send PSx 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021 Fig. 3-155
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.

PSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 015 012 024 051 025 011 025 071 Fig. 3-155
This setting defines whether the transmitting relay will be operated in

energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized
(NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle'), i.e., Transm. rel. make con. or
Transm. rel. break con., respectively.
7-102 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
PSIG: Direc.dependence PSx 015 001 015 115 015 116 015 117 Fig. 3-155
This setting governs the evaluation for the directional dependence of

protective signaling. The following settings are possible:
Without
Phase curr. system
Residual curr. system
Phase/resid.c.system
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enabled PSx 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049 Fig. 3-159
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.

ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044 Fig. 3-161
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx 015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045 Fig: 3-158,
3-168
The operating mode setting defines which of the following reclosure types is
permitted.
TDR only permitted
HSR/TDR permitted
Test HSR only permit
ARC: Operative time PSx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055 Fig: 3-170,
3-172
Setting for the operative time 1.
ARC: HSR trip.time GS PSx 015 038 024 100 024 150 025 100 Fig. 3-166
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a general starting condition.
ARC: HSR trip.time I> PSx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060 Fig: 3-162,
3-172
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a phase current starting in the
first DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSR trip.time I>>PSx 015 074 024 101 024 151 025 101 Fig. 3-162.7
second DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSRtrip.time I>>>PSx 014 096 024 102 024 152 025 102 Fig: 3-162,
third DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSR trip.time IN>PSx 015 076 024 103 024 153 025 103 Fig: 3-162,
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a residual current starting in the
ARC: HSRtrip.time IN>>PSx 015 031 024 104 024 154 025 104 Fig: 3-162,
ARC: HSRtrip.t. IN>>> PSx 014 098 024 105 024 155 025 105 Fig: 3-162,
ARC: HSRtrip.t.Iref,P PSx 015 094 024 106 024 156 025 106 Fig. 3-164
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 phase
current system.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-103

7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: HSRtrip.t.Iref,N PSx 015 096 024 107 024 157 025 107 Fig. 3-164
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 residual
current system.
ARC: HSRtr.t.Iref,neg PSx 015 034 024 108 024 158 025 108 Fig. 3-164
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 negative-
sequence current system.
ARC: HSR trip t.GFDSS PSx 015 078 024 109 024 159 025 109 Fig. 3-165
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via ‘ground fault direction
determination using steady-state values’.
ARC: HSRtrip.t. LOGIC PSx 015 098 024 110 024 160 025 110 Fig. 3-167
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
ARC: HSR block.f. I>>>PSx 015 080 024 111 024 161 025 111 Fig. 3-168
The selection of the HSR blocking by I>>> defines whether an HSR is

blocked during an I>>> starting.
ARC: HSR dead time PSx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050 Fig: 3-170,
3-172
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the ‘0’
setting, only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: TDR trip.time GS PSx 015 039 024 112 024 162 025 112 Fig. 3-166
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a general starting condition.
ARC: TDR trip.time I> PSx 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061 Fig. 3-163
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a phase current starting in the
ARC: TDR trip.time I>>PSx 015 075 024 113 024 163 025 113 Fig. 3-163
ARC: TDRtrip.time I>>>PSx 014 097 024 114 024 164 025 114 Fig. 3-163
ARC: TDR trip.time IN>PSx 015 077 024 115 024 165 025 115 Fig. 3-163
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a residual current starting in the
ARC: TDRtrip.time IN>>PSx 015 032 024 116 024 166 025 116 Fig. 3-163
ARC: TDRtrip.t. IN>>> PSx 014 099 024 117 024 167 025 117 Fig. 3-163
ARC: TDRtrip.t.Iref,P PSx 015 095 024 118 024 168 025 118 Fig. 3-164
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 phase
current system.
ARC: TDRtrip.t.Iref,N PSx 015 097 024 119 024 169 025 119 Fig. 3-164
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 residual
current system.
7-104 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: TDRtr.t.Iref,neg PSx 015 035 024 120 024 170 025 120 Fig. 3-164
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT1 negative-
sequence current system.
ARC: TDR trip t.GFDSS PSx 015 079 024 121 024 171 025 121 Fig. 3-165
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via ‘ground fault direction
determination using steady-state values’.
ARC: TDRtrip.t. LOGIC PSx 015 099 024 122 024 172 025 122 Fig. 3-167
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
ARC: TDR dead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051 Fig. 3-170
Setting for the TDR dead time.

ARC: TDR block.f. I>>>PSx 015 081 024 124 024 174 025 124 Fig. 3-168
The selection of the TDR blocking by I>>> defines whether a TDR is

blocked during an I>>> starting.
ARC: Reclaim time PSx 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048 Fig: 3-170,
3-172
Setting for the reclaim time.
ARC: Blocking time PSx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052 Fig. 3-160
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enabled PSx 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023 Fig. 3-177
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism

check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: CB assignment PSx 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134 Fig. 3-185
This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
ASC: System integrat. PSx 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138 Fig. 3-185
This setting defines whether ASC will operate in 'Autom. synchron. check' or
'Autom. synchr. control' mode.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030 Fig. 3-178
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031 Fig. 3-178
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032 Fig. 3-178
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by

ASC.
ASC: Operative time PSx 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034 Fig: 3-172,
3-183
Setting for the operative time for ASC.
ASC: Operating mode PSx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028 Fig. 3-182
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the operating mode.
ASC: Op.mode volt.chk.PSx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032 Fig. 3-181
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-105

7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: V> volt.check PSx 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043 Fig. 3-181
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC :

Op.mode volt.chk. PSx.
ASC: V< volt. check PSx 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040 Fig. 3-181
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC :

Op.mode volt.chk. PSx.
ASC: tmin volt. check PSx 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041 Fig. 3-181
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: Measurement loop PSx 031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044 Fig. 3-176
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage,

must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to

phases A & B The measurement loop should be set to 'Loop A-B'.
ASC: V> sync. check PSx 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035 Fig. 3-182
Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism

checked close enable.
ASC: Delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036 Fig. 3-182
Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference

voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Delta f max PSx 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038 Fig. 3-182
Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and

reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Delta phi max PSx 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037 Fig. 3-182
Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference

voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Phi offset PSx 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042 Fig. 3-182
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the

differential angle is correct.
ASC: tmin sync. check PSx 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039 Fig. 3-182
Setting for the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
7-106 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Enabled PSx 001 050 001 051 001 052 001 053 Fig. 3-188
determination using This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFDSS function is
steady-state values enabled.
GFDSS: Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx 016 063 000 236 000 237 000 238 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
Setting the operating mode of the ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values. The following settings are possible: The following
settings are possible:
"Cos ϕ circuit" for resonant-grounded systems.
"Sin ϕ circuit" for isolated neutral-point systems.
GFDSS: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 083 001 011 001 012 001 013 Fig. 3-189
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for direction determination: The displacement voltage calculated from the
phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90
transformer of the P139.
GFDSS: Measurem. direc. PSx 016 070 001 002 001 003 001 004 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
This setting defines the measuring direction for the 'forward' or 'backward'
decision.
GFDSS: VNG> PSx 016 062 000 233 000 234 000 235 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
GFDSS: tVNG> PSx 016 061 000 230 000 231 000 232 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
Setting the operate delay of the VNG> trigger.
GFDSS: f/fnom (P meas.) PSx 016 091 001 044 001 045 001 046 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
Setting the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state
power evaluation.
GFDSS: f/fnom (I meas.) PSx 016 092 001 047 001 048 001 049 Fig. 3-194
Setting the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state

current evaluation.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> LS PSx 016 064 000 239 000 240 000 241 Fig. 3-193
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual

current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle LS PSx 016 065 000 242 000 243 000 244 Fig. 3-193
Setting of the sector angle for measurement in the line side direction.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating

mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay LS PSx 016 066 000 245 000 246 000 247 Fig: 3-193,
3-194
Setting the operate delay of the direction decision in the forward direction.
GFDSS: Release delay LS PSx 016 072 001 005 001 006 001 007 Fig: 3-193,
3-194
Setting the release delay of the direction decision in the forward direction.
GFDSS: IN,act>/reac> BS PSx 016 067 000 251 000 252 000 253 Fig. 3-193
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual

current that must be exceeded so that the 'BS' (busbar side) directional
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-107

7 Settings
(continued)
GFDSS: Sector angle BS PSx 016 068 000 248 000 249 000 250 Fig. 3-193
Setting the sector angle for measurement in the direction of the busbar side.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos ϕ circuit" operating

mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay BS PSx 016 069 000 254 000 255 001 001 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
Setting the operate delay of the direction decision in the backward direction.
GFDSS: Release delay BS PSx 016 073 001 008 001 009 001 010 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
Setting the release delay of the direction decision in the backward direction.
GFDSS: IN> PSx 016 093 001 017 001 018 001 019 Fig. 3-194
Setting the operate value of the steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Operate delay IN PSx 016 094 001 020 001 021 001 022 Fig. 3-194
Setting the operate delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Release delay IN PSx 016 095 001 023 001 024 001 025 Fig. 3-194
Setting the release delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx 016 111 001 029 001 030 001 031 Fig. 3-199
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘LS’ (line side) directional
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx 016 112 001 032 001 033 001 034 Fig. 3-199
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the ‘BS’ (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Y(N)> PSx 016 113 001 035 001 036 001 037 Fig. 3-200
Setting the operate value of the admittance for the non-directional ground
fault determination (in the operating mode "admittance evaluation").
GFDSS: Phi offset PSx 016 110 001 026 001 027 001 028 Fig. 3-196
This setting is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system

transformers (in the operating mode "admittance evaluation").
GFDSS: Oper.delay Y(N)> PSx 016 114 001 038 001 039 001 040 Fig. 3-200
Setting the operate delay value of the admittance for the non-directional
ground fault determination (in the operating mode "admittance evaluation").
GFDSS: Rel. delay Y(N)> PSx 016 115 001 041 001 042 001 043 Fig. 3-200
Setting the release delay value of the admittance for the non-directional
ground fault determination (in the operating mode "admittance evaluation").
TGFD: Enabled PSx 001 054 001 055 001 056 001 057 Fig. 3-202
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the TGFD function is
enabled.
TGFD: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 048 001 058 001 059 001 060 Fig. 3-203
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for evaluation: The displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a
voltage transformer assembly or the displacement voltage calculated from
the three phase-to-ground voltages.
7-108 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
TGFD: Measurem. direc. PSx 016 045 001 073 001 074 001 075 Fig. 3-204
The direction measurement of the transient ground fault direction

determination function depends on the connection of the measuring circuits.
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be
'Standard', if the P139’s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the
outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or – given a
connection scheme according to Chapter 5 – if the ‘forward’ decision is to
be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be ‘Opposite’.
Note: The global setting M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N does

not affect the direction determination feature of the transient ground fault
direction determination function.
TGFD: VNG> PSx 016 041 001 061 001 062 001 063 Fig. 3-204
Setting the neutral-point displacement voltage threshold.

TGFD: Operate delay PSx 016 044 001 067 001 068 001 069 Fig. 3-204
Setting for the operate delay.

TGFD: IN,p> PSx 016 042 001 064 001 065 001 066 Fig. 3-204
Setting the residual current threshold. A peak value is evaluated.

TGFD: Buffer time PSx 016 043 001 070 001 071 001 072 Fig. 3-205
Setting the signal buffer time for transient ground fault direction
determination.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-109

7 Settings
(continued)
Motor protection MP: Enabled PSx 024 148 024 147 024 197 025 147 Fig. 3-209
This setting defines the parameter subset in which motor protection is

enabled.
MP: Iref PSx 017 012 024 131 024 181 025 131 Fig. 3-210
For the determination of the reference current, the nominal motor current
needs to be calculated first from the motor data.
Pnom
I nom,motor =
3 ⋅ Vnom ⋅ η ⋅ cos ϕ
The reference current is the nominal motor current as projected onto the
transformer secondary side and is thus calculated as follows:
I ref I T
= nom,motor nom
I nom,( relay ) I nom,( relay )
Example:
Motor and System Data:
Nominal motor voltage Vnom: 10 kV

Nominal motor power Pnom: 1500 kW
Efficiency η: 96.6 %
Active power factor cos ϕ: 0.86
Nominal transformation ratio Tnom

of the main current transformer: 100 A
Determination of the Nominal Motor Current

1500 kW
I nom,motor =
3 ⋅10 kV ⋅ 0.966 ⋅ 0.86
= 104 A
Determination of the reference current:
I ref 104 A 100

= = 1.04
I nom,( relay ) 1A
7-110 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: Factor kP PSx 017 040 024 132 024 182 025 132 Fig. 3-210
The starting factor k should be set according to the maximum permissible

thermal continuous current:
I
k = therm,motor
I nom,motor
Example:
Motor Data:
Maximum permissible continuous thermal motor current Itherm,motor:

1.1 Inom,Motor
Determination of the Starting Factor:
1.1 I nom, Motor

k= = 1.1
I nom, Motor
MP: IStUp> PSx 017 053 024 133 024 183 025 133 Fig. 3-215
Setting the current threshold for the operational status determination

'machine starting up'.
MP: tIStUp> PSx 017 042 024 134 024 184 025 134 Fig. 3-215
Setting the operate delay for the operational status determination 'machine
starting up'. Usually, the default setting can be retained.
MP: Characteristic P PSx 017 029 024 135 024 185 025 135 Fig. 3-215
The selection of the tripping characteristic defines the restrictiveness of the

motor protection function. For low overcurrents, the logarithmic
characteristic provides significantly higher tripping times than the
reciprocally squared characteristic, since the latter neglects any heat
transfer to the cooling medium in the overload range.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-111

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: t6Iref PSx 017 041 024 136 024 186 025 136 Fig. 3-215
This Setting the overload tripping time t6Iref is determined from the cold
machine data, using Iref = Inom,motor.
I ref = Inom,motor
For the reciprocally squared characteristic we set:

2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
⋅⎝ ⎠
nom,motor
t 6I ref = t block ,cold
36
For the logarithmic characteristic we set:

1
t 6I ref = t block ,cold ⋅ 2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
36 ⋅ ln ⎝ nom,motor ⎠
2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜I ⎟
⎝ nom,motor ⎠
Based on the setting value thus determined, the tripping time for a warm
machine is now defined as follows.
For the reciprocally squared characteristic we set:
t = (1 − 0.2) ⋅ t 6I ref ⋅
36
2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
⎝ nom,motor ⎠
For the logarithmic characteristic we set:

2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟
⎜I ⎟
⎝ nom,motor ⎠
t = (1 − 0.2) ⋅ t 6I ref ⋅ 36 ⋅ ln 2
⎛ Istartup ⎞
⎜ ⎟ −1
⎜I ⎟
⎝ nom,motor ⎠
Example:
Motor Data:
Motor startup current Istartup:
5.7 Inom,motor at Vnom
Max. permissible locked-rotor time with cold machine tblock,cold:

18 s at Vnom
Max. permissible locked-rotor time with warm machine tblock,warm:
16 s at Vnom
7-112 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: Tau after st.-up PSx 018 042 024 137 024 187 025 137 Fig. 3-215
Setting the heat dispersion time constant after startup. Usually, the default
setting can be retained.
MP: Tau mach.running PSx 017 088 024 138 024 188 025 138 Fig. 3-215
MP: Tau mach.stopped PSx 017 089 024 139 024 189 025 139 Fig. 3-215
Setting the cooling time constant with a running or stopped machine,

respectively.
If the thermal time constants of the motor are unknown, the cooling time
constant with machine running is best set to the highest setting value and
the cooling time with machine stopped to the five-fold value of that with
machine running.
MP: Perm. No.st.-ups PSx 017 047 024 140 024 190 025 140 Fig. 3-215
Setting the startup sequence of the motor as permitted by thermal

considerations.
Note:
The heavy starting logic (addresses 017 043 and 017 044) can only be
activated if the permissible startup sequence is set to two startups from cold
and one startup from warm.
MP: RC permitted, Θ< PSx 018 043 024 141 024 191 025 141 Fig. 3-215
Setting the threshold value of the overload memory for reclosure

permission. Usually, the default setting can be retained.
MP: Operating mode PSx 018 041 024 142 024 192 025 142 Fig. 3-210
This setting defines whether motor protection will be operated together with
thermal overload protection (THERM).
MP: St.-up time tStUpPSx 017 043 024 143 024 193 025 143 Fig. 3-215
MP: Blocking time tE PSx 017 044 024 144 024 194 025 144 Fig. 3-215
Using an overspeed monitor, the heavy starting logic can be activated if

necessary. For this purpose, the load-torque-dependent operational startup
time needs to be set for tStUp and the maximum permissible locked-rotor
time (the ‘tE time’) with a machine at operating temperature needs to be set
for tE.
If the heavy starting logic is not used then the set startup time tStUp and the
tE-time should be set to the same value; the default values can be retained.
Note:
The heavy starting logic (address 017 047) can only be activated if the
permissible startup sequence is set to two startups from cold and one
startup from warm.
MP: I< PSx 017 048 024 145 024 195 025 145 Fig. 3-218
Setting the operate value of the minimum current stage of the underload
protection function of motor protection.
MP: tI< PSx 017 050 024 146 024 196 025 146 Fig. 3-218
Setting the operate delay of the minimum current stage of the underload
protection function of motor protection.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-113

7 Settings
(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Enabled PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig. 3-219
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload

THERM: Iref PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig. 3-223
Setting the reference current.

THERM: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other
cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig. 3-223
Setting the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig. 3-223
Setting the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. PSx 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167 Fig. 3-223
Setting for overtemperature resulting from a persistent limit current

(Θmax - Θa,max ).
THERM: Select meas.inputPSx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig: 3-221,
3-222
Selecting if and how the coolant temperature is measured: Via the PT100,
the 20mA input or Tx (x = 1 to 9).
THERM: Sel. backup th. PSx 072 080 073 080 074 080 075 080
Selecting the backup temperature sensor for the parameter subset PSx.
THERM: Warning temp. PSx 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage (for the 'Absolute replica'
operating mode).
THERM: Default CTA PSx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig. 3-223
Setting the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.

THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.

Note:
If the operating mode has been set to 'Absolute replica', the value here will
be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig. 3-223
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
7-114 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig. 3-223
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.
THERM: Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079177 Fig. 3-221
This setting specifies how the thermal overload protection function should
continue to operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
The user may select between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and
Blocked.
Unbalance protection I2>: Enabled PSx 018 220 018 221 018 222 018 223 Fig. 3-225
This setting defines the parameter subset in which unbalance protection is

enabled.
I2>: Ineg> PSx 018 091 018 224 018 225 018 226 Fig. 3-226
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage.

I2>: Ineg>> PSx 018 092 018 227 018 228 018 229 Fig. 3-226
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage.

I2>: tIneg> PSx 018 093 018 230 018 231 018 232 Fig. 3-226
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage.

I2>: tIneg>> PSx 018 094 018 233 018 234 018 235 Fig. 3-226
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage.
Time-voltage protection V<>: Enabled PSx 076 246 077 246 078 246 079 246 Fig. 3-227
This setting defines the parameter subset in which time-voltage protection is

enabled.
V<>: Operating mode PSx 076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001 Fig. 3-228
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages (operating

mode "Star") or the phase-to-phase voltages (operating mode "Delta") will
be monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function,
the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/√3 in the
Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the
following example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
80 V (phase-to-phase):
operate value 80 V
Setting value = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of

46.2 V (phase-to-phase):
operate value 46.2 V 46.2 V ⋅ 3
Setting value = = = = 0.80
Vnom 100 V 100V
3 3
V<>: I enable V< PSx 001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161 Page: 3-332
This setting defines the threshold value of the minimum current monitoring
for undervoltage stage V<.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-115

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx 001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165 Page: 3-332
Activation of the minimum current monitoring mode for undervoltage stage

V<.
V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002 Fig. 3-234
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be

monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P139 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the operate value V>.

V<>: V>> PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the operate value V>>.

V<>: tV> PSx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx 076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV>> PSx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the operate value V<.

V<>: V<< PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the operate value V<<.

V<>: tV< PSx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.

V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx 076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV<< PSx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: Vpos> PSx 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate value Vpos>.

V<>: Vpos>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate value Vpos>>.

V<>: tVpos> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.

V<>: tVpos>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.

V<>: Vpos< PSx 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate value Vpos<.

V<>: Vpos<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate value Vpos<<.

V<>: tVpos< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.

V<>: tVpos<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.
7-116 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: Vneg> PSx 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023 Fig. 3-233
Setting for the operate value Vneg>.

V<>: Vneg>> PSx 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024 Fig. 3-233
Setting for the operate value Vneg>>.

V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025 Fig. 3-233
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.

V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026 Fig. 3-233
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.

V<>: VNG> PSx 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011 Fig. 3-235
Setting for the operate value VNG>.

V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012 Fig. 3-235
Setting for the operate value VNG>>.

V<>: tVNG> PSx 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013 Fig. 3-235
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.

V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014 Fig. 3-235
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.

V<>: tTransient PSx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig. 3-230
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage
stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig. 3-229
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 Fig. 3-232
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived
voltages such as Vneg and VNG.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-117

7 Settings
(continued)
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Enabled PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 Fig. 3-236
protection
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
f<>: Oper. mode f4 PSx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency

protection.
f<>: f1 PSx 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 Fig. 3-240
f<>: f2 PSx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
f<>: f3 PSx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
f<>: f4 PSx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 Fig. 3-240
f<>: tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
f<>: tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
f<>: tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: df1/dt PSx 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 Fig. 3-240
f<>: df2/dt PSx 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
f<>: df3/dt PSx 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
f<>: df4/dt PSx 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1 PSx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Delta f2 PSx 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
f<>: Delta f3 PSx 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
f<>: Delta f4 PSx 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Setting for Delta f.

"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
f<>: Delta t1 PSx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Delta t2 PSx 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
f<>: Delta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
f<>: Delta t4 PSx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Setting for Delta t.

"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
7-118 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Power directional protection P<>: Enabled PSx 014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255 Fig. 3-241
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional

P<>: P> PSx 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202 Fig. 3-243
Setting the operate value P> for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P> PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 Fig. 3-243
Setting the operate delay of stage P>.

P<>: Release delay P> PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135 Fig. 3-243
Setting the release delay of stage P>.

P<>: Direction P> PSx 017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139 Fig. 3-243
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P> trip signal
will be issued for 'forward', 'backward' or 'non-directional' fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 Fig. 3-243
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P> for the active power.
P<>: P>> PSx 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143 Fig. 3-243
Setting the operate value P>> for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151 Fig. 3-243
Setting the operate delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Release delay P>>PSx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155 Fig. 3-243
Setting the release delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Direction P>> PSx 017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159 Fig. 3-244
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147 Fig. 3-243
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P>> for the active power.
P<>: Q> PSx 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163 Fig. 3-245
Setting the operate value Q> of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 Fig. 3-245
Setting the operate delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Release delay Q> PSx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175 Fig. 3-245
Setting the release delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Direction Q> PSx 017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179 Fig. 3-245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 Fig. 3-245
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q> of the reactive power.
P<>: Q>> PSx 017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183 Fig. 3-245
Setting the operate value Q>> of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191 Fig. 3-245
Setting the operate delay of stage Q>>.

P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195 Fig. 3-245
Setting the release delay of stage Q>>.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-119

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Direction Q>> PSx 017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199 Fig. 3-245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187 Fig. 3-245
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q>> of the reactive
power.
P<>: P< PSx 017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033 Fig. 3-247
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 Fig: 3-247,
3-249
Setting the operate delay of stage P<.
P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 Fig: 3-247,
3-249
Setting the release delay of stage P<.
P<>: Direction P< PSx 017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233 Fig. 3-248
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 Fig. 3-247
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P< for the active power.
P<>: P<< PSx 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237 Fig. 3-247
Setting the operate value P<< for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245 Fig. 3-247
Setting the operate delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Release delay P<<PSx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249 Fig. 3-247
Setting the release delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Direction P<< PSx 017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253 Fig. 3-248
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241 Fig. 3-247
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P<< for the active power.
P<>: Q< PSx 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038 Fig. 3-250
Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055 Fig: 3-250,
3-252
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059 Fig: 3-250,
3-252
Setting the release delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Direction Q< PSx 018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084 Fig. 3-251
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 Fig. 3-250
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q< of the reactive power.
P<>: Q<< PSx 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088 Fig. 3-250
Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power.
7-120 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216 Fig. 3-250
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239 Fig. 3-2505
Setting the release delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Direction Q<< PSx 018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245 Fig. 3-251
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098 Fig. 3-250
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q<< of the reactive
power.
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 Fig: 3-247,
3-249, 3-250,
3-252
Setting the time limit of the signals generated by the stages P<, P<<, Q<
and Q<< after the respective operate delay has elapsed.
7.1.3.4 Control
Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003 Fig. 3-80
Selecting the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002 Fig. 3-80
Selecting the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022 Fig. 3-65
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.

MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029 Fig. 3-65
Setting the operate delay of the function blocks.

MAIN: Perm.No.mot.drive op 221 027 Fig. 3-82
Setting the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M A I N : M o n . t i m e m o t . d r i v e s .
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084 Page: 3-256;
422
MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. 221 088 Page: 3-256;
422
Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
MAIN: Mon.time mot.drives 221 026 Fig. 3-82
Setting the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-121

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Cool.time mot.drives 221 028 Fig. 3-82
Setting the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.

MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060 Fig. 3-305
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.

MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085 Page: 3-256;
422
MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign 221 089 Page: 3-256;
422
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap.
External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000
DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050
Setting the designation of the respective external device.

DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004 Fig: 3-296,
3-302, 3-303
DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).

DEV01: Latching time 210 005 Fig: 3-297,
3-303, 3-304
DEV02: Latching time 210 055
Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear

position signal – "Open" or "Closed" – has been received.
7-122 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011 Fig: 3-296,

3-302
DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and
chatter suppression.
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012 Fig: 3-296,
3-302
DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062
This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be

suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027 Fig: 3-296,
3-302
DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024
Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-123

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014 Fig: 3-296,

3-302
DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in /

unplugged) of the switch truck plug.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021 Fig. 3-300
DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022 Fig. 3-300
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general
trip command 2” of the protection function.
definitions.
7-124 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023 Fig. 3-300
DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close
command" of the protection function.
definitions.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019 Fig. 3-297
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020 Fig. 3-297
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-125

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Open' command.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016 Fig. 3-304
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Close' command.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025 Fig. 3-299
DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026 Fig. 3-299
DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
7-126 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039 Fig. 3-298

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040 Fig. 3-298
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-127

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041 Fig. 3-298
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042 Fig. 3-298
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
7-128 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000 Fig. 3-308

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 250 010
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-129

7 Settings
(continued)
7.2 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines
7.2.1 General
The P139 was subjected to risk analysis based on the DIN V 19 250 standard of May
1994 (on basic safety considerations for measuring and protection relays) as well as
DIN V 19 251 of February 1995 (on measuring and protection relays, specifications and
measures for their fail-safe functioning) and owing to a lack of more specific standards
also based on DIN V VDE 0801 (on computers in safety systems).
Based on this risk analysis involving the examination of extensive measures for
prevention and management of malfunction, the P139 has been classified in
specifications class 3. According to NAMUR NE 31 (NAMUR: German committee on
standards for measuring and control engineering), specifications class 3 corresponds to
risk area 1. For this risk area, a protection device of single-channel design with alarm
signal and/or normally-energized arrangement (‘closed-circuit principle’) will normally
suffice. In special cases, a requirement for a higher specifications class can be met by a
customized ‘1 out of 2’ or ‘2 out of 3’ circuit.
By connection and configuration of the output relay M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty , the
increased-safety machine can be switched off immediately or, alternatively, an alarm
signal can be given for delayed switch-off based on an assessment of the operational
conditions by trained staff.
7-130 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

7 Settings
(continued)
7.2.2 Restrictive Safety-Oriented Configuration
For the P139 to operate in a restrictive safety-oriented mode under all operational
conditions, the output relays must be operated in a normally-energized arrangement
('closed-circuit principle'). In this arrangement, the relevant output relay is energized
during normal operation and drops out in the event of an activation of the associated
function or in the event of a malfunction.
On the configuration of functions, please see the Chapter 'Local Control'.
Essential General Configuration
Function Address Folder 1 Setting

MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Par/Func/Glob/’ Yes = on (1)
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Par/Func/Glob/’ No (0)
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Par/Func/Glob/’ No (0)
DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008 Par/Conf/ With (1)
MP: Function group MP 056 022 Par/Conf/ With (1)
I2>: Function group I2> 056 024 Par/Conf/ With (1)
DTOC: General enable USER 022 075 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
MP: General enable USER 017 059 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
I2>: General enable USER 018 090 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
In order to implement a restrictive safety-oriented configuration for the protection of

electrical increased-safety machines, the configuration should be equivalent to the
example shown in the table below:
Relay Function Address Folder Associated

Function
K 902 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 902 150 196 Par/Conf/ MAIN: Gen. trip
command 1
OUTP: Oper. mode K 902 150 197 Par/Conf/ NE updating
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 021 001 Par/Func/Glob/’ MP: Trip signal
DTOC: Trip
signal
I2>: tIneg>
elapsed
1
siehe Kapitel ”Bedienung” dieser Betriebsanleitung.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 7-131
7 Settings
(continued)
During device startup and during P139 operation, cyclic self-monitoring tests are run. In
the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored
in a non-volatile (NV) memory – the monitoring signal memory (see Chapter
'Troubleshooting'). A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal memory is
given in the address list (see Appendix). Monitoring signals prompted by a serious
hardware or software fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. The entry of monitoring signals of lesser significance into the monitoring signal
memory is optional. The user can select this option by setting a 'm out of n' parameter.
The blocking of the protection device is governed by similar principles, that is, signals
prompted by a serious hardware or software fault in the unit always lead to a blocking of
the unit. The assignment of signals of lesser significance to the signal
M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty by an ‘m out of n’ parameter (M AIN : F c t . a s s i g n m .
F a u l t ) is optional.

Function
K 908 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 908 150 214 Par/Conf/ MAIN: Fct.
assign. fault
OUTP: Oper. mode K 908 150 215 Par/Conf/ NE updating
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Par/Func/Glob/’ SFMON: Error K
902
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 1
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 4
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 9
For safety-oriented operation, the ‘Warning’ can be configured onto an output relay as in
the following example.

Function
E.g. OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 901 150 193 Par/Conf/ SFMON:
K 901 Warning (relay)
SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Par/Func/Glob/’ SFMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
SFMON:
Undervoltage
7-132 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

8 Information and Control Functions
8.1 Operation
The P139 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes.
This information can be read out from the integrated local control panel.
All this information can be found in the ‘Operation’ and ‘Events’ folders in the menu tree.
Note:
In the following tables the localization of the corresponding function description is

indicated in the right hand side column. "Figure: 3-xxx" refers to a logic diagram which
displays the address, "Figure*: 3-xxx" to a figure subtitle or figure report sheet, "Page: 3-
xxx" to a page.
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. 120 040 Page:3-30
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored 120 041 Page:3-30
Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages

within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result 120 057 Page:3-30
COMM3: Loop back receive 120 056 Page:3-30
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-1

(continued)
Measured data input MEASI: Current IDC 004 134 Fig. 3-28
Display of the input current.

MEASI: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig. 3-28
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136 Fig. 3-28
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig. 3-29
Display of the scaled linearized value.

MEASI: Temperature T 004 133 Fig. 3-30
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board.
MEASI: Temperature T1 004 224 Fig: 3-31,
3-284
MEASI: Temperature T2 004 225
Display of temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature p/c board.

MEASI: Temperature Tmax 004 233 Fig. 3-30
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature

input on the analog p/c board.
MEASI: Temp. T1 max. 004 234 Fig. 3-31
MEASI: Temp. T2 max. 004 235
Display of maximum temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature

p/c board.
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T 004 221 Fig. 3-30
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
8-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T1 004 081 Fig. 3-31
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T2 004 082
Display of temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature p/c board

referred to 100°C.
Measured data output MEASO: Current A-1 005 100 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Current A-2 005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig. 3-84
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.

MAIN: Time of day 003 091 Fig. 3-84
Display of the time of day.
Note: The time can also be set here.

MAIN: Time switching 003 095 Fig. 3-84
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times

assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram

from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-3

(continued)
MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig. 3-58
Display of system frequency.

MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. 005 050 Fig. 3-48
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,demand 005 036 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IA prim,demand 006 226 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IB prim,demand 006 227 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IC prim,demand 006 228 Fig. 3-49
Display the three phase currents as primary quantities.

MAIN: IP,maxprim,demand.st 005 034 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IA prim,demand stor. 006 223 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IB prim,demand stor. 006 224 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IC prim,demand stor. 006 225 Fig. 3-49
Display the three stored phase currents as primary quantities.

MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim. 005 055 Fig. 3-48
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current A prim. 005 040 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current B prim. 006 040 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current C prim. 007 040 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) prim. 005 010 Fig. 3-48
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IN prim. 004 043 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. 008 042 Fig. 3-53
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. 009 042 Fig. 3-53
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. 005 042 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim. 006 042 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim. 007 042 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim. 005 012 Fig. 3-53
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary

quantity.
8-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage VNG prim. 004 041 Fig. 3-54
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. 005 046 Fig. 3-55
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. 008 044 Fig. 3-53
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage VPP,min prim 009 044 Fig. 3-53
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-B prim. 005 044 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim. 006 044 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim. 007 044 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Appar. power S prim. 005 025 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Active power P prim. 004 050 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. 004 052 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim 005 061 Fig. 3-59
Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim 005 062 Fig. 3-59
Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React.en. outp. prim 005 063 Fig. 3-59
Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React. en. inp. prim 005 064 Fig. 3-59
Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Frequency f p.u. 004 070 Fig. 3-58
Display of system frequency referred to fnom.

MAIN: Current IP,max p.u. 005 051 Fig. 3-48
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,demand 005 037 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IA p.u.,demand 006 235 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IB p.u.,demand 006 236 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IC p.u.,demand 006 237 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed phase currents referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,maxp.u.,demand.st 005 035 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-5

(continued)
MAIN: IA p.u.,demand stor. 006 232 Fig. 3-49

MAIN: IB p.u.,demand stor. 006 233 Fig. 3-49
MAIN: IC p.u.,demand stor. 006 234 Fig. 3-49
Display of the delayed stored phase currents referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IP,min p.u. 005 056 Fig. 3-48
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current A p.u. 005 041 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current B p.u. 006 041 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current C p.u. 007 041 Fig. 3-48
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u. 005 011 Fig. 3-48
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IN p.u. 004 044 Fig. 3-50
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ipos p.u. 009 016
Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current Ineg p.u. 009 015
Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u. 008 043 Fig. 3-53
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u. 009 043 Fig. 3-53
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. 005 043 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to

Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. 006 043 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. 007 043 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/©3 p.u. 005 013 Fig. 3-53
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u. 004 042 Fig. 3-54
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. 005 047 Fig. 3-55
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u. 008 045 Fig. 3-53
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
8-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u. 009 045 Fig. 3-53
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. 005 045 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u. 006 045 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u. 007 045 Fig. 3-53
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage Vpos p.u. 009 018 Fig. 3-53
Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage Vneg p.u. 009 017 Fig. 3-53
Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Appar. power S p.u. 005 026 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Active power P p.u. 004 051 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. 004 053 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal

apparent power Snom.
MAIN: Active power factor 004 054 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated active power factor.

MAIN: Load angle phi A 004 055 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.

MAIN: Load angle phi B 004 056 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.

MAIN: Load angle phi C 004 057 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.

MAIN: Angle phi N 004 072 Fig. 3-56
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG.
MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u 005 073 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u 005 074 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u 005 075 Fig. 3-56
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C referred to 100°C.

MAIN: Angle phi N p.u. 005 076 Fig. 3-56
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG referred to 100°.
MAIN: Angle ΣVPG vs. IN 005 009 Fig. 3-56
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-7

(continued)
MAIN: Angle ΣVPG/IN p.u. 005 072 Fig. 3-56
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN referred to 100°.
MAIN: Phase rel.,IN vs ΣIP 004 073 Fig. 3-57
The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are

compared.
MAIN: Current ΣI unfilt. 004 074
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Current IN,act p.u. 004 045 Fig. 3-193
determination using Display of the updated value for the active component of residual current
steady-state values referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN,reac p.u. 004 046 Fig. 3-193
Display of the updated value for the reactive component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 004 047 Fig. 3-194
Display of the updated value for the harmonic content of residual current
referred to IN,nom. This display is only active when the steady-state current
evaluation mode of the ground fault direction determination function
(GFDSS) is enabled.
GFDSS: Admitt. Y(N) p.u. 004 191 Fig. 3-199
Display of the updated admittance value referred to YN,nom.With

setting:GFDSS: Eva l ua tio n VNG is set to ”Measured”:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNGnom
With setting:GFDSS: Eva lu a ti on VNG is set to ”Calculated”:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
GFDSS: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 004 192 Fig. 3-199
Display of the updated conductance value referred to YN,nom.With

setting:GFDSS: Eva l ua tio n VNG is set to ”Measured”:
GFDSS: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 004 193 Fig. 3-199
Display of the updated susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

With setting:GFDSS: Eva lu a ti on VNG is set to ”Measured”:
Motor protection MP: Therm.repl.buffer MP 004 018 Fig. 3-215
Display of the buffer content of the motor protection function.

MP: St-ups still permitt 004 012 Fig. 3-215
Display of the current number of motor startups still permitted before RC

blocking.
MP: Therm. repl. MP p.u. 005 071 Fig. 3-215
Display of the buffer content of the motor protection (referred to 100%).

MP: St-ups st. perm.p.u. 005 086 Fig. 3-215
Display of the current number of motor startups still permitted before RC

blocking (referred to the factor 10).
8-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Status THERM replica 004 016 Fig. 3-223
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Object temperature 004 137 Fig. 3-223
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Coolant temperature 004 149 Fig. 3-223
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at

TH ER M : Se lec t C T A.
When set to "Default temp. value" the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to "From 20 mA input"
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
THERM: Pre-trip time left 004 139 Fig. 3-223
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
THERM: Therm. replica p.u. 004 017 Fig. 3-223
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object temp. p.u. 004 179 Fig. 3-223
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. 004 178 Fig. 3-223
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 °C.

THERM: Temp. offset replica 004 109 Fig. 3-223
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to zero in this case.
Binary counts COUNT: Count 1 217 100 Fig. 3-312
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-9

(continued)
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Communication interface 3 COMM3: State receive 1 120 000 Page:3-30

COMM3: State receive 2 120 003
Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State send 1 121 000 Page:3-30
COMM3: State send 2 121 002
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010
Substation Event
GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012
8-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Output 1 state 104 100
Status Events
GSSE: Output 2 state 104 103
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-11

(continued)
Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.

GSSE: Input 1 state 105 000
Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.
Binary input INP: State U 301 152 216 Fig. 3-24

INP: State U 302 152 219
INP: State U 303 152 222
INP: State U 304 152 225
INP: State U 601 152 090
INP: State U 602 152 093
INP: State U 603 152 096
INP: State U 604 152 099
INP: State U 605 152 102
INP: State U 606 152 105
INP: State U 701 152 108
INP: State U 702 152 111
8-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
INP: State U 703 152 114
INP: State U 704 152 117
INP: State U 705 152 120
INP: State U 706 152 123
INP: State U 801 184 001
INP: State U 802 184 005
INP: State U 803 184 009
INP: State U 804 184 013
INP: State U 805 184 017
INP: State U 806 184 021
INP: State U 807 184 025
INP: State U 808 184 029
INP: State U 809 184 033
INP: State U 810 184 037
INP: State U 811 184 041
INP: State U 812 184 045
INP: State U 813 184 049
INP: State U 814 184 053
INP: State U 815 184 057
INP: State U 816 184 061
INP: State U 817 184 065
INP: State U 818 184 069
INP: State U 819 184 073
INP: State U 820 184 077
INP: State U 821 184 081
INP: State U 822 184 085
INP: State U 823 184 089
INP: State U 824 184 093
INP: State U 901 152 144
INP: State U 902 152 147
INP: State U 903 152 150
INP: State U 904 152 153
INP: State U 1001 152 162
INP: State U 1002 152 165
INP: State U 1003 152 168
INP: State U 1004 152 171
INP: State U 1005 152 174
INP: State U 1006 152 177
INP: State U 1201 152 198
INP: State U 1202 152 201
INP: State U 1203 152 204
INP: State U 1204 152 207
INP: State U 1205 152 210
INP: State U 1206 152 213
INP: State U 1401 190 001
INP: State U 1402 190 005
INP: State U 1403 190 009
INP: State U 1404 190 013
INP: State U 1405 190 017
INP: State U 1406 190 021
INP: State U 1601 192 001
INP: State U 1602 192 005
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-13

(continued)
INP: State U 1603 192 009
INP: State U 1604 192 013
INP: State U 1605 192 017
INP: State U 1606 192 021
INP: State U 1607 192 025
INP: State U 1608 192 029
INP: State U 1609 192 033
INP: State U 1610 192 037
INP: State U 1611 192 041
INP: State U 1612 192 045
INP: State U 1613 192 049
INP: State U 1614 192 053
INP: State U 1615 192 057
INP: State U 1616 192 061
INP: State U 1617 192 065
INP: State U 1618 192 069
INP: State U 1619 192 073
INP: State U 1620 192 077
INP: State U 1621 192 081
INP: State U 1622 192 085
INP: State U 1623 192 089
INP: State U 1624 192 093
INP: State U 2001 153 086
INP: State U 2002 153 089
INP: State U 2003 153 092
INP: State U 2004 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
"Low": Not energized.
"High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
Binary outputs OUTP: State K 301 151 044
OUTP: State K 302 151 047 Fig. 3-33

OUTP: State K 601 150 120
8-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
OUTP: State K 1007 150 234
OUTP: State K 1008 150 237
OUTP: State K 1201 151 008
OUTP: State K 1202 151 011
OUTP: State K 1203 151 014
OUTP: State K 1204 151 017
OUTP: State K 1205 151 020
OUTP: State K 1206 151 023
OUTP: State K 1401 169 001
OUTP: State K 1402 169 005
OUTP: State K 1403 169 009
OUTP: State K 1404 169 013
OUTP: State K 1405 169 017
OUTP: State K 1406 169 021
OUTP: State K 1601 171 001
OUTP: State K 1602 171 005
OUTP: State K 1603 171 009
OUTP: State K 1604 171 013
OUTP: State K 1605 171 017
OUTP: State K 1606 171 021
OUTP: State K 1607 171 025
OUTP: State K 1608 171 029
OUTP: State K 1801 173 001
OUTP: State K 1802 173 005
OUTP: State K 1803 173 009
OUTP: State K 1804 173 013
OUTP: State K 1805 173 017
OUTP: State K 1806 173 021
OUTP: State K 2001 151 200
OUTP: State K 2002 151 203
OUTP: State K 2003 151 206
OUTP: State K 2004 151 209
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-15

(continued)
OUTP: State K 2005 151 212
OUTP: State K 2006 151 215
OUTP: State K 2007 151 218
OUTP: State K 2008 151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the output relay.
"Low": The output relay is not energized.
"High": The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
LED indicators LED: State H 1 green 085 180
LED: State H 2 yell. 085 000
LED: State H 3 yell. 085 003
LED: State H 4 red 085 006
LED: State H10 red 085 024 Fig. 3-42

LED: State H11 red 085 027
LED: State H17 red. 085 181
LED: State H 4 green 085 056
LED: State H10 green 085 074 Fig. 3-42

LED: State H11 green 085 077
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
"Inactive": The LED indicator is not energized.
"Active": The LED indicator is energized.
8-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals
Local control panel LOC: Edit mode 080 111
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 1 EXT 030 230
LOC: Trig. menu jmp 2 EXT 030 231
LOC: Illumination on EXT 037 101
LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005 Fig. 3-8

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004 Fig. 3-8
LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel stat. 221 076 Fig. 3-3
LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel flash. 221 077 Fig. 3-3
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. EXT 003 173 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT 037 074 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
COMM1: Command blocking 003 174 Fig. 3-10
COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. 037 075 Fig: 3-11,

3-12,3-13
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219 Fig. 3-11
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218 Fig. 3-12
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS 003 221 Fig. 3-13
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig. 3-14
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig. 3-15
COMM1: COURIER 103 041 Fig. 3-16
COMM3: Reset No.tlg.err.EXT 006 054 Fig.*: 3-86
COMM3: Communications fault 120 043 Fig. 3-21
COMM3: Comm. link failure 120 044 Fig. 3-21
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 120 045
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180
Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC
address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!
IEC: Control reservation 221 082
Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device

("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-17

(continued)
Generic Object Oriented GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000
Substation Event
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an

external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001
8-18 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-19

(continued)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,

representing the state of an external device.
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried
out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time
period at which the next state signal must be received.
EC Generic Substation Status GSSE: IED link faulty 105 181
Events
Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE
sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has
disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the GSSE sending device will
attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period
at which the next state signal must be received.
8-20 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
IRIG-B interface IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig. 3-23

IRIGB: Synchron. ready 023 202 Fig. 3-23
Measured data input MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT 006 076 Fig.*: 3-86
MEASI: Enabled 035 008 Fig. 3-25
MEASI: RTD HW Failure 006 102
MEASI: I/O HW Failure 006 103
MEASI: PT100 open circuit 040 190 Fig. 3-30

MEASI: T1 open circ. 040 193 Fig: 3-31,
3-221,3-285
3-285
3-285
3-285, 3-286
3-285,3-286
3-285,3-286
3-285,3-286
3-285,3-286
3-285,3-286
MEASI: Overload 20mA input 040 191 Fig. 3-28
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. 040 192 Fig. 3-28
Binary outputs OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT 040 014 Fig. 3-33
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT 040 015 Fig. 3-33
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked 021 015 Fig. 3-33
OUTP: Latching reset 040 088 Fig. 3-33
MEASO: Enabled 037 102 Fig. 3-35
MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT 036 085 Fig. 3-36
MEASO: Reset output EXT 036 087 Fig. 3-37
MEASO: Output reset 037 117 Fig. 3-37
MEASO: Valid BCD value 037 050 Fig: 3-38,
3-39
Measured data output MEASO: 1-digit bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig. 3-39
MEASO: 1-digit bit 1 (BCD) 037 052 Fig. 3-39
MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Value A-1 output 037 118 Fig. 3-41
MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
MEASO: Value A-2 output 037 119
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-21

(continued)
Main function MAIN: Healthy 060 001
Signal that the protection unit is operational. As a standard this signal is

linked to L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 g r e e n .
MAIN: Parallel trip EXT 037 019 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Enable protect. EXT 003 027 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209 Fig. 3-86
MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT 005 210 Fig.*: 3-86
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT 005 211 Fig. 3-51
MAIN: Reset meas.v.en. EXT 005 212 Fig.*: 3-86
MAIN: Group reset 2 EXT 005 252 Fig. 3-86
MAIN: General reset EXT 005 255 Fig. 3-4
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT 003 026 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Time switching EXT 003 096
MAIN: System IN enable EXT 040 130 Fig. 3-62

MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086
MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT 221 090
MAIN: Syst. IN disable EXT 040 131 Fig. 3-62

MAIN: Test mode EXT 037 070 Fig. 3-88
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig. 3-66
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT 036 045 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061 Fig. 3-178
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT 036 086 Fig. 3-178
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT 036 033 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT 036 051 Fig: 3-68,
3-69,3-161,
3-276,3-277
MAIN: Manual close EXT 036 047 Fig. 3-152
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 037 018 Fig. 3-77
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT 041 023 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Man. close cmd. EXT 041 022 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: CB open 3p EXT 031 028 Fig: 3-258,
3-259,3-
263,3-264,
3-268
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT 060 060 Fig. 3-84
MAIN: Ch.1 an. NCIT on EXT 010 188
MAIN: Ch.2 an. NCIT on EXT 010 190
MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled 003 028 Fig. 3-61

MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled 038 046 Fig. 3-61
MAIN: Syst.IN ext/user en. 040 132 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: System IN enabled 040 133 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: System IN disabled 040 134 Fig. 3-62
MAIN: Device not ready 004 060 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Enable control 221 058 Fig. 3-80
MAIN: Test mode 037 071 Fig. 3-88
MAIN: Blocked/faulty 004 065 Fig. 3-67
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked 021 013 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset 040 139 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Manual trip signal 034 017 Fig. 3-77
MAIN: Man. close command 037 068 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 036 251 Fig. 3-76
8-22 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 036 005 Fig. 3-76

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 036 023 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig. 3-85
MAIN: Gen. trip command 035 071 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 036 071 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 036 022 Fig. 3-76
MAIN: Close command 037 009 Fig: 3-180, 3-
187
MAIN: Close aft.man.cl.rqu 037 012 Fig. 3-69
MAIN: Dynam. param. active 040 090 Fig. 3-63
MAIN: CB open 3p 031 040
MAIN: CB closed 3p 031 042
MAIN: CB pos.sig. implaus. 031 041
MAIN: General starting 040 000 Fig. 3-74

MAIN: tGS elapsed 040 009 Fig. 3-74
MAIN: Starting A 040 005 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Starting B 040 006 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Starting C 040 007 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Starting GF 040 008 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Starting Ineg 040 105 Fig. 3-73
MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. 041 027 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. 041 028 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Rush restr. C trig. 041 029 Fig. 3-64
MAIN: Timer stage P elaps. 040 031 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Timer st. Ineg elaps 040 050 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Timer stage N elaps. 040 032 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: TripSig. tI>/tIrefP> 040 042 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: TrSg.tIneg>/Iref,neg 040 051 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: TripSig tIN>/tIrefN> 040 043 Fig. 3-75
MAIN: Ground fault 041 087 Fig. 3-72
MAIN: Ground fault A 041 054 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Ground fault B 041 055 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Ground fault C 041 056 Fig. 3-71
MAIN: Gnd. fault forw./LS 041 088 Fig. 3-72
MAIN: Gnd. fault backw./BS 041 089 Fig. 3-72
MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001 Fig. 3-80
MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000 Fig. 3-80
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023 Fig. 3-65
MAIN: Mon. mot. drives tr. 221 056 Fig. 3-82
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018 Fig. 3-81
MAIN: CB trip internal 221 006 Fig. 3-79
MAIN: CB tripped 221 016 Fig. 3-79
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055 Fig. 3-70
MAIN: Communication error 221 019 Fig. 3-83
MAIN: Ch.1 analog NCIT on 010 189
MAIN: Ch.2 analog NCIT on 010 191
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101 Fig. 3-297

MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-23

(continued)
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via user EXT 036 101 Fig. 3-89
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT 065 002 Fig. 3-89
PSS: Control via user 036 102 Fig. 3-89
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset 003 061 Fig. 3-89
PSS: PS 1 activated ext. 036 094 Fig. 3-89
PSS: Actual param. subset 003 062 Fig. 3-89
PSS: PS 1 active 036 090 Fig. 3-89
Self-monitoring SFMON: faulty DSP 093 127
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP 093 128
SFMON: CB faulty EXT 098 072
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070 Fig. 3-90

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100 Fig. 3-90
SFMON: Warm restart exec. 041 202
SFMON: Cold restart exec. 041 201
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure 090 019
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122
SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100
8-24 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000
SFMON: Defect.module slot11 097 010
SFMON: +15V faulty mod. N 093 096
SFMON: -15V faulty mod. N 093 097
SFMON: DAC faulty module N 093 095
SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
SFMON: Mod.Y RTD DPR faulty 093 108
SFMON: Mod.Y RTD RAM faulty 093 109
SFMON: Error K 301 097 021
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-25

(continued)
8-26 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig. 3-92

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
SFMON: Inval. SW COMM1/IEC 093 075
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
SFMON: Invalid SW vers YRTD 093 123
SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112
SFMON: Time-out module YRTD 093 119
SFMON: IRIGB faulty 093 117
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000 Fig. 3-274

SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001 Fig. 3-276

SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009 Fig. 3-276
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022 Fig. 3-277
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017 Fig. 3-274

SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005 Fig. 3-275
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016 Fig. 3-274
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
SFMON: Invalid SW vers DHMI 093 145
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
SFMON: Telecom. faulty 098 006 Fig. 3-156

SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035 Fig. 3-223
SFMON: Setting error CBM 098 020
SFMON: CTA error 098 034 Fig. 3-221

SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094 Fig. 3-207
SFMON: CB No. CB op. > 098 066
SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098 Fig. 3-202

SFMON: CB rem. No. CB op. < 098 067
SFMON: CB ΣItrip > 098 068
SFMON: CB ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
SFMON: CB tmax> A 098 070
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 114 Fig. 3-41

SFMON: CB tmax> B 098 071
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 093 115
SFMON: CB tmax> C 098 077
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116 Fig. 3-28

SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024 Fig. 3-30
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-27

(continued)
SFMON: T1 open circ. 098 029 Fig. 3-31

SFMON: T2 open circ. 098 030
SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025 Fig. 3-28

SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026 Fig. 3-28
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028 Fig. 3-240
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync 093 120
SFMON: Output 30 098 053
SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054
SFMON: CB pos.sig. implaus. 098 124
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 213 Fig. 3-86
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 240 Fig.*: 3-86
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 241 Fig.*: 3-86
OL_RC: Record. in progress 035 003 Fig. 3-96
OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow 035 007 Fig. 3-97
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 242 Fig.*: 3-86
GF_RC: Record. in progress 035 005 Fig. 3-105
GF_RC: GF memory overflow 035 006 Fig. 3-106
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Trigger EXT 036 088 Fig. 3-108
Fault recording FT_RC: Record.trig active 002 002 Fig. 3-114

FT_RC: Reset record. EXT 005 243 Fig.*: 3-86
FT_RC: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig. 3-114
FT_RC: Trigger 037 076 Fig. 3-114
FT_RC: I> triggered 040 063 Fig. 3-114
FT_RC: Record. in progress 035 000 Fig. 3-114
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow 035 001 Fig. 3-115
FT_RC: System disturb. runn 035 004 Fig. 3-114
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 035 002
8-28 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT 041 060 Fig. 3-118
protection
DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 041 061 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Blocking tI>>> EXT 041 062 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Block. tIneg> EXT 036 141 Fig. 3-120
DTOC: Block. tIneg>> EXT 036 142 Fig. 3-120
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 036 143 Fig. 3-120
DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT 041 063 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT 041 064 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>> EXT 041 065 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>>> EXT 041 101 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Enabled 040 120 Fig. 3-117
DTOC: Starting I> 040 036 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Starting I>> 040 029 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Starting I>>> 039 075 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Starting Ineg> 036 145 Fig: 3-73,
3-74,3-120
DTOC: Starting Ineg>> 036 146 Fig: 3-73,
3-74,3-120
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> 036 147 Fig: 3-73,
3-74,3-120
DTOC: Starting IN> 040 077 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Starting IN>> 040 041 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Starting IN>>> 039 078 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Starting IN>>>> 035 031 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: tI> elapsed 040 010 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: tI>> elapsed 040 033 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: tI>>> elapsed 040 012 Fig. 3-118
DTOC: Trip signal tI> 041 020 Fig. 3-119
DTOC: Trip signal tI>> 040 011 Fig. 3-119
DTOC: Trip signal tI>>> 040 076 Fig. 3-119
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed 036 148 Fig: 3-75,
3-94,3-120
DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed 036 149 Fig: 3-75,
3-94,3-120
DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed 036 150 Fig: 3-75,
3-94,3-120
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg> 036 151 Fig: 3-75,
3-94,3-120,
3-121
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 152 Fig: 3-94,
3-120,3-121
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 153 Fig: 3-94,
3-120,3-121
DTOC: tIN> elapsed 040 013 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: tIN>> elapsed 040 121 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed 039 079 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: tIN>>>> elapsed 035 040 Fig. 3-123
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> 041 021 Fig. 3-124
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> 040 028 Fig. 3-124
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> 040 079 Fig. 3-124
DTOC: Trip sign. tIN>>>> 035 046 Fig. 3-124
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,i. runn 040 086 Fig. 3-125
DTOC: tIN>,interm. elapsed 040 099 Fig. 3-125
DTOC: Trip sig. tIN>,intm. 039 073 Fig. 3-125
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-29

(continued)
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT1: Block. tIref,P> EXT 040 101 Fig. 3-133
protection
IDMT1: Block. tIref,neg>EXT 040 102 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: Block. tIref,N> EXT 040 103 Fig. 3-138
IDMT1: Enabled 040 100 Fig. 3-128
IDMT1: Starting Iref,P> 040 080 Fig. 3-133
IDMT1: tIref,P> elapsed 040 082 Fig. 3-133
IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,P> 040 084 Fig. 3-134
IDMT1: Hold time P running 040 053 Fig. 3-133
IDMT1: Memory P clear 040 110 Fig. 3-133
IDMT1: Starting Iref,neg> 040 107 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: tIref,neg> elapsed 040 109 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 040 108 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: Hold time neg runn. 040 113 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: Memory neg clear 040 111 Fig. 3-136
IDMT1: Starting Iref,N> 040 081 Fig. 3-138
IDMT1: tIref,N> elapsed 040 083 Fig. 3-138
IDMT1: Trip signal tIref,N> 040 085 Fig. 3-139
IDMT1: Hold time N running 040 054 Fig. 3-138
IDMT1: Memory N clear 040 112 Fig. 3-138
IDMT2: Block. tIref,P> EXT 040 136
IDMT2: Block. tIref,neg>EXT 040 149
IDMT2: Block. tIref,N> EXT 040 150
IDMT2: Enabled 040 135
IDMT2: Starting Iref,P> 040 018
IDMT2: tIref,P> elapsed 040 021 Fig. 3-135

IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,P> 040 023 Fig. 3-135
IDMT2: Hold time P running 040 016
IDMT2: Memory P clear 040 178
IDMT2: Starting Iref,neg> 040 156
IDMT2: tIref,neg> elapsed 040 159
IDMT2: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 040 158
IDMT2: Hold time neg runn. 040 189
IDMT2: Memory neg clear 040 179
IDMT2: Starting Iref,N> 040 019
IDMT2: tIref,N> elapsed 040 022 Fig. 3-140

IDMT2: Trip signal tIref,N> 040 024 Fig. 3-140
IDMT2: Hold time N running 040 017
IDMT2: Memory N clear 040 188
8-30 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Short-circuit direction SCDD: Enabled 040 098 Fig. 3-142

determination
SCDD: Blocked 040 062 Fig. 3-144
SCDD: Fault P forward 036 018 Fig. 3-145
SCDD: Fault P backward 036 019 Fig. 3-145
SCDD: Ground fault forward 040 037 Fig. 3-149
SCDD: Ground fault backw. 040 038 Fig. 3-149
SCDD: Fault P or G forwd. 040 039 Fig. 3-151
SCDD: Fault P or G backw. 040 040 Fig. 3-151
SCDD: Forw. w/o measurem. 038 044
SCDD: Direct. using Vmeas 038 045
SCDD: Direct. using memory 038 047
SCDD: tVmemory running 040 034
Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Par. ARC running EXT 039 063 Fig. 3-152
SOTF: Enabled 040 069 Fig. 3-152
SOTF: tManual-close runn. 036 063 Fig. 3-152
SOTF: Trip signal 036 064 Fig. 3-152
Protective signaling PSIG: Enable EXT 037 025 Fig. 3-153

PSIG: Disable EXT 037 026 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Test telecom. EXT 036 038 Fig. 3-155
PSIG: Blocking EXT 036 049 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Receive EXT 036 048 Fig: 3-155,
3-156
PSIG: Ext./user enabled 037 023 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Enabled 015 008 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Ready 037 027 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Not ready 037 028 Fig. 3-153
PSIG: Test telecom. chann. 034 016 Fig. 3-155
PSIG: Telecom. faulty 036 060 Fig. 3-156
PSIG: Send (signal) 036 035 Fig. 3-155
PSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 024 Fig. 3-155
PSIG: Receive (signal) 037 029 Fig. 3-155
PSIG: Trip signal 038 007 Fig. 3-155
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Reset counters EXT 005 244 Fig: 3-175,
Fig.*: 3-86
ARC: Enable EXT 037 010 Fig. 3-159
ARC: Disable EXT 037 011 Fig. 3-159
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C EXT 037 017 Fig. 3-173
ARC: Blocking EXT 036 050 Fig. 3-160
ARC: CB drive ready EXT 004 066 Fig. 3-161
ARC: Ext./user enabled 037 013 Fig. 3-159
ARC: Enabled 015 064 Fig. 3-159
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C 034 023 Fig. 3-173
ARC: Blocked 004 069 Fig. 3-160
ARC: Blocking trip 042 000 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Ready 004 068 Fig. 3-161
ARC: Not ready 037 008 Fig. 3-161
ARC: Reject test HSR 036 055 Fig. 3-173
ARC: Block. time running 037 004 Fig. 3-160
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-31

(continued)
ARC: Cycle running 037 000 Fig. 3-170

ARC: Operat.time running 037 005 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Start by LOGIC 037 078 Fig. 3-169
ARC: Dead time HSR runn. 037 002 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Dead time TDR runn. 037 003 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Reclaim time running 036 042 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Trip signal 039 099 Fig. 3-170
ARC: (Re)close request 037 077 Fig: 3-69,
3-170, 3-179
ARC: (Re)close signal HSR 037 007 Fig. 3-170
ARC: (Re)close signal TDR 037 006 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Reclosure successful 036 062 Fig. 3-170
ARC: Sig.interr. CB trip 036 040 Fig. 3-170
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Ext./user enabled 037 092 Fig. 3-177
ASC: Reset counters EXT 006 074 Fig.*: 3-86
ASC: Enable EXT 037 049 Fig. 3-177
ASC: Disable EXT 037 061 Fig. 3-177
ASC: Blocking EXT 037 048 Fig. 3-178
ASC: Test close requ. EXT 037 064 Fig. 3-179
ASC: Enabl.close requ.EXT 037 063 Fig. 3-179
ASC: Close request EXT 037 062 Fig. 3-179
ASC: Enabled 018 024 Fig. 3-177
ASC: Blocked 038 018 Fig. 3-178
ASC: Ready 037 079 Fig. 3-178
ASC: Not ready 037 082 Fig. 3-178
ASC: Test close request 034 019 Fig. 3-179
ASC: Close request 034 018 Fig. 3-179
ASC: Cycle running 038 019 Fig. 3-183
ASC: Operat.time running 037 093 Fig. 3-183
ASC: Close enable 037 083 Fig: 3-69,
3-181
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch 037 085 Fig. 3-181
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch 037 084 Fig. 3-182
ASC: Close rejection 037 086 Fig. 3-183
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Reset counters EXT 005 245 Fig.*: 3-86
determination using
steady-state values
GFDSS: GF (curr.) eval. EXT 038 020 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: Enabled 042 096 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: GF (pow.) ready 038 026 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: GF (pow.) not ready 038 027 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: GF (curr.) evaluat. 039 071 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: GF (curr.) ready 038 028 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: GF (curr.) not ready 038 029 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: Admittance ready 038 167 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: Admittance not ready 038 168 Fig. 3-188
GFDSS: Grd. fault pow./adm. 009 037 Fig: 3-190,
3-196
GFDSS: Forward / LS 009 035 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
GFDSS: Direct. backward/BS 009 036 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
GFDSS: Starting forward/LS 009 040 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
8-32 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
GFDSS: Starting backw. /BS 009 041 Fig: 3-193,

3-199
GFDSS: Trip signal forw./LS 009 031 Fig: 3-193,
3-199
GFDSS: Ground fault (curr.) 009 038 Fig. 3-194
GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> 009 074 Fig. 3-200
GFDSS: Trip Y(N)> 009 075 Fig. 3-200
GFDSS: Trip signal Y(N)> 009 072 Fig. 3-200
Transient ground fault TGFD: Blocking EXT 004 034 Fig. 3-202
TGFD: Reset counters EXT 005 246 Fig. 3-208
TGFD: Reset signal EXT 004 140 Fig. 3-206
TGFD: Enabled 037 100 Fig. 3-202
TGFD: Ready 037 080 Fig. 3-202
TGFD: Not ready 037 081 Fig. 3-202
TGFD: Ground fault 004 033 Fig. 3-204
TGFD: Direct. determined 004 030 Fig. 3-205
TGFD: Forward / LS 004 031 Fig. 3-205
TGFD: Direct. backward/BS 004 032 Fig. 3-205
TGFD: Signals reset 004 141 Fig. 3-206
Motor protection MP: Therm.repl.block EXT 040 044 Fig. 3-215

MP: Reset replica EXT 041 082 Fig. 3-217
MP: Speed monitor n> EXT 040 045 Fig. 3-215
MP: Sig. Hours_Run > 025 155
MP: Machine stopped 025 158
MP: Machine running 025 159
MP: Enabled 040 115 Fig. 3-209

MP: Reset therm. replica 041 083 Fig. 3-217
MP: Reclosure blocked 040 049 Fig. 3-215
MP: Starting k*Iref> 041 057 Fig. 3-210
MP: Startup 040 119 Fig. 3-215
MP: Trip by failed st-up 041 081 Fig. 3-215
MP: Trip signal 040 046 Fig. 3-215
MP: tI< elapsed 040 047 Fig. 3-218
Thermal overload protection THERM: Therm.repl.block EXT 041 074 Fig. 3-223
THERM: Reset replica EXT 038 061 Fig. 3-224
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig. 3-219
THERM: Reset therm. replica 039 061 Fig. 3-224
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig. 3-223
THERM: CTA error EXT 038 062 Fig. 3-221
THERM: Warning 039 025 Fig. 3-223
THERM: Trip signal 039 020 Fig. 3-223
THERM: Not ready 040 035 Fig. 3-220
THERM: Reclosure blocked 039 024
THERM: Buffer empty 039 112 Fig. 3-223

THERM: CTA error 039 111 Fig. 3-221
THERM: Within pre-trip time 041 109 Fig. 3-223
THERM: Setting error,block. 039 110 Fig. 3-223
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-33

(continued)
Unbalance protection I2>: Blocking EXT 035 100 Fig. 3-226

I2>: Blocking tIneg> EXT 041 076 Fig. 3-226
I2>: Blocking tIneg>> EXT 041 077 Fig. 3-226
I2>: Enabled 040 073 Fig. 3-225
I2>: Starting Ineg> 035 024 Fig. 3-226
I2>: Starting Ineg>> 035 025 Fig. 3-226
I2>: tIneg> elapsed 035 033 Fig. 3-226
I2>: tIneg>> elapsed 035 034 Fig. 3-226
Time-voltage protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT 041 090 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT 041 091 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT 041 092 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT 041 093 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Blocking tVneg> EXT 041 094 Fig. 3-233
V<>: Blocking tVneg>> EXT 041 095 Fig. 3-233
V<>: Blocking tVNG> EXT 041 072 Fig. 3-235
V<>: Blocking tVNG>> EXT 041 073 Fig. 3-235
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig. 3-227
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig. 3-227
V<>: Not ready 042 004 Fig. 3-227
V<>: Starting V>/>> A(-B) 041 031 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V>/>> B(-C) 041 032 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V>/>> C(-A) 041 033 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V> 3-pole 041 097 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig. 3-229
V<>: tV> elapsed 041 034 Fig. 3-229
V<>: tV> 3-pole elapsed 041 098 Fig. 3-229
V<>: tV>> elapsed 041 035 Fig. 3-229
V<>: Starting V</<< A(-B) 041 038 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting V</<< B(-C) 041 039 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting V</<< C(-A) 041 040 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting V< 3-pole 042 005 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV< elapsed 041 041 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV< elaps. transient 042 023 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed 042 006 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV< 3p elaps. trans. 042 024 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Fault V< 3-pole 041 111 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV<< elapsed 041 042 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. 042 025 Fig. 3-230
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans. 042 007 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig. 3-230
V<>: Starting Vpos> 042 010 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Starting Vpos>> 042 011 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos> elapsed 042 012 Fig. 3-232
8-34 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
V<>: tVpos>> elapsed 042 013 Fig. 3-232

V<>: Starting Vpos< 042 014 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Starting Vpos<< 042 015 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos< elapsed 042 016 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos< elaps. trans. 042 026 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Fault Vpos< 041 113 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos<< elapsed 042 017 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos<< elaps.trans. 042 027 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Fault Vpos<< 041 114 Fig. 3-232
V<>: tVpos</<< elap.trans 042 018 Fig. 3-232
V<>: Starting Vneg> 042 019 Fig. 3-233
V<>: Starting Vneg>> 042 020 Fig. 3-233
V<>: tVneg> elapsed 042 021 Fig. 3-233
V<>: tVneg>> elapsed 042 022 Fig. 3-233
V<>: Starting VNG> 041 044 Fig. 3-235
V<>: Starting VNG>> 042 008 Fig. 3-235
V<>: tVNG> elapsed 041 045 Fig. 3-235
V<>: tVNG>> elapsed 041 046 Fig. 3-235
Circuit Breaker Failure f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-86
Protection
f<>: Blocking f1 EXT 042 103 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Blocking f2 EXT 042 104
f<>: Enabled 042 100 Fig. 3-236

f<>: Ready 042 101 Fig. 3-236
f<>: Not ready 042 140 Fig. 3-236
f<>: Blocked by V< 042 102 Fig. 3-238
f<>: Starting f1 042 107 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Starting f1/df1 042 108 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Delta f1 triggered 042 109 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed 042 110 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Trip signal f1 042 111 Fig. 3-240
f<>: Starting f2 042 115
f<>: Starting f2/df2 042 116
f<>: Delta f2 triggered 042 117
f<>: Delta t2 elapsed 042 118
f<>: Trip signal f2 042 119
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-35

(continued)
Power directional protection P<>: Blocking tP> EXT 035 082 Fig. 3-243
P<>: Blocking tP>> EXT 035 083 Fig. 3-243
P<>: Blocking tQ> EXT 035 084 Fig. 3-245
P<>: Blocking tQ>> EXT 035 085 Fig. 3-245
P<>: Blocking tP< EXT 035 050 Fig. 3-247
P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT 035 051 Fig. 3-247
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT 035 052 Fig. 3-250
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT 035 053 Fig. 3-250
P<>: Enabled 036 250 Fig. 3-241
P<>: Starting P> 035 086 Fig: 3-243, 3-
253
P<>: Starting P>> 035 089 Fig: 3-243,
3-253
P<>: Signal P> delayed 035 087 Fig. 3-243
P<>: Signal P>> delayed 035 090 Fig. 3-243
P<>: Trip signal P> 035 088 Fig. 3-244
P<>: Trip signal P>> 035 091 Fig. 3-244
P<>: Starting Q> 035 092 Fig: 3-245, 3-
254
P<>: Starting Q>> 035 095 Fig: 3-245,
3-254
P<>: Signal Q> delayed 035 093 Fig. 3-245
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed 035 096 Fig. 3-245
P<>: Trip signal Q> 035 094 Fig. 3-246
P<>: Trip signal Q>> 035 097 Fig. 3-246
P<>: Starting P< 035 054 Fig: 3-247,
3-248,3-253
P<>: Starting P<< 035 060 Fig: 3-247,
3-248,3-253
P<>: Signal P< delayed 035 055 Fig: 3-247,
3-248
P<>: Signal P<< delayed 035 061 Fig: 3-247,
3-248
P<>: tP< elapsed trans. 035 056 Fig: 3-247,
3-248
P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. 035 062 Fig: 3-247,
3-248
P<>: tP</tP<< elaps.trans 035 178 Fig. 3-247
P<>: Fault P< 035 057 Fig: 3-247,
3-249
P<>: Fault P<< 035 063 Fig. 3-247
P<>: Trip signal P< 035 058 Fig. 3-248
P<>: Trip signal P<< 035 064 Fig. 3-248
P<>: Trip signal P< trans 035 059 Fig. 3-248
P<>: Trip sig. P<< trans. 035 065 Fig. 3-248
P<>: Starting Q< 035 066 Fig: 3-250,
3-251,3-254
P<>: Starting Q<< 035 010 Fig: 3-250,
3-251,3-254
P<>: Signal Q< delayed 035 067 Fig: 3-250,
3-251
P<>: Signal Q<< delayed 035 011 Fig: 3-250,
3-251
P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. 035 068 Fig: 3-250,
3-251
P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. 035 016 Fig: 3-250,
3-251
P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans 035 179 Fig. 3-250
P<>: Fault Q< 035 069 Fig: 3-250,
3-252
P<>: Fault Q<< 035 049 Fig. 3-250
8-36 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
P<>: Trip signal Q< 035 155 Fig. 3-251

P<>: Trip signal Q<< 035 176 Fig. 3-251
P<>: Trip sig. Q< trans. 035 156 Fig. 3-251
P<>: Trip sig. Q<< trans. 035 177 Fig. 3-251
P<>: Direction P forw. 035 181 Fig. 3-253
P<>: Direction P backw. 035 191 Fig. 3-253
P<>: Direction Q forw. 035 193 Fig. 3-254
P<>: Direction Q backw. 035 194 Fig. 3-254
CBF: Ready 038 009
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Startup 3p 038 211 Fig. 3-259

Protection
CBF: Starting trig. EXT 038 016 Fig. 3-255
CBF: Blocking EXT 038 058
CBF: Enable EXT 038 041
CBF: Disable EXT 038 042
CBF: Enabled 040 055 Fig. 3-255

CBF: Not ready 040 025 Fig. 3-256
CBF: Trip signal 040 026 Fig. 3-262
CBF: Starting 038 021 Fig. 3-262
CBF: Ext./user enabled 038 040 Fig. 3-255
CBF: CB failure 036 017 Fig. 3-260
CBF: Start 3p EXT 038 205 Fig. 3-259
CBF: Start enable EXT 038 209 Fig. 3-259
CBF: CB pos. implausible 038 210 Fig. 3-258
CBF: Trip signal t1 038 215 Fig. 3-260
CBF: Trip signal t2 038 219 Fig. 3-260
CBF: Trip command t1 038 220 Fig. 3-261
CBF: Trip command t2 038 224 Fig. 3-261
CBF: Fault behind CB 038 225 Fig. 3-263
CBF: TripSig CBsync.super 038 226 Fig. 3-264
CBF: CBsync.superv A open 038 227 Fig. 3-264
CBF: CBsync.superv B open 038 228 Fig. 3-264
CBF: CBsync.superv C open 038 229 Fig. 3-264
CBF: Current flow A 038 230 Fig. 3-257
CBF: Current flow B 038 231 Fig. 3-257
CBF: Current flow C 038 232 Fig. 3-257
CBF: Current flow Phx 038 233 Fig. 3-257
CBF: CB faulty EXT 038 234 Fig. 3-260
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Reset meas.val. EXT 005 247 Fig.*: 3-86
CBM: Blocking EXT 044 128 Fig. 3-273
CBM: Enabled 044 130 Fig. 3-265
CBM: Cycle running A 044 205
CBM: Cycle running B 044 206
CBM: Cycle running C 044 207
CBM: Blocked 044 199 Fig. 3-273

CBM: Sig. No. CB op. > 044 135 Fig. 3-272
CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.< 044 136 Fig. 3-271
CBM: Signal ΣItrip> 044 137
CBM: Signal ΣItrip**2> 044 138
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-37

(continued)
CBM: Signal ΣI*t> 044 139
CBM: tmax> A 044 177
CBM: tmax> B 044 178
CBM: tmax> C 044 179
CBM: Curr. flow ended A 044 201
CBM: Curr. flow ended B 044 202
CBM: Curr. flow ended C 044 203
CBM: Setting error CBM 044 204
Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: Enabled 040 094 Fig. 3-275

MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 040 087 Fig. 3-275
MCMON: Undervoltage 038 038 Fig. 3-276
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 038 049 Fig. 3-276
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 038 023 Fig. 3-274
MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 037 020 Fig. 3-274
MCMON: FF, Vref triggered 038 100 Fig. 3-277
MCMON: Meas. voltage o.k. 038 048 Fig. 3-276
MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 040 078
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig: 3-278,

3-282
LIMIT: tI> elapsed 040 220 Fig. 3-278
LIMIT: tI>> elapsed 040 221 Fig. 3-278
LIMIT: tI< elapsed 040 222 Fig. 3-278
LIMIT: tI<< elapsed 040 223 Fig. 3-278
LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed 040 224 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed 040 225 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed 040 226 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed 040 227 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed 040 228 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed 040 229 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed 040 230 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed 040 231 Fig. 3-279
LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed 040 168 Fig. 3-280
LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed 040 169 Fig. 3-280
LIMIT: tVref> elapsed 042 152 Fig. 3-282
LIMIT: tVref>> elapsed 042 153 Fig. 3-282
LIMIT: tVref< elapsed 042 154 Fig. 3-282
LIMIT: tVref<< elapsed 042 155 Fig. 3-282
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> 040 180 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed 040 182 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed 040 183 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed 040 186 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed 040 187 Fig. 3-281
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: tT> elapsed 040 172 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed 040 173 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig. 3-283
8-38 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
LIMIT: tT< elapsed 040 176 Fig. 3-283

LIMIT: tT<< elapsed 040 177 Fig. 3-283
LIMIT: Starting T1> 040 200 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: Starting T2> 040 210
LIMIT: Starting T1>> 040 201 Fig. 3-284

LIMIT: Starting T2>> 040 211
LIMIT: tT1> elapsed 040 202 Fig. 3-284

LIMIT: tT2> elapsed 040 212
LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed 040 203 Fig: 3-284,

3-285
LIMIT: tT2>> elapsed 040 213 Fig. 3-285
LIMIT: tT3>> elapsed 040 163 Fig. 3-285
3-286
3-286
3-286
3-286
3-286
3-286
LIMIT: Starting T1< 040 204 Fig. 3-284
LIMIT: Starting T2< 040 214
LIMIT: Starting T1<< 040 205 Fig. 3-284
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-39

(continued)
LIMIT: Starting T2<< 040 215
LIMIT: tT1< elapsed 040 206 Fig. 3-284

LIMIT: tT2< elapsed 040 216
LIMIT: tT1<< elapsed 040 207 Fig. 3-284

LIMIT: tT2<< elapsed 040 217
LIMIT: 2out of3 with T1,2,3 041 248 Fig. 3-285

LIMIT: tIPxx triggered 221 232
LIMIT: tVPGxx triggered 221 233
LIMIT: tVPPxx triggered 221 234
LIMIT: tVNGxx triggered 221 235
LIMIT: tVrefxx triggered 221 237
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig. 3-289

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig. 3-289

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig. 3-288
8-40 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig. 3-288

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
LOGIC: 1 has been set 034 067 Fig. 3-288

LOGIC: 2 has been set 034 068
LOGIC: 1 set externally 034 075 Fig. 3-288

LOGIC: 2 set externally 034 076
LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig. 3-289

LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig. 3-289
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-41

(continued)
LOGIC: Output 32 042 094 Fig. 3-308

LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig. 3-289
LOGIC: Output 3 (t) 042 037
External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030 Fig: 3-296,
3-302
DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080
8-42 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031 Fig: 3-296,

3-302
DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081 Fig. 3-68
DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131
DEV10: Closed signal EXT 211 231 Fig. 3-68

DEV01: Control state 210 018 Fig: 3-22,
3-296,3-302
DEV02: Control state 210 068
DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036 Fig: 3-296,

3-302,3-303,
3-304
DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086
DEV10: Switch. device open 211 236 Fig. 3-79

DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037 Fig: 3-296,
3-302,3-303,
3-304
DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087
DEV01: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 038 Fig: 3-296,

3-302
DEV02: Sw. dev. interm.pos 210 088
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-43

(continued)
DEV01: Open command 210 028 Fig. 3-301

DEV02: Open command 210 078
DEV01: Close command 210 029 Fig: 3-301,

3-303,3-304
DEV02: Close command 210 079
DEV01: Open cmd. received 218 000 Fig. 3-297

DEV02: Open cmd. received 218 002
DEV01: Close cmd. received 218 001 Fig. 3-297

DEV02: Close cmd. received 218 003
8-44 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032 Fig. 3-308

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033
ILOCK: Output 32 250 063 Fig. 3-298
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001 Fig. 3-309

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006
CMD_1: Command C011 200 051 Fig. 3-305

CMD_1: Command C012 200 056 Fig. 3-305
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-45

(continued)
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004 Fig. 3-310
SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012
SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092 Fig. 3-305

SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005 Fig. 3-310

SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013
8-46 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093 Fig. 3-305

Binary counts COUNT: Set counter 1 EXT 217 130 Fig. 3-312
COUNT: Transmit counts EXT 217 009 Fig. 3-312
COUNT: Reset EXT 217 004 Fig. 3-312
COUNT: Enabled 217 001 Fig. 3-312
COUNT: Transmit counts 217 010 Fig. 3-312
COUNT: Reset 217 005 Fig. 3-312
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-47

(continued)
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Device DVICE: Service info 031 080 031 080
Local control panel LOC: Param. change enabl. 003 010
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test 003 180 Fig. 3-17
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test spont.sig.start 003 184 Fig. 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM1: Test spont.sig. end 003 186 Fig. 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test 103 180 Fig. 3-19
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test spont.sig.start 103 184 Fig. 3-19
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM2: Test spont.sig. end 103 186 Fig. 3-19
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Rset.No.tlg.err.USER 120 037
COMM3: Send signal for test 120 050
COMM3: Log. state for test 120 051
COMM3: Send signal, test 120 053
COMM3: Loop back send 120 055
COMM3: Loop back test 120 054
COMM3: Hold-time for test 120 052
IEC Generic Substation GSSE: Reset statistics 105 171
Status Events
Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L 105 160
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).
GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H 105 161
Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE
sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to
32).
GSSE: Tx message counter 105 162
Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Reset c ounters.
GSSE: Rx message counter 105 163
Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by

8-48 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
GSSE: No. bin.state chang. 105 164
Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by

GSSE: Tx last sequence 105 165
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent
with each GSSE.
GSSE: Tx last message 105 166
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each
GSSE.
GSSE: No. reject. messages 105 167
Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible

message content. This counter is reset by GSSE: Res e t counters .
GSSE: IED view selection 105 170
Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is
to be displayed.
GSSE: IED receiv. messages 105 172
Counter of the received GSSE telegrams.

GSSE: IED Rx last sequence 105 173
State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received
with each GSSE.
GSSE: IED Rx last message 105 174
State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with
each GSSE.
GSSE: IED missed messages 105 175
Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters .
GSSE: IED missed changes 105 176
Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence

numbering). This counter is reset by G SSE: Reset counters .
GSSE: IED time-outs 105 177
Number of GSSE received after the validity time period has elapsed. This
counter is reset by GSSE: Res e t counters .
Measured data output MEASI: Reset Tmax USER 003 045
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to

updated measured values.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-49

(continued)
Binary outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER 021 009 Fig. 3-33
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.

OUTP: Relay assign. f.test 003 042 Fig. 3-34
Selection of an output relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay test 003 043 Fig. 3-34
The output relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration of the set
time ( O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t ).
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
OUTP: Hold-time for test 003 044 Fig. 3-34
Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.
Measured data output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116 Fig. 3-37
Resetting the measured data output function.
Main function MAIN: General reset USER 003 002 Fig. 3-85
Reset of the following memories:

All counters
LED indicators
Operating data memory
All event memories
Event counters
Fault data
Measured overload data
Recorded fault values
MAIN: Enable syst. IN USER 003 142 Fig. 3-62
Enabling the residual current stages of the DTOC/IDMT protection.

MAIN: Disable syst.IN USER 003 141 Fig. 3-62
Disabling the residual current stages of the DTOC/IDMT protection.

MAIN: Reset indicat. USER 021 010 Fig. 3-85
Reset of the following displays:

LED indicators
Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER 021 005 Fig. 3-76
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER 003 007 Fig. 3-78
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
8-50 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
MAIN: Reset IP,max,st.USER 003 033 Fig. 3-49
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.

MAIN: Reset meas.v.en.USER 003 032 Fig. 3-59
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER 005 253 Fig. 3-86
MAIN: Group reset 2 USER 005 254 Fig. 3-86
Group of resetting commands.

MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER 003 040 Fig. 3-77
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting is
password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER 018 033 Fig. 3-69
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm restart 003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart 000 085
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6). A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default
settings given in the ‘Range of Values’ column in the Address List. They are
selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset record. USER 100 001 Fig. 3-91
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 008 Fig. 3-92
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset record. USER 100 003 Fig. 3-97
Reset of the overload memory.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset record. USER 100 000 Fig. 3-106
Reset of the ground fault memory.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-51

(continued)
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig. 3-114
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset record. USER 003 006 Fig. 3-115
Reset of the following memories:

LED indicators
Fault memory
Fault counter
Fault data
Recorded fault values
Protective signaling PSIG: Enable USER 003 132 Fig. 3-153
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Disable USER 003 131 Fig. 3-153
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Test telecom. USER 015 009 Fig. 3-155
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enable USER 003 134 Fig. 3-159
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Disable USER 003 133 Fig. 3-159
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Reset counters USER 003 005 Fig. 3-175
The ARC counters are reset.

ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER 011 066 Fig. 3-173
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable USER 003 136 Fig. 3-177
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Disable USER 003 135 Fig. 3-177
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Reset counters USER 003 089 Fig. 3-187
The ASC counters are reset.

ASC: Test close requ.USER 018 005 Fig. 3-179
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to
the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
8-52 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
ASC: Close request USER 018 004 Fig. 3-179
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the
CB if the ASC check is positive.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Reset counters USER 003 004 Fig: 3-195,
determination using 3-201
steady-state values
The counters for the ground fault direction determination function using
steady-state values are reset.
Transient ground fault TGFD: Reset signal USER 003 009 Fig. 3-206
The direction decisions can be reset while the buffer time is elapsing.
TGFD: Reset counters USER 003 022 Fig. 3-208
The counters for the transient ground fault direction determination function
are reset.
Motor protection MP: Reset replica USER 022 073 Fig. 3-217
Resetting the thermal replica of the motor protection function.

MP: Initialize Hours_Run 025 151
In order to set the default value for the operating hours, this parameter
should be set to 'execute'.
MP: Init. val. Hours_Run 025 154
Setting for the default value of the operating hours counter.
Thermal overload protection THERM: Reset replica USER 022 061 Fig. 3-224
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080
protection
Resetting the measured event values f<> : m a x. fre qu . for f> and
f < > : m in . f r e qu . for f< .
Circuit Breaker Failure CBF: Enable USER 003 016
Protection
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
CBF: Disable USER 003 015 Fig. 3-255
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Initialize values 003 011 Fig. 3-270
Setting default values.

CBM: Reset meas.val. USER 003 013 Fig. 3-270
Resetting the measured value memories.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-53

(continued)
CBM: Set No. CB oper. A 022 131 Fig. 3-270

CBM: Set No. CB oper. B 022 132
CBM: Set No. CB oper. C 022 133
Set the number of CB operations.

CBM: Set remain. CB op. A 022 134 Fig. 3-270
CBM: Set remain. CB op. B 022 135
CBM: Set remain. CB op. C 022 136
Set the remaining CB operations.

CBM: Set ΣItrip A 022 137 Fig. 3-270
CBM: Set ΣItrip B 022 138
CBM: Set ΣItrip C 022 139
CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 A 022 140 Fig. 3-270
CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 B 022 141
CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 C 022 142
CBM: Set ΣI*t A 022 143 Fig. 3-270
CBM: Set ΣI*t B 022 144
CBM: Set ΣI*t C 022 145
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig. 3-289

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig. 3-289
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
Binary counts COUNT: Transmit counts USER 217 008 Fig. 3-312
Count transmission.
COUNT: Reset USER 217 003 Fig. 3-312
Count reset.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. data record. 003 024 Fig. 3-91
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Mon. signal record. 003 001 Fig. 3-92
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-54 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. telegram errors 120 042
Main function MAIN: No. general start. 004 000 Fig. 3-74
Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087
MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. 221 091
Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 004 006 Fig. 3-78
Number of general trip commands 1.

MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 009 050 Fig. 3-78
Number of general trip commands 2.

MAIN: No. close commands 009 055 Fig. 3-69
Number of close commands.

MAIN: No. motor drive op. 221 025 Fig. 3-82
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated
during the monitoring time.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out 009 090 Fig. 3-59
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp 009 091 Fig. 3-59
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
input was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out 009 092 Fig. 3-59
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp 009 093 Fig. 3-59
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. 100 002 Fig. 3-91
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: No. monit. signals 004 019 Fig. 3-92
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101 Fig. 3-96
Number of overload events.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: No. ground faults 004 100 Fig. 3-105
Number of ground faults.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-55

(continued)
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of faults 004 020 Fig. 3-114
Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. system disturb. 004 010 Fig. 3-114
Number of system disturbances.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Number HSR A-B-C 004 007 Fig. 3-175
Number of high-speed reclosures.

ARC: Number TDR 004 008 Fig. 3-175
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: No. RC aft. man.clos 004 009 Fig. 3-187
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.

ASC: No. close requests 009 033 Fig. 3-187
Number of close requests.

ASC: No. close rejections 009 034 Fig. 3-187
Number of close rejections.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: No. GF power/admitt. 009 002 Fig. 3-201
determination using
steady-state values
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
GFDSS: No. GF (curr. meas) 009 003 Fig. 3-195
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: No. GF admitt. Y(N) 009 060 Fig. 3-201
Number of ground faults (non-directional) detected by the admittance

evaluation method.
GFDSS: No. GF forward/LS 009 000 Fig. 3-201
Number of ground faults in the forward direction.

GFDSS: No. GF backward/BS 009 001 Fig. 3-201
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Transient ground fault TGFD: No. GF 004 015 Fig. 3-208

Number of transient ground faults.
TGFD: No. GF forward/LS 004 013 Fig. 3-208
Number of transient ground faults in the forward direction.

TGFD: No. GF backward/BS 004 014 Fig. 3-208
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Motor protection MP: No. of start-ups 004 011 Fig. 3-216
Number of motor startups since the last reset.

MP: No. of hours run 025 150
Number of operating hours since the last reset.
8-56 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: No. of CB oper. A 008 011 Fig. 3-270
CBM: No. of CB oper. B 008 012 Fig. 3-272
CBM: No. of CB oper. C 008 013 Fig. 3-272
Number of mechanical switching operations made.

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. A 008 014 Fig. 3-270
CBM: Remain. No. CB op. B 008 015 Fig. 3-271
CBM: Remain. No. CB op. C 008 016 Fig. 3-271
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear

with reference to the CB wear characteristic).
External devices DEV01: Operation counter 210 043
DEV02: Operation counter 210 093
DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003
8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Overload data acquisition OL_DA: Overload duration 004 102 Fig. 3-93
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: T.taken f.startup,MP 005 096 Fig. 3-94
Display of the motor startup time.

OL_DA: Start-up current, MP 005 098 Fig. 3-94
Display of the motor startup current.

OL_DA: Heat.dur.start-up,MP 005 097 Fig. 3-94
Display of startup heating in motor protection.

OL_DA: Status THERM replica 004 147 Fig. 3-95
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load current THERM 004 058 Fig. 3-95
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-57

(continued)
OL_DA: Object temp. THERM 004 035 Fig. 3-95
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant temp. THERM 004 036 Fig. 3-95
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at

TH ER M : Se lec t C T A.
When set to "Default temp. value" the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to "From 20 mA input"
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHERM 004 148 Fig. 3-95
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
OL_DA: Offset THERM replica 004 154 Fig. 3-95
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account

and if the coolant temperature has been set to a value below the maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If, on the other hand, the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible
coolant temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant
temperature is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of
the current only. The additional reserve amounts to zero in this case.
Ground fault data acquisition GF_DA: Ground flt. duration 009 100 Fig. 3-98
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault.
GF_DA: GF duration pow.meas 009 024 Fig. 3-99
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state power evaluation feature of the ground fault
GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.u. 009 020 Fig: 3-100,
3-104
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage of the most recent ground
fault referred to Vnom.
Note:
This display is only active when the steady-state power evaluation mode of
the GFDSS ground fault direction determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN p.u. 009 021 Fig: 3-100, 3-
102,3-104
Display of the residual current of the most recent ground fault referred to
IN,nom.
Note:
This display is only active when the ground fault direction determination
function using steady state values (GFDSS) is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN,act p.u. 009 022 Fig. 3-100
Display of the active component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note:
8-58 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
GF_DA: Curr. IN,reac p.u. 009 023 Fig. 3-100
Display of the reactive component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note:
GF_DA: GF durat. curr.meas. 009 026 Fig. 3-101
determined by the steady-state current evaluation feature of the ground fault
GF_DA: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 009 025 Fig. 3-102
Display of the residual current component having the set filter frequency for
the most recent ground fault (referred to IN,nom).
GF_DA: GF duration admitt. 009 068 Fig. 3-103
determined by the admittance evaluation mode of the ground fault direction
determination function.
GF_DA: Admittance Y(N) p.u. 009 065 Fig. 3-104
Display of the admittance value referred to YN,nom.

GF_DA: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 009 066 Fig. 3-104
Display of the conductance value referred to YN,nom.

GF_DA: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 009 067 Fig. 3-104
Display of the susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration 008 010 Fig. 3-107
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running time 004 021 Fig. 3-107
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Fault current P p.u. 004 025 Fig. 3-111
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u. 004 026 Fig. 3-111
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to

Vnom .
FT_DA: Fault loop angle P 004 024 Fig. 3-111
Display of the fault angle.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-59

(continued)
FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. 004 049 Fig. 3-111
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.

FT_DA: Fault loop angle N 004 048 Fig. 3-111
Display of the ground fault angle.

FT_DA: Meas. loop selected 004 079 Fig. 3-111
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.

FT_DA: Fault react., prim. 004 029 Fig. 3-111
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. 004 028 Fig. 3-111
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec 004 023 Fig. 3-111
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault locat. percent 004 027 Fig: 3-38,
3-112
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting
F T_D A: Line r eac tance PSx.
FT_DA: Fault location 004 022 Fig. 3-112
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.

FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt. 004 037 Fig. 3-113
Display of the load impedance (in Ω) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended.
The display only appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data
acquisition function of the P139.
FT_DA: Load angle post-flt. 004 038 Fig. 3-113
Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended.
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt 004 039 Fig. 3-113
Display of the residual current referred to Inom after the general starting
condition of time-overcurrent protection has ended.
8-60 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

(continued)
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Voltage Vref 004 087 Fig. 3-186
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop 004 088 Fig. 3-186
ASC: Volt. magnit. diff. 004 091 Fig: 3-182,
3-186
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop
voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Angle difference 004 089 Fig: 3-182,
3-186
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
ASC: Frequ. difference 004 090 Fig: 3-182,
3-186
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Max. frequ. for f> 005 002
protection
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
f<>: Min. frequ. for f< 005 001
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
Circuit Breaker Monitoring CBM: Itrip,prim A 009 212 Fig. 3-270

CBM: Itrip,prim B 009 213
CBM: Itrip,prim C 009 214
CBM: Itrip A 009 047 Fig. 3-270

CBM: Itrip B 009 048
CBM: Itrip C 009 049
CBM: Itrip**2 A 009 051 Fig. 3-270

CBM: Itrip**2 B 009 052
CBM: Itrip**2 C 009 053
Ruptured currents and their squared values.

CBM: ΣItrip A 009 071 Fig. 3-270
CBM: ΣItrip B 009 073
CBM: ΣItrip C 009 076
CBM: ΣItrip**2 A 009 077 Fig. 3-270

CBM: ΣItrip**2 B 009 078
CBM: ΣItrip**2 C 009 079
CBM: I*t A 009 061 Fig. 3-270

CBM: I*t B 009 062
CBM: I*t C 009 063
CBM: ΣI*t A 009 087 Fig. 3-270

CBM: ΣI*t B 009 088
CBM: ΣI*t C 009 089
Sum of the ruptured currents and of their squared values.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 8-61

(continued)
8.2.3 Event Recording
Overload recording OL_RC: Overload recording 1 033 020 Fig. 3-97

OL_RC: Overload recording 2 033 021 Fig. 3-97
Point of entry into the overload log.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 1 033 010 Fig. 3-106
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 2 033 011 Fig. 3-106
Point of entry into the ground fault log.
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recording 1 003 000 Fig. 3-115

FT_RC: Fault recording 2 033 001 Fig. 3-115
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-62 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Instructions
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the beginning of
Chapter 5 must be observed.
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately marked, as
the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the
rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section of the ground conductor must
conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm2 is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters "PE" on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected, always
disconnect the device from the supply.
The threaded terminal block for connection to the current transformers is not a shorting
block. Therefore always short-circuit current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the P139 must always
be installed outside of this hazardous area.
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply voltage
for the device is shut off.
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is
required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore, when connecting the prescribed connecting
cable be careful not to touch the socket contacts.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data')
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must carry out a
functional type test to conform to the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time performance during device
startup, during operation and when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
9-2 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Commissioning Tests
Preparation
After the P139 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see Chapter 3, ‘Self-Monitoring’). The LED indicators for ‘Operation’ (H1)
and ‘Blocked/Faulty’ (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s, the P139 is ready for
operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart, the device type “P139 ” and
the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD after the device has started up. If a
bay type has already been selected this bay will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Chapter 6, ‘Enabling
Parameter Changes’), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings
from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
Note: First the type of bay wanted is to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y ,

'Par/Conf/' folder. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at
M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O then selecting the type of bay will
automatically configure binary signal inputs and output relays according to
the definitions corresponding to the bay type (see 'List of Bay Types' in the
Appendix).
After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter 'Type of bay'
the signal 'Bay initialization' is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of
20 s. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is
not possible during this time period.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P139
and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the
integrated local control panel.
‘Par/DvID/’ folder:
DVICE: Device password 1
DVICE: Device password 2
‘Par/Conf/’ folder:
PC: Name of manufacturer
PC: Bay address
PC: Device address
PC: Baud rate
PC: Parity bit
COMM1: Function group COMM1
COMM1: General enable USER
COMM1: Name of manufacturer
COMM1: Line idle state
COMM1: Baud rate
COMM1: Parity bit
COMM1: Communicat. protocol
COMM1: Octet comm. address
COMM1: Octet address ASDU
COMM2: Name of manufacturer
COMM2: Line idle state
COMM2: Baud rate
COMM2: Parity bit
COMM2: Octet comm. address
COMM2: Octet address ASDU
COMM3: Baud rate
9-4 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder:
PC: Command blocking
PC: Sig./meas.val.block.
COMM1: Command blocking
COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER
COMM2: Command blocking
COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.
Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before the blocking is cancelled:
Is the correct bay type configured?

Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly configured?
Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder):
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e 'Yes' (on)'
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P139, it is possible to determine
whether the P139 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing, the trip
commands can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R
('Par/Func/Glob' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit
breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for 100 ms through
M A I N : M a n . T r i p c m d . U S E R (‘Oper/CtrlTest’ folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local
control panel is password-protected (see Chapter 6, "Password-Protected Control
Operations").
Note: The manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip
command 1 or trip command 2.
If the P139 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to activate the
test mode via M A I N : T e s t m o d e U S E R (folder ‘Par/Func/Glob’) or an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified
accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
9-6 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary

signal inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder), it is possible to
determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized correctly by the device.
The values displayed have the following meanings:
"Low": Not energized.

"High": Energized.
"Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t , ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
It is password-protected (see Chapter 6, ‘Password-Protected Control Operations’).
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Checking the current-

measuring inputs
By injecting appropriate analog test values at the measuring inputs it is possible to
check, by taking a readout from the operating data display (see Chapter 8 "Information
and Control Functions”), whether the Time-Overcurrent Protection and Control Unit will
detect such analog signals within the required class accuracy (‘Oper/Cycl/Meas’ folder).
M A I N : C u r r e n t A p . u . : Display of the updated phase A current in reference to
the nominal device current Inom
M A I N : C u r r e n t B p . u . : Display of the updated phase B current in reference to
M A I N : C u r r e n t C p . u . : Display of the updated phase C current in reference to
C u r r e n t I N p . u . : Display of the updated residual current IN in reference to the
nominal device current Inom
Application of analog test values to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see Chapter 'Technical Data').
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the protection

function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P139, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m .
s u b s e t (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder).
When checking the time-overcurrent protection function with a testing device the
measuring-circuit monitoring function must be disabled at
(M C M O N : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Main’ folder), as this protection will
always be triggered – depending on the setting – and error messages will be issued.
Checking the correct
phase connection of
current and voltage
transformers with load
current
The user can check to make sure connection to the system’s current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle (M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i A , M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i B , and
M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i C in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Meas/’ folder). In this test it is required
that the connection 'Standard' has been made according to the standard schematic
connection diagram shown in Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and that the
parameter at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I P (‘Par/Funk/Glob’ folder) is set to
'Standard'. If there is only an ohmic (resistive) load then the load angles for all three
phases toward the line must come to approximately 0°. The load angles are only
determined if at least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.
9-8 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the correct

phase connection of the
residual current
transformer with load
current
The user can check that the P139 connection to the system’s residual current
transformer involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data display at
M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i N ('Oper/Cycl/Meas/' folder). For this the required
measured variables VN-G and IN must be generated. When the connection 'Standard' has
been made according to the standard schematic connection diagram shown in Chapter
'Installation and Connection' and the parameter at M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N
(‘Par/Func/Glob’ folder) is set to 'Standard', then one phase-to-ground voltage must be
opened and the phase currents of the other two phases must be shorted at the same
time (see figure 9-1).
The selected phase sequence (alternative terminology: Rotary field) must match the
actual phase sequence. If there is only an ohmic (resistive) load then angle ϕN must
take on the following values (depending whether the energy flow is towards the line or
towards the busbar):
Display Energy flow towards Energy flow towards

the line the busbar
MAIN: Angle phi N Approx. 0° Approx. 180°
('Oper/Cycl/Meas' folder)
Simple check of the correct

phase connection of the
residual current
transformer with load
current
In case no system current transformer (e.g. a core balance CT) is available to supply a
residual current value then a simple check may be carried out. After a positive check of
the correct phase connection of current and voltage transformers and after one of the
phase currents has been short-circuited, a phase comparison of the measured residual
current value with the total value of all phase currents is carried out. In the event of
phase congruence or a positive directional check, the operating panel
M A I N : P h a s e r e l . , I N v s Σ I P (‘Oper/Cycl/Meas’ folder) will display the value '1'.
A check of the phase relation will only be carried out if the calculated residual current
exceeds the value 0.1 Inom.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-1 Connection example to generate measured variables
9-10 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the definite-time

function
A test of the definite-time overcurrent protection can only be carried out when the
following conditions are met:
The DTOC function is activated. This can be determined by checking logic state
signal D T O C : E n a b l e d (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
The function at M A I N : B l o c k t i m . s t . I N , n e g must be set to 'No'
(‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder).
The function at M A I N : G e n . s t a r t i n g m o d e is to be set to 'with start. IN, Ineg'
The short-circuit direction determination function must be disabled.
S C D D : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is to be set to ‘No’ (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder).
By injecting appropriate analog test values at the current measuring inputs it is possible
to check the overcurrent stages and their associated timer stages.
Checking the inverse-time

function
A test of the inverse-time overcurrent protection can only be carried out when the
following conditions are met:
The IDMT function is activated. This can be determined by checking logic state
signal I D M T : E n a b l e d (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
The function at M A I N : B l o c k t i m . s t . I N , n e g must be set to 'No'
The function at M A I N : G e n . s t a r t i n g m o d e is to be set to 'with start. IN, Ineg'
The short-circuit direction determination function must be disabled.
S C D D : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is to be set to ‘No’ (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder).
By injecting appropriate analog test values at the current measuring inputs it is possible
to check the overcurrent stages and their associated timer stages.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Tripping times issued by the inverse-time maximum current protection, and dependant
on the tripping characteristic selected, are given in the following table:
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset Characteristic
Characteristic
Characteristic settable a b c R
factor:
k = 0.05 to 10.00
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 A
t =k⋅ B
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ I ref ⎠
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 A k ⋅R
t =k⋅ B
+C tr = k ⋅ 2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ Iref ⎠ ⎝ Iref ⎠
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI A k ⋅R
t =k⋅ B
+C tr = k ⋅ 2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1 ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1
⎝ IB ⎠ ⎝ Iref ⎠
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k⋅
0.236
0.339 −
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse ⎛ I ⎞
t = k ⋅ ⎜⎜ 5.8 − 1.35 ⋅ ln ⎟⎟
⎝ Iref ⎠
9-12 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the short-circuit

direction determination:
direction of the phase
current stages
A system’s current and voltage transformers must be simulated by an appropriate testing
device. A test of the phase current stages, used with short-circuit direction
determination, can only be carried out when the following conditions are met:
The short-circuit direction determination function must be activated (see Chapter 3).
All phase currents exceed 0.1 Inom.
At least two phase-to-phase voltages exceed 200 mV.
The directions for short-circuit direction determination are set to ‘forward'.
When the connection 'Standard' has been made according to the standard schematic
connection diagram shown in Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and the parameter at
M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N is also set to 'Standard', then measurement of the
short-circuit direction determination is towards the line. The selected phase sequence
(alternative terminology: Rotary field) must match the actual phase sequence. Now the
various fault types may simulated with the appropriate starting by the DTOC and IDMT
protection by connecting different short-circuit wiring (e.g. Phase A to N). Trip signals
issued by the phase current stages are now directional.
Short-Circuit Direction
Determination: Checking
the direction of the residual
current stages
A test of the residual current stages, used with short-circuit direction determination, can
only be carried out when the following conditions are met:
The short-circuit direction determination function must be activated (see Chapter 3).
The residual current calculated must exceed 0.01 Inom.
The neutral-point displacement voltage must exceed the trigger value set at
SCDD: VNG>.
When the connection 'Standard' has been made according to the standard schematic
connection diagram shown in Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and the parameter at
M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N is also set to 'Standard', then measurement of the
short-circuit direction determination is towards the line. The selected phase sequence
(alternative terminology: Rotary field) must match the actual phase sequence. Now the
various fault types may simulated as described above in the paragraph 'Checking
direction of the phase current stages'. Trip signals issued by the residual current stages
are now directional.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-13

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking protective
signaling
The protective signaling function can only be tested if protective signaling is ready. This
can be determined by checking logic state signal P S I G : R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’
folder).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
Protective signaling is not enabled.

P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is set to 'No'.
Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly configured
binary signal input (P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T ).
A fault in the data transmission channel was detected
(P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y ).
If conditions for a test are met it is possible to generate, for testing purposes, a 'test
send' signal from the integrated local control panel (P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R )
This pulse will be present for 1 s and is extended for the set reset time. The generated
'test send' signal may be checked at the logic state signal
PSIG: Send (transm.relay).
9-14 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the auto-

reclosing function
The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal ARC: R e a d y (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
The ARC function is not enabled

(check at A R C : E n a b l e d ('Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder). This may be due to the
following reasons:
A R C : E n a b l e d U S E R (‘Par/Func/Main/’ folder) has been set to ‘No’.
ARC was disabled from an appropriately configured binary signal input (check at
the logic state signal A R C : E x t . / u s e r e n a b l e d (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder).
ARC is blocked (check at the logic state signal A R C : B l o c k e d , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/'
folder).
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
ARC: CB drive ready EXT.
There is no signal with a logic value of ‘1’ at the binary signal input configured for
M A I N : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T . The circuit breaker position signal is only
necessary if the setting at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . P S x is 'Yes'.
An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic state signal
ARC: C y c l e r u n n i n g in the ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/’ folder.)
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes from the integrated local control panel
or by triggering a binary signal input. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-15

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the motor

protection function
By injecting appropriate analog test values it is possible to check the overcurrent stage
and the associated time delay.
Before the motor protection can be tested the thermal replica must always be cleared.
Clearing the thermal replica is done by short term disabling of the protection by setting
M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e to 'No' (off) ('Par/FuncGlob/’ folder). The actual status of
the thermal replica may be read out from the operating data display at
M P : T h e r m . r e p l . b u f f e r M P ('Oper/Cycl/Meas/' folder). Because the
characteristic curve is settable, there can be different tripping times:
With the thermal replica cleared an applied test current is abruptly changed from 0
(≡ machine stopped) to a value ≥ to the setting of M P : t I S t U p > P S x , in the
'Par/Func/Main/' folder (≡ machine starting up):
36
reciprocally squared characteristic curve: t = t 6 I ⋅
ref
(I I ref )2
logarithmic characteristic curve: t = t 6 I ref ⋅ 36 ⋅ In

(I I ref )2
(I I ref )2 − 1
9-16 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the thermal

overload protection
function
By injecting appropriate analog test values it is possible to check the reference current
setting and the associated time delay.
Before the thermal overload protection can be tested the thermal replica must always be
cleared. Clearing the thermal replica is done by short term disabling of the protection by
setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e to 'No' (off) ('Par/FuncGlob/’ folder). The actual
status of the thermal replica may be read out from the operating data display at
T H E R M : S t a t u s T H E R M r e p l i c a ('Oper/Cycl/Meas/' folder). The tripping time
may be checked:
With the thermal replica cleared an applied test current is abruptly changed from 0 to the
value ≥ 0.1 Iref
2
⎛ I ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟ − ΘP
⎝ Iref ⎟⎠
t = τ ⋅ ln 2
⎛ I ⎞ ⎛ Θa − Θa,max ⎞
⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − Θoff ⋅ ⎜1 − ⎟
⎜ ⎟
⎝ I ref ⎠ ⎝ Θmax − Θa,max ⎠
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-17

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the time-voltage

protection function
By injecting appropriate analog test values at the measuring inputs it is possible to
check, by taking a readout from the operating data display (see Chapter 8 "Information
and Control Functions”), whether the device will detect such analog signals within the
required class accuracy (‘Oper/Cycl/Meas’ folder).
M A I N : V o l t a g e A - G p . u .: Display of the updated value for phase A to ground

voltage referred to Vnom.
M A I N : V o l t a g e B - G p . u .: Display of the updated value for phase B to ground
M A I N : V o l t a g e C - G p . u .: Display of the updated value for phase C to ground
M A I N : V o l t a g e V P G , m a x p . u . : Display of the updated value for max phase to
ground voltage referred to Vnom.
M A I N : V o l t a g e V P G , m i n p . u . : Display of the updated value for min phase to
ground voltage referred to Vnom.
M A I N : V o l t a g e A - B p . u . : Display of the updated value for phase A to phase B
M A I N : V o l t a g e B - C p . u . : Display of the updated value for phase B to phase C
M A I N : V o l t a g e C - A p . u . : Display of the updated value for phase C to phase A
M A I N : V o l t a g e V P P , m a x p . u . : Display of the updated value for max phase to
phase voltage referred to Vnom.
M A I N : V o l t a g e V P P , m i n p . u . : Display of the updated value for min phase to
M A I N : V o l t a g e V P P , m i n p . u . : Display of the updated value for min phase to
M A I N : V o l t . Σ ( V P G ) / √ 3 p . u . : Display of the calculated neutral-point
displacement voltage referred to Vnom.
9-18 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
By injecting appropriate analog test values at the voltage measuring inputs it is possible
to check the overvoltage and undervoltage stages as well as their associated timer
stages.
The P139 calculates the neutral-point displacement voltage from the analog test values
at the voltage measuring inputs according to below formula:
1
V N −G = ⋅ V A −G + V B−G + V C −G
3
In the case of a single-phase test setup using |VB-G| = |VC-G| = 0, the result of the
calculation formula for VN-G given above is that the triggers VN G > and VN G > > operate
when the test voltage exceeds the following value:
Vnom
V test = 3 ⋅ VNG > ⋅
3
VNG > : Setting V<>: VNG> and U<>: VNG>>
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-19

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the steady-state-

power ground fault
direction detection
If values for both residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage are available as
measuring quantities the P139, when set to operating mode 'Steady-state power' or
'Steady-state admittance', will determine the direction of a ground fault by steady-state
power evaluation of the measuring values. Depending on the setting either the value
calculated by the P139 or the value measured at the transformer T 90 will be evaluated
as the neutral-point displacement voltage. If current values only can be measured the
P139 will decide on "ground fault" ('Steady-state current' evaluation) because of the
residual current value level. Switching to 'Steady-state current' evaluation is made via
the integrated local control panel or by triggering an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
Should the system permit such operation a ground fault on the busbar side (BS) or on
the line side (LS) may be simulated by wiring a short circuit. Then the P139 must issue
the respective signal. With the operating mode for ground faults set to 'Steady-state
power' it is assumed that threshold values for residual current (set at
G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > B S P S x and G F D S S : I N , a c t > / r e a c > L S P S x )
and the neutral-point displacement voltage with 'Steady-state admittance' evaluation (set
at G F D S S : V N G > ) or G F D S S : I N are exceeded. With the operating mode set
to 'Steady-state admittance' the set threshold values for conductance / susceptance (set
at G F D S S : G ( N ) > / B ( N ) > B S and G F D S S : G ( N ) > / B ( N ) > L S ) and the
neutral-point displacement voltage (G F D S S : V N G > ) or the admittance
(G F D S S : Y ( N ) > must be exceeded.
A ground fault functional test by wiring a short circuit is, in most cases, not possible as
there is the danger of a double ground fault occurring. As an alternative it is possible to
wire the system’s CTs and VTs such that a functional test is possible without causing a
ground fault.
The residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139
are displayed as measured operating values in primary quantities referred to the nominal
quantities of the Protection & Control device (see 'Measured Operating Data').
Ancillary circuit for systems

with ground fault
compensation
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer is removed and the
associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-2 and 9-3). This will
produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller by
the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A line
current transformer must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-2).
9-20 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-2 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards BS
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-21

9 Commissioning
(continued)
A test-wire is inserted through the core balance current transformer to obtain a current
flow from the phase B line (see figure 9-3). The ancillary circuit figures include vector
diagrams displaying the position of current and voltage vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the busbar is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault on the
line side.
A
B BS
C
VNG
VA-G
VC-G VB-G
V -G
VB-G
19Z5291A_EN
9-3 Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and core balance current transformer, ground fault towards BS
9-22 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Ancillary circuit for isolated

neutral-point systems
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer’s primary side is removed
and the associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see figures 9-4 and 9-5). This
will produce a neutral-point displacement voltage VN-G with an amplitude which is smaller
by the factor √3 than with a saturated ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A and B
line current transformers must be disconnected and shorted (see figure 9-4).
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-23

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-4 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards LS
9-24 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
A test-wire is inserted through the core balance current transformer to obtain current flow
from the phase B and C lines (see figure 9-5). The ancillary circuit figures include vector
diagrams displaying the position of current and voltage vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the line side is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault on the
busbar side.
A
B BS
C
VNG
VA-G
B-C N
VC-G VB-G
VN-G
VB-G
19Z5292A_EN
9-5 Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and core balance current transformers, ground fault towards LS
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-25

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the transient

ground fault direction
determination
A secondary check of the transient ground fault direction determination is only possible
by applying a testing device which is capable of simulating the transient pulse with
sufficient accuracy. Otherwise it is possible that the transient ground fault direction
determination will not operate as the logic has been designed specifically to detect such
transient pulses.
Checking Control
Functions
The selected bay type is displayed on the Bay Panel. The selection of the Bay Panel is
described in the Chapter 6. The current switching state of the switchgear units is
displayed on the Bay Panel if state signals from such switching devices are connected
properly to binary signal inputs on the P139. Should the switching state not be displayed
correctly then it can be determined by checking the physical state of binary signal inputs
whether the state signals are presented correctly to the P139 (check at parameter
I N P : S t a t e U x x x x ‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder).
Local/Remote selection
Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control panel,
remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately configured binary
signal inputs. The control site – Local or Remote – is selected by the L/R key on the
local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary signal input. The L/R key
has no effect when a binary signal input has been configured. Using the L/R key on the
local control panel to switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' is only possible after the 'Password
L/R' was entered (see Chapter 6 for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.
Local control
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on the local
control panel, and pressing the 'Open' or 'Close' key will generate a switching request.
When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the respective binary signal input is
to be triggered.
Remote control
Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication interface
or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Switchgear unit cannot be

controlled
Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the following
reasons:
General enable for switch commands has not been set.

(Configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . c t r l . e n a b l . , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder)
Interlocking has operated.
(Check at M A I N : I n t e r l o c k e q u . v i o l . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log' folder).
Only with bays for direct motor control:
The motor protection has operated.
(Check at parameter M A I N : M o n . m o t . d r i v e s t r . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’)
9-26 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:
Bay interlock (BI): M A I N : B a y i n t e r l o c k . a c t . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’

Substation interlock (SI): M A I N : S u b s t . i n t e r l . a c t . , ‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’
With control set to 'Local':
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
(Configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . i n t e r l . d e a c t , Par/Func/Glob/’ folder)
Note: A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists

from the communication interface to the substation control level. If the
communication link is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay
interlock (BI) without substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a
communication error is present can be checked at
M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any

switchgear unit and in any control direction – "Open" or "Close".
(Check at D E V x x : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or
D E V x x : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t e r l (‘Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder’).
P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 9-27

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Completing
commissioning
Before the P139 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following
steps have been taken:
All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in ‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder.)
Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘No’.)
The device is on-line.
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , ‘Par/Func/Glob/’ folder, setting ‘Yes’ (on).)
The residual current stages are enabled (on).
( M A I N : S y s t . I N e n a b l e d U S E R , 'Par/Func/Main/' folder, setting 'Yes' (on))
Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled – if it was previously cancelled for testing
purposes.
(M C M O N : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R , 'Par/Func/Main/' folder, setting 'Yes' (on))
The correct control point - 'Local' or 'Remote' – has been activated.
The required interlock equations have been activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling ‘Operation’
(H1) should be on.
9-28 P139/EN M/Da8 // AFSV.12.10172 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P139 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled "Unpacking and Packing" in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P139
is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P139 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5-250V

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2-250V
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P139 issues an ‘Alarm’ signal on LED H3.
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see
section "Monitoring Signal Memory Readout" in Chapter 6). The table below lists
possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting has
been entered at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the P139's
response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070
Warning configured for LED H3.

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100
Warning configured for an output relay.
Key:
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
2)
: The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: –/–

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122
If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P139 hardware
configuration that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: -/-

'Warning' output relay: -/-
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
The - 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
Module in wrong slot.
10-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Defective module in slot x.

SFMON: +15V faulty mod. N 093 096
The +15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: -15V faulty mod. N 093 097
The -15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: DAC faulty module N 093 095
The digital-to-analog converter of the transient ground fault evaluation

module is defective.

SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
The checksum feature of the transient ground fault evaluation module has
detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
Fault in the program or data memory of the transient ground fault evaluation
module.

SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.

SFMON: Mod.Y RTD DPR faulty 093 108
The checksum feature of analog module (RTD) has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Mod.Y RTD RAM faulty 093 109
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module (RTD).

10-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective.

SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
Undefined operation code.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation.
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt.
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module
(digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is
detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are
deleted.

10-8 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
Software overloaded.

SFMON: Inval. SW COMM1/IEC 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
Incorrect or invalid software for transient ground fault evaluation module has
been downloaded.

SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the transient ground

fault evaluation module. It has detected an error.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: – / –
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Invalid SW vers YRTD 093 123
Incorrect or invalid software for analog module (RTD) has been

downloaded.

SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module
Y. It has detected an error.

SFMON: Time-out module YRTD 093 119
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog module

(RTD). It has detected an error.

SFMON: IRIGB faulty 093 117
The IRIGB interface is enabled but there is no plausible input signal.

SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)

SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of automatic

synchronism check (ASC)
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of

the phase-to-ground voltages.

10-10 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.

SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.

SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or

the reference voltage faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault.

SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the

current-measuring circuits.

SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits

faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 098 140
The device has detected a hardware fault in the InterMiCOM interface

(Communication Interface 3).

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
The device has detected a hardware error in the effective connection

InterMiCOM (communication interface 3).

SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 098 142
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . has elapsed indicating a

persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 098 141
The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s was

exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default
values.

SFMON: Telecom. faulty 098 006
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of protective

signaling
SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal

overload protection.
SFMON: Setting error CBM 098 020
An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.

detected.
SFMON: CB No. CB op. > 098 066
The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.

detected.
10-12 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: CB rem. No. CB op. < 098 067
The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has

fallen below the threshold.

detected.
SFMON: CB ΣItrip > 098 068
The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.

detected.
SFMON: CB ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power
has been exceeded.

detected.
SFMON: CB tmax> A 098 070
SFMON: CB tmax> B 098 071
SFMON: CB tmax> C 098 077
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.

detected.
SFMON: CB pos.sig. implaus. 098 124
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit
breaker's (CB) status signals.

SFMON: CTA error 098 034
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.

detected.
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-13

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The monitoring function for transient ground fault direction determination

has operated.

SFMON: faulty DSP 093 127
The DSP Coprocessor has detected an error.
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. DSP 093 128
Incorrect or invalid software has been downloaded for the DSP co-
processor.
SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098
A protective function has been activated that is not permitted for operation
at a system frequency of 60 Hz.

SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024
10-14 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer "PT100" to the analog I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: PT100 T1 open circ. 098 029
SFMON: PT100 Open circ.T7 098 044
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of a resistance

thermometer Tx (x = 1 ... 9) to the analog module (RTD).

detected.
SFMON: Overload 20mA input 098 025
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.

detected.
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

detected.
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for

'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and
nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t
operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under

frequency protection function
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync 093 120
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 10-15

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O
module Y. Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.

These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by

selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.

10-16 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
The P139 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55°C or 131°F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. When the
operating temperatures are approx. +45°C inside the devices, the required maintenance
interval can be increased by about 1 year.
The P139 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few µA during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note: Only Schneider Electric-approved components may be used

(see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2 P139/EN M/Aa8-S // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and
the battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:

cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be

disposed of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing

The P139 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection tested for
proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to
12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be performed at intervals of 2 to
3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P139 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-monitoring
function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the device’s general
functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is still necessary to test from
the device terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are
functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A "small" measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a "large" measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and the
phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This can best be
done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a two-phase
ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current should be such that
a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the device's terminals with the set
impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing instrument that correctly replicates the two-
phase ungrounded fault should be used for this purpose.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the starting
characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information processing is completely
digital and is based on the measured analog current and voltage values. Proper
operation was checked in conjunction with type testing.
Binary opto inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (‘Oper/Cycl/Phys’ folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no monitoring function for
the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be triggered by
way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing purposes,
triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special control
function (‘Oper/CtrlTest/’ folder).
!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial Interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 11-5

11-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of

-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled 'Technical Data'). The relative humidity must be controlled so that
neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P139 for approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply module is
used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working memory of the
processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required and discharges
rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is recommended to remove the
power supply module from the mounting rack during long storage periods. The contents
of the event memory should be previously read out and stored separately!
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 12-1

12-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P139 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators that
are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips supplied.
Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a Stabilo brand pen containing water-resistant ink
(Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, Type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 µF, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips Type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic Type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon Type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon Type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84 TE frame 88512-4-9650723-301
Operating program for Windows On request (MiCOM S1)
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 13-1

13-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614
14 Order Information
MiCOM P139
Feeder Management and Bay Control P139 P139- 9 0 -307 -4xx -614 -7xx -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -411
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 -412
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -413
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
and 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays for the
control of 3 switchgear units
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 5
Flush-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 6
Surface-mounted, with detachable HMI 7
Flush-mounted, with detachable HMI 9
Current transformer:
2)
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T1...T4) resp. 22.5mV at 50A for NCIT 9
Voltage transformer:
Without 0
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) 4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) f. Automatic Synchronism Check 5
9)
CT/VT-Boards with NCIT:
Variant 1: 22.5 mV at 50 A, 3.25 V at Vnom 9
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays) 5
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
Further add. options:

Without 0
With TGF (transient ground fault direction determination) module
3) 10) 1
With analogue module 2
With TGF and analogue module
3) 10) 3
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
With TGF and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)
3) 10) 5
With RTD module
3) 7
With RTD and analogue module
3) 8
With RTD module and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs)
3) 9
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension no.
>90 V (60...70% of Vnom = 125...150 V)
8) -461
>155 V (60...70% of Vnom = 220...250 V)
8) -462
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V)
8) -463
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V)
8) -464
With communication / information interface:

Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Protocol IEC61850 -94
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber SC and wire RJ45 6
For connection to 100 Mbit/s Ethernet, glass fiber ST and wire RJ45 7
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95

For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Language:
English (German)
4) Without order extension no.
Px40 English (English)
4) Not yet available -800
German (English)
4) -801
French (English)
4) -802
Spanish (English)
Polish (English)
Russian (English)
4) 7) Not yet available -805
P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 14-1

(continued)
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports cyrillic letters instead of special West. Europe characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
9) NCIT (non-conventional instrument transformer) option for variants with either pin terminals or ring terminals only
10)Transient ground fault option for variants with current and voltage transformers only
Information about Ordering Options
Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension number
(-805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option supporting Cyrillic
characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference menu texts (English) will be
available for display. However, other Western European languages containing extra
characters will not be fully supported. Consequently, selecting the "Russian / English"
ordering option means that it will not be possible to download Western European data
models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in most

applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special versions with
higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also "Technical Data" chapter) are provided for
applications where a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
14-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

© 2010 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P139/EN M/Ea8 Version: -614 11/2010
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2011 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P139/EN M/Ana Version: -614 -630 -615 -616 -631 -617 -632 -618 -633, Vol. 1 06/2011

MiCOM P139 TechnicalManual1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P139 TechnicalManual1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P139 TechnicalManual1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P139

Feeder Management and Bay Control

Version P139 -307 -411/412/413 -614

Content P139/EN M/Ea8 (-614)

Feeder Management and Bay Control

Installation of the DHMI:

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (MAIN) 3-74

P139/EN M/Ca8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

3.27 Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC) 3-230

3.39 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (MCMON) 3-383

P139/EN M/Ca8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 Local Control Panel 6-1

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

1 Application and Scope

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-1

Protection functions P139 P139

Control functions P139

Communication Functions P139

Measured Value Functions P139

= standard; ( ) = Ordering option

For further functions see Appendix A1

1-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-3

Parameter subset selection

50/51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 67 P,N 50 49 37 /48/49 /50 S/66 46 50 BF 25 79 6 7W/YN

1-1 Functional diagram

1-4 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

Inputs and outputs

The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 1-5

Control and display

The second communication interface (COMM2, communication protocol per

1-6 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2.2 General Data

General device data

Dimensions and Connections

Communication interfaces COMM1 to COMM3:

IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug

P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614 2-1

Communication interface IEC 61850:

Current Measuring Inputs (conventional inputs):

Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)

Other Inputs and Outputs:

Creepage Distances and Clearances

2-2 P139/EN M/Aa8 // AFSV.12.10170 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-614

2.3.1 Type Tests

1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements